SAMSON. Control Valves for Industrial Processes Volume 2

Size: px
Start display at page:

Download "SAMSON. Control Valves for Industrial Processes Volume 2"

Transcription

1 SAMSON Control Valves for Industrial Processes Volume 2

2

3 Control Valves for Industrial Processes Volume 2 Catalog 2008 Overview Series 240 Globe, Three-way and Angle Valves Up to PN 40 (Class 300) Up to DN 250 (NPS 10) Up to 450 C Volume 1 Rotary Valves for Industrial Processes Series 250 Globe, Three-way and Angle Valves Up to PN 400 (Class 2500) Up to DN 500 (NPS 20) Up to 500 C 33 Series 280 Steam-convertering Valves 195 Actuators 223 Positioners Volume 3 Limit Switches Volume 3 Accessories Volume 3 Information Sheets 259 Appendix 317 1

4

5 Contents Globe, Three-way and Angle Valves Steam-convertering Valves Series 250 Pneumatic and electric control valves for process engineering and industrial applications Nominal pressure: PN 16 to PN 400 (Class 150 to 2500) Valve size: DN 15 to DN 500 (NPS ½ to NPS 20) Temperature up to 500 C (+930 F) Information Sheet Series 240, 250, 280 Valves and valves for special applications 7 Pneumatic Control Valve Type and Type Globe Valve Type ANSI version 45 Pneumatic Control Valve Type and Type Three-way Valve Type Pneumatic Control Valve Type and Type Globe Valve Type ANSI version 77 Pneumatic Control Valve Type and Type Angle Valve Type ANSI version 101 Pneumatic Control Valve Type and Type High Pressure Valve Type Pneumatic Control Valve Type and Type Angle Valve Type 3259 High Pressure Valve acc. to IG standard 123 Pneumatic Control Valve Type and Type Micro-flow Valve Type ANSI version 139 Pneumatic Control Valve Type RVG Globe and angle valve with welding ends 147 Globe and angle valve with flanges 155 Control Valves with Ceramic Valve Trims 165 Pneumatic Control Valve Type Angle Valve with Split Body Type Flow Dividers St I and St III for Control Valves 173 Pneumatic Control Valves with AC-1 or AC-2 Trim 175 Pneumatic Control Valves with AC-3 Trim 187 Silencer Type Series 280 Pneumatic and electric steam converters for process engineering and industrial applications Nominal pressure: PN 16 to PN 630 (Class 150 to 2500) Valve size: DN 50 to DN 500 (NPS 2 to NPS 20) Temperature up to 560 C (+1040 F) Pneumatic Steam Converter Type and Type Steam-converting Valve Type 3281 and Type Pneumatic Steam Converter Type Steam-converting Valve Type Steam-converting Valve Type DUV-C3 213 Type Water Bath Desuperheater for desuperheating superheated steam to saturated steam temperature 219 Actuators Pneumatic, electric and electrohydraulic actuators for control valves and butterfly valves Information Sheet 223 Pneumatic Actuators up to 700 cm 2 Type 3271 and Type Pneumatic Actuators 1400, 2800 and 2 x 2800 cm 2 Type 3271 Hand-operated Actuator Type Hand-operated Actuator Type Electric Linear Actuator Type SAM 241 Electrohydraulic Actuators Type to TROVIS-VIEW Software 253 Information Sheets Materials and pressure-temperature diagrams 259 Valve flow coefficients 283 Appendix SAMSON Product Range 317 SAMSON Subsidiaries, Agencies and Service Facilities Worldwide 319 Index 323 3

6

7 Data Sheet Summary B 016 EN Type Water Bath Desuperheater for desuperheating superheated steam to saturated steam temperature 219 T 6661 EN TROVIS-VIEW Software 253 T EN Information Sheet Series 240, 250, 280 Valves and valves for special applications 7 T EN Information Sheet Materials and pressure-temperature diagrams 259 T EN Information Sheet Valve flow coefficients 283 T 8051 EN Pneumatic Control Valve Type and Type Globe Valve Type T 8052 EN Pneumatic Control Valve Type and Type Globe Valve Type 3251 ANSI version 45 T 8053 EN Pneumatic Control Valve Type and Type High Pressure Valve Type T 8055 EN Pneumatic Control Valve Type and Type Three-way Valve Type T 8059 EN Pneumatic Control Valve Type and Type Angle Valve Type 3259 High Pressure Valve acc. to IG standard 123 T 8060 EN Pneumatic Control Valve Type and Type Globe Valve Type T 8061 EN Pneumatic Control Valve Type and Type Globe Valve Type 3254 ANSI version 77 T 8065 EN Pneumatic Control Valve Type and Type Angle Valve Type T 8066 EN Pneumatic Control Valve Type and Type Angle Valve Type 3256 ANSI version 101 T 8070 EN Pneumatic Control Valve Type Angle Valve with Split Body Type T 8071 EN Control Valves with Ceramic Valve Trims 165 T 8081 EN Flow Dividers St I and St III for Control Valves 173 T 8082 EN Pneumatic Control Valves with AC-1 or AC-2 Trim 175 T 8083 EN Pneumatic Control Valves with AC-3 Trim 187 T 8084 EN Silencer Type T 8091 EN Pneumatic Control Valve Type and Type Micro-flow Valve Type T EN Pneumatic Control Valve Type and Type Micro-flow Valve Type 3510 ANSI version 139 T 8251 EN Pneumatic Steam Converter Type and Type Steam-converting Valve Type 3281 and Type T 8254 EN Pneumatic Steam Converter Type Steam-converting Valve Type T 8300 EN Information Sheet 223 Pneumatic, electric and electrohydraulic actuators for control valves and butterfly valves T EN Pneumatic Actuators up to 700 cm 2 Type 3271 and Type T EN Pneumatic Actuators 1400, 2800 and 2 x 2800 cm 2 Type 3271 Hand-operated Actuator Type T 8312 EN Hand-operated Actuator Type T 8330 EN Electric Linear Actuator Type SAM 241 T 8340 EN Electrohydraulic Actuators Type to T 9933 EN Pneumatic Control Valve Type RVG Globe and angle valve with welding ends 147 T EN Pneumatic Control Valve Type RVG Globe and angle valve with flanges 155 T 9934 EN Steam-converting Valve Type DUV-C

8

9 Series Pfeiffer W&T Pneumatic and Electric Control Valves Information Sheet Part 1 DN PN C NPS ¼ Class F DN 15A A JIS 10K/20K C Information Sheet T EN

10 Contents SAMSON control valves Series 240, 250, 280, W&T and valves for special applications 9 Table 1a Series 240 Control Valves and valves for special applications 10 Table 1b Series 250 Control Valves and W&T Valves 11 Table 1c Steam-converting Valves - Series 280 and W&T 11 Series 240 Type 3241 Globe Valve 12 Type 3241 in forged steel version 12 Type 3241-Gas, Pneumatic Control and Quick-acting Shut-off Valve for gases 12 Type 3241-Oil, Pneumatic Control and Quick-acting Shut-off Valve for liquid fuels and liquified petroleum gas in the liquid phase 12 Type 3241 Control Valve with safety function, typetested 13 Type 3244 Three-way Valve 13 Valves for special applications Type 3248 Cryogenic Valve 13 Type 3249 Control Valve for aseptic service 13 Type 3345 Diaphragm Valve 14 Type 3347 Control Valve for food processing 14 Type 3351 Pneumatic On-off Valve 14 Type 3510 Micro-flow Valve 14 Series 250 and W&T Type 3251 Globe Valve 15 Type 3252 High-pressure Valve 15 Type 3253 Three-way Valve 15 Type 3254 Globe Valve 15 Type 3256 Angle Valve 16 Type 3259 Angle Valve 16 W&T Type RVG Control Valve 16 Lined globe vlaves Pfeiffer Type BR 1a with PTFE lining 16 Pfeiffer Type BR 1b with PFA lining 16 Series 280 and W&T Type 3281 and Type 3286 Steam-converting Valves 17 Type 3284 Steam-converting Valve 17 W&T Type DUV-C3 Steam-converting Valve 17 Control valve details Valve bodies and styles Globe valve 18 Three-way valve 18 Angle valve 18 Cryogenic valve 19 Valve for food processing 19 Diaphragm valve 19 On-off valve 20 Micro-flow valve 20 Steam-converting valve 20 Valve bonnets Packing 20 Steam line connection 21 Seat and plug trims 21 Seat leakage rate 22 Table 2 Plug sealing and seat leakage rate 22 Pressure balancing 22 Control valves with ceramic trims 22 Flow dividers 22 AC trims and silencer 23 Additional components Bellows seal 23 Insulating section 23 Heating jacket 24 Face-to-face dimensions Globe and angle valves acc. to DIN and ANSI 24 Types of pipe connections 24 Valve-specific parameters K VS coefficient 25 Rangeability 25 Inherent characteristic 25 Actuators Pneumatic actuators 26 Electric actuators 26 Electrohydraulic actuators 26 Hand-operated actuators 26 Accessories for control valves Positioners 27 Limit switches 27 Position transmitter/potentiometer 27 Solenoid valves 27 Lock-up valve 27 Pneumatic remote adjuster 27 Supply pressure regulators 27 Supply pressure regulators with air filter 27 Pneumatic volume booster 27 Valve sizing Calculating the K V coefficient 28 Selecting the valve 28 Noise prediction x Fz factor 29 Table 3 Series 240 and Gases and vapors 30 Liquids 30 Materials conforming to DIN and ANSI/ASME Table 4 Materials 31 Selection and ordering Selection and sizing of the control valve 31 Ordering text 31 Specification sheet for control valves 32 8 Information Sheet T EN

11 SAMSON control valves Series 240, 250 and 280 Control Valves include pneumatic and electric globe valves, three-way valves, and angle valves. Their application range covers control tasks in process engineering and industrial applications as well as in supply and power plant engineering. The modular system allows easy retrofitting and servicing. The control valves consist of the valve and the actuator. They can be equipped with pneumatic, electric, electrohydraulic, or hand-operated actuators. For controlling purposes and travel indication, accessories such as positioners, limit switches and solenoid valves can either be attached directly (see page 27 and Information Sheet T 8350 EN) or according to IEC (NAMUR rib). The valve bodies are available in cast iron, spheroidal graphite iron, cast steel, cast stainless or cold-resisting steel, forged steel or forged stainless steel as well as in special materials. All parts of the valve and the pneumatic actuator housing in the completely corrosion-resistant version are made of stainless steel. Refer to the associated data sheets for details. Series 240 Series 240 Control Valves are available in nominal sizes ranging from DN 15 to DN 300 (NPS ½ to 12) and up to a nominal pressure PN 40 (Class 300). Control valves in the standard version are suitable for temperature ranges between 10 and +220 C (15 and 430 F). An insulating section allows the temperature range to be extended to 200 and +450 C ( 325 and +840 F). The plug stem is sealed either by a self-adjusting PTFE V-ring packing or an adjustable packing. To meet stricter emissions control requirements, a stainless steel bellows is used. The Type 3241 Control Valve can be equipped with a heating jacket that may also include the bellows. Series 250 Series 250 Control Valves are used when large nominal sizes and/or high pressures are involved in process engineering, power plant or supply engineering. In addition to globe, three-way and angle valves, four-flanged valve bodies with bottom plug stem guides, and valves with axial multi-stage throttling plugs, customized valve constructions to meet customer specifications can be engineered as well. The valves are manufactured in nominal sizes from DN 15 to DN 500 (NPS ½ to 16) and for nominal pressures between PN 16 and PN 400 (Class 150 to 2500). The standard versions of these control valves are suitable for temperatures ranges between 10 and +220 C (15 and 430 F). This temperature range can, however, be extended by using an adjustable high-temperature packing to a temperature range between 10 and +350 C (15 and 660 F) and by using a bellows seal or an insulating section to a temperature range between 200 and +500 C ( 325 and +930 F). Welland & Tuxhorn valves The Type RVG Pneumatic Control Valve from Welland & Tuxhorn is used in power plants and in the petrochemical industry to control feedwater and other liquids. The valves are manufactured with globe-pattern and angle-pattern bodies in nominal sizes DN 25 to DN 150 (NPS 1 to 6) with nominal pressures PN 16 to PN 400 (ANSI Class 150 to 2500). Series 280 and W&T Series 280 Steam-converting Valves are used to reduce both the steam pressure and steam temperature to optimize plant operation and heat efficiency in process plants, for example, in refineries, food and beverage, tobacco or pulp and paper industries. Steam-converting valves are based on Series 250 Valves fitted with a flow divider St III and an additional spray water connection. They are available in nominal sizes ranging from DN 50 to DN 400 (NPS 1 to 16), with nominal pressures of PN 16 to PN 400 (Class 150 to 2500) and for temperatures up to 500 C (930 F). The Type DUV-C3 Steam-converting Valve from Welland & Tuxhorn is designed for high-pressure ranges and can be engineered with varying inlet and outlet sizes. The inlet nominal sizes range from DN 80 to DN 500 and the outlet nominal sizes from DN 100 to DN Large amounts of spray water can be injected thanks to the integrated atomizing steam cooler. The valve can be operated in a wide load range. Valves for special applications These valves have been developed for special requirements including cryogenic valves, valves for food processing, diaphragm control valves and micro-flow control valves. Information Sheet T EN

12 Table 1a Series 240 Control Valves and valves for special applications Control valve Series 240 For special applications Type 3241 DIN ANSI Gas Oil TÜV Data Sheet T EN Globe valve Three-way valve for mixing or diverting service Angle valve DIN Standard version ANSI Special applications Nominal sizes JIS Low flow rates Typetested for gas, DIN EN 161 Liquid fuels, DIN EN 264 Typetested acc. to DIN On-off valves Pharmaceutical/food industries Cryogenics DN , 15, 25 NPS ½...12 ½...6 ½...6 ½...6 ½...3 ½...6 ½...5 ½...4 ¼...1 PN , , Class Nominal pressure 125, , , psi 125/ psi 150, JIS 10/20 KRF Perm. temperatures and differential pressures Refer to associated data sheet Cast iron, EN-JL1040 Spheroidal graphite iron, EN-JS1049 Cast steel, Cast stainless steel, Forged steel, Forged stainless steel, Body ASTM A 126 B, cast iron material ASTM A 216 WCC, carbon steel ASTM A 351 CF8M, stainl. steel 351CF8 GX5CrNi19-10, G20Mn5, (formerly ) Special materials Metal sealing Plug Lapped-in metal Soft sealing Pressure-balanced Diaphragm seal Insulating section Option Bellows seal Heating jacket Low-noise (flow divider) End connections Flanges Welding ends Special end connections Data Sheet T EN Information Sheet T EN

13 Table 1b Series 250 Control Valves and W&T valves Type W&T RVG BR 1a BR 1b Data Sheet T EN TB 01a TB 01b Globe valve Three-way valve for mixing or diverting service BR 1d* Angle valve DIN IG Standard version ANSI Nominal sizes Nominal pressure Class Perm. temperatures and differential pressures Body material Plug Option End connections DN NPS ½...8 ½...1 ½ ½ PN /16 10/ Refer to associated data sheet Cast steel, G17CrMo5-5, Cast stainless steel, ASTM A 216 WCC ASTM A 217 WC ASTM A 351 CF8M A316L Special materials lbs 150 lbs / PTFE Metal sealing Lapped-in metal Soft sealing Pressure-balanced Ceramic trim Insulating section Bellows seal PTFE PTFE Heating jacket Low-noise (flow divider) Flange Welding ends Special end connections / PFA Data Sheet T EN TB 01 a TB 01 b Table 1c Steam-converting Valves of the Series 280 and W&T Type W&T DUV-C3 Nominal sizes DN Inlet: Outlet: NPS Inlet: Outlet: Data Sheet T EN Technical data (DIN/ANSI) acc. to Type 3251 Type 3254 Type 3256 Information Sheet T EN

14 Series 240 Type 3241 Globe Valve (T 8012 EN to T 8022 EN) This valve is used for a wide range of applications in process engineering and industrial plants as well as in supply and power plant engineering. Standard valves are available conforming to DIN, ANSI und JIS standards. Valve bodies are manufactured in cast iron, spheroidal graphite iron, cast steel, cast stainless or cold-resisting steel. Nominal size DN NPS ½ 12 Nominal pressure PN ANSI Class JIS 10/20 K Temperature range C F Valve plug with metal sealing, soft sealing, or lapped-in metal. Further versions are available with adjustable packing, bellows seal, insulating section, heating jacket or flow divider to reduce noise emissions. Type 3241 in forged steel version (T 8015 EN) Valve body and bonnet made of forged steel (C22.8) or forged stainless steel Nominal size DN Nominal pressure PN Temperature range C Further specifications and versions are the same as for the Type 3241 Valve in cast version (see above). Type 3241-Gas, Pneumatic Control and Quick-acting Shut-off Valve for gases (T 8020 EN) The safety shut-off valves for gas typetested according to DIN EN 161 can also assume the function of a control valve (DIN-DVGW-typetested). The valve is equipped with a solenoid valve and a strainer. The plug stem is sealed by a corrosion-resistant steel bellows fitted with a test connection and a backup self-adjusting packing. The valve bodies are available in cast steel, cast stainless steel, and forged steel. Nominal size DN NPS ½ 6 Nominal pressure PN 40 ANSI Class 300 Medium temperature Ambient temperature Valve plug with soft sealing C C F F Type 3241-Oil, Pneumatic Control and Quick-acting Shut-off Valve for liquid fuels and liquefied petroleum gas in the liquid phase (T 8022 EN) Control valve typetested acc. to DIN EN 264 as a control and safety shut-off valve for combustion plants burning liquid fuels. The valve is equipped with a solenoid valve and a strainer. The valve bodies are available in cast steel, cast stainless steel or forged steel Nominal size DN NPS ½ 4 Nominal pressure PN 16 and PN 40 ANSI Class 300 Max. medium temp. Ambient temperature 350 C C 662 F F Valve plug with soft sealing or lapped-in metal. Further versions available with bellows seal. Type with forged steel valve body Type Pneumatic Control Valve Type 3241-Gas with bellows seal and Type 3241-Oil, both with positioner, solenoid valve and strainer 12 Information Sheet T EN

15 Type 3241 Pneumatic Control Valve with safety function, typetested (T 8016 EN) The control valve typetested according to DIN can assume the function of a control valve as well as that of a safety temperature limiter or pressure limiter. The standard version is suitable for water and steam up to 220 C, the version with insulating section up to 350 C. The control valve is equipped with a Type 3701 Solenoid Valve. Valve bodies available in cast iron, spheroidal graphite iron, cast steel or cast stainless steel, forged steel and forged stainless steel. Nominal size DN Nominal pressure PN Perm. temperature C Valve plug with metal sealing. Type 3244 Three-way Valve (T 8026 EN) Control valve for mixing and flow-diverting service according to DIN or ANSI standards. Mixing or diverting service is determined by the arrangement of the valve plug at the factory (see valve body on p. 18). Valve bodies available in cast iron, cast steel, or cast stainless steel (according to DIN or ASTM specifications). Nominal size DN NPS ½ 6 Nominal pressure PN ANSI Class Temperature range C F Valves for special applications Type 3248 Cryogenic Valve (T 8093 EN) Control valve used for liquid gases in the field of cryogenic engineering. Installation in cold box or in vacuum-insulated pipelines. Nominal size DN * NPS ½ 6 Nominal pressure PN ANSI Class Temperature range C F * DN 200/NPS 8 and DN 250/NPS 10 on request Valve plug with metal sealing. Bellows seal with backup packing. Special version with aluminum valve body. Type 3249 Control Valve for aseptic service (T 8048 EN) Angle valve for food processing and pharmaceutical industries according to DIN or ANSI standards. PTFE-coated EPDM diaphragm serves as external sealing; additional test connection and backup packing. Nominal size DN NPS ½ 3 Maximum pressure 10 bar 150 psi Temperature range C F Versions are available with threaded coupling, conical coupling and slotted round nut or flanges, as well as flanges or clamp weld-on coupling conforming to ANSI requirements. Valve plug with metal sealing. Further versions are available with adjustable packing, bellows seal, insulating section, heating jacket, or additional handwheel. Type typetested Type 3249 Angle valve for aseptic service Type Three-way Valve Type Cryogenic Valve in globe-pattern and aluminium angle-pattern Information Sheet T EN

16 Type 3345 Diaphragm Valve (T 8031 EN) Control valve for viscous, corrosive and abrasive fluids according to DIN or ANSI standards. Valve bodies available in cast iron, spheroidal graphite iron, or cast stainless steel with or without lining. Valve diaphragm made of butyl, FPM (FKM), or ethylene propylene (also with PTFE protective facing). Nominal size DN NPS ½ 6 Nominal pressure PN 10 ANSI Class Temperature range C F Versions for higher temperatures or with FDA approval for the food processing industry available on request. Type 3347 Control Valve for food processing (T 8097 EN) Angle valve for food processing and pharmaceutical industries as well as for in the field of biochemistry equipped with weld-on, screw or clamp connections. Suitable for CIP cleaning. Nominal size DN NPS ½ 5 Maximum pressure 16 bar 240 psi Temperature range C F Version available in full-mold cast body with threaded end connections complying with 3A und EHEDG regulations. Type 3351 Pneumatic On-off Valve (T 8039 EN) Valve for on/off service with tight shutoff for liquids, non-flammable gases and steam. Valve bodies available in cast iron, cast steel, or cast stainless steel. Nominal size DN NPS ½ 4 Nominal pressure PN ANSI Class Medium temperature Ambient temperature C C F F Valve plug with both metal sealing and soft sealing simultaneously. Self-adjusting PTFE V-ring packing. Further versions are available with insulating section, bellows seal, or additional handwheel. Type 3510 Micro-flow Valve (T 8091 EN) Control valve with either stainless steel globe- or angle-pattern body designed to control very low flow rates in pilot plants and technical research facilities. Nominal size DN 10, 15, 25 NPS 14, 38, 12 Nominal pressure PN ANSI Class Temperature range C F Further versions are available with insulating section or bellows seal. Type Micro-flow Valve Type Valve for food processing Type On-off Valve Type Diaphragm Valve 14 Information Sheet T EN

17 Series 250 and W&T Type 3251 Globe Valve (T 8051/52 EN) Control valve for applications in process engineering and industrial plants as well as in supply and power plant engineering. Suitable for large nominal sizes and/or high pressures according to DIN and ANSI standards. Valve bodies available in high-temperature, cold-resisting or cast stainless steel. Nominal size DN NPS ½ 8 Nominal pressure PN ANSI Class Type 3253 Three-way Valve (T 8055 EN) Control valve for mixing or flow-diverting service. Valve bodies available in cast iron, high-temperature, cold-resisting or cast stainless steel. Nominal size DN NPS ½ 16 Nominal pressure PN ANSI Class Temperature range C F Valve plug with metal sealing. Further versions are available with bellows seal or insulating section. Temperature range C F Valve plug with metal sealing, soft sealing, or lapped-in metal. Further versions are available with bellows seal, insulating section, heating jacket, flow divider to reduce noise emissions, or pressure-balanced plug. Type 3252 High-pressure Valve (T 8053 EN) Control valve with either globe- or angle-pattern body to control low flow rates in process engineering applications. Valve bodies available in cast stainless steel. Nominal size DN NPS ½ 1 Nominal pressure PN ANSI Class Temperature range C F Valve plug with metal sealing. Further versions are available with bellows seal or insulating section. End connections with female thread, welding ends, or flanges. Other valve body materials available on request. Type 3254 Globe Valve (T 8060/61 EN) Control valve for process engineering applications according to DIN or ANSI standards. Valve bodies available in cast iron, high-temperature, cold-resisting or cast stainless steel. Nominal size DN NPS 3 16 Nominal pressure PN ANSI Class Temperature range C F Valve plug with metal sealing, soft sealing, or lapped-in metal. The valve has an additional plug stem guide in the bottom body flange. Further versions are available with bellows seal, insulating section, heating jacket, flow divider to reduce noise emissions, or pressure-balanced plug. Type 3251 Globe Valve Type 3252 High-pressure Valve Type 3253 Three-way Valve Type 3254 Globe Valve Information Sheet T EN

18 Type 3256 Angle Valve (T 8065/66 EN) Control valve for process engineering applications according to DIN or ANSI standards. Valve bodies available in high-temperature, cold-resisting cast steel or cast stainless steel. Nominal size DN NPS ½ 8 Nominal pressure PN ANSI Class Temperature range C F Valve plug with metal sealing, soft sealing, or lapped-in metal. Further versions are available with bellows seal, insulating section, heating jacket, flow divider to reduce noise emissions, or pressure-balanced plug. Type 3259 Angle Valve (T 8059 EN) Control valve for industrial plants with high pressure requirements according to the IG standard Nominal size DN * Nominal pressure PN 325 Temperature range C * Nominal size DN 120 on request The valve body is made of forged stainless steel and the end connections are designed as screwed-on flanges with lens ring gaskets. Valve plug with metal sealing or lapped-in metal. W&T Type RVG Control Valve (T 9933 EN) Single- or multi-stage control valve for power plant applications or the petrochemical industry for feedwater and steam. Valve bodies available in forged steel in globe- or angle-style or Z-style bodies according to DIN or ANSI standards. Application as feedwater, spray or recirculation valve. Nominal size DN NPS 1 6 Nominal pressure PN ANSI Class Temperature range C F Lined valves Valves suitable for corrosive media, in particular, to meet high requirements in chemical plants. Streamlined valve body made of spheroidal graphite iron EN-JS1049. Exchangeable PTFE valve seat and PTFE plug, plug stem sealed by a special PTFE bellows and an additional packing with test connection. Pfeiffer Type BR 1a Globe valve with 5 to 8 mm isostatic PTFE lining Nominal size DN NPS 1 4 Nominal pressure PN ANSI Class 150 Temperature range Up to 200 C Up to 390 F Pfeiffer Type BR 1b Globe valve with 4 to 5 mm thick PFA lining (TB 01a EN) (TB 01b EN) Nominal size DN NPS 1 3 Nominal pressure PN ANSI Class 150 Temperature range Up to 200 C Up to 390 F Other linings and materials available on request. Pfeiffer Type BR 1a PTFE-lined Globe Valve Type 3256 Angle Valve Type 3259 Angle Valve acc. to IG standard W&T Type RVG Globe Valve Pfeiffer Type BR 1b PFA-lined Globe Valve 16 Information Sheet T EN

19 Series 280 Control valves for process engineering or for heat efficiency to reduce steam pressure and steam temperature simultaneously. Type 3281 and Type 3286 Steam-converting Valves (T 8251 EN) Globe valve (Type 3281) or angle valve (Type 3286) according to DIN or ANSI standards. Nominal size DN NPS 2 8 Nominal pressure PN ANSI Class Temperature range Up to 500 C Up to 930 F Type 3284 Steam-converting Valve (T 8254 EN) Globe valve with four-flanged body and double-guided plug stem according to DIN or ANSI standards. W&T Type DUV-C3 Steam-converting Valve (T 9934 EN) Steam-converting valve for power plant engineering and industrial processes. Inlet DN PN Outlet DN PN NPS3 20 Class NPS4 64 ANSI Class Temperature range Up to 560 C Up to 1040 F Valve bodies available in forged steel (A105), heat-resisting forged steel , /A 182 F12 or /A 182 F22. Special features include at least two-staged controlled perforated plug, at least one uncontrolled attenuation plate and an integrated atomizing steam cooler. Nominal size DN NPS 4 16 Nominal pressure PN ANSI Class Temperature range Up to 500 C Up to 930 F Type 3281 Steam-converting Valve Type 3284 Steam-converting Valve W&T Type DUV-C3 Steam-converting Valve Information Sheet T EN

20 Control valve details Valve bodies and styles The valve body, valve bonnet and, in some cases, the bottom flange are subject to internal stress caused by the process medium flowing through the valve. Consequently, the valves must be designed to be sufficiently resistant to mechanical and chemical stress. Under the influence of the operating temperature, the material strength changes. This behavior can be improved by combining certain alloys. For this reason, heat-resisting materials are used at high temperatures ( e.g. according to DIN EN ) and cold-resisting materials are used for cryogenic service. The materials table on page 31and the AD Specification Sheet W 10 provide a summary. Globe valve (T 8015 EN, T 8060 EN) Globe valves allow easy installation in straight pipelines. For nominal pressures up to PN 40 and nominal sizes up to DN 300, three-flanged bodies of the Series 240 are mainly used. The plug stem is guided in the valve bonnet, and the V-port plug in the screwed-in seat. The ports of the V-port plug are asymmetric in order to suppress any oscillations. Three-way valve (T 8026 EN) Three-way valves are used for mixing or flow-diverting service. Mixing service with Type 3244 Three-way Valve The mode of operation depends on how the two plugs are arranged. The direction of flow is indicated by arrows. Flow-diverting service with Type 3244 Three-way Valve Type 3241 Globe Valve To handle higher load levels and when larger seat diameters are used, the Type 3254 Globe Valve of the Series 250 is provided with an additional plug stem guide in the bottom flange. Angle valve (T 8065 EN) Angle valves are ideally installed when a vertical pipeline and a horizontal pipeline need to be connected. The process medium is only diverted once. Angle valves allow the condensate to be optimally treated, and are practically entirely self draining. In case the process medium is in the flow-to-close direction, wear in the valve outlet can be reduced by the use of an anti-wear sleeve. For process media containing solids, the outlet of the Type 3256 Control Valves can additionally be fitted with a ceramic wear-resistant pipe. Additional plug stem guide in Type 3254 Type 3256 Angle Valve 18 Information Sheet T EN

21 Cryogenic valve (T 8093 EN) Plants that produce liquefied, cryogenic air separation gases, often use vacuum-insulated pipelines to prevent environmental heat being transferred to the medium. The control valves can be integrated in the vacuum jacket by means of a connecting flange. The valve is designed to widely prevent thermal conduction to the effect that the stem remains free of ice. A bellows seal serves as the primary sealing. The jacketed pipeline is evacuated of air and sealed off after installation of the components. The cryogenic extension bonnet of the control valve is often welded to the jacketed pipeline via a flange, meaning considerable work would be involved to remove the valve from the pipeline. However, to make maintenance possible, the internal parts can be accessed via the cryogenic extension bonnet without having to remove the valve from the pipeline. Valve for food processing (T 8048 EN, T 8097 EN) Valves for food processing are angle valves made of stainless steel. The internal surfaces exposed to the process medium are machined to a fine finish or polished. The valve bodies are self-draining and can be cleaned (CIP) or sterilized (SIP) without having to be disassembled. The stem of Type 3249 is sealed by a special diaphragm, preventing bacteria from being trapped. Type 3249 Valve for food processing The Type 3347 Control Valve is available with welding ends, a threaded or a clamp connection according to ISO 2852, and with a steam line connection if higher purity requirements are to be met. Type 3347 with steam line connection Type 3248 Cryogenic Valve Diaphragm valve (T 8031 EN) For viscous or corrosive media possibly containing solids, diaphragm control valves that are free of dead space and without stuffing boxes are an economical solution. The diaphragm may be made of rubber, nitrile, butyl or PTFE. The valve body may additionally be lined with rubber or PTFE. Type 3345 Diaphragm Valve Information Sheet T EN

22 On-off valve (T 8039 EN) The valve for on-off service is used for tight shutoff of liquids, non-flammable gases and steam. As the valve plug is equipped with both a metal sealing and a soft sealing, the leakage flow rate class VI is achieved. Valve bonnets The valve bonnet closes the valve at the top and provides room for the stuffing box and the plug stem guide. The valve bonnet and the yoke of Series 240 Valves are incorporated in one piece. The valve bonnet and the yoke of Series 250 and 280 Valves are bolted together. The NAMUR rib standardized in IEC located on the yoke allows easy, standardized attachment of a positioner or other accessories. The valve bonnet is a pressure-bearing part that is exposed to the process medium, therefore its material is subject to the same design requirements as the valve body. Type 3351 On-off valve Micro-flow valve (T 8091 EN) Micro-flow valves are used for very low flow rates (K V coefficients <1.6 to 10 5 m 3 /h). The parts exposed to the process medium are made of stainless steel All valve parts are made of semi-finished products. As a result, special materials can be used in a particularly cost-effective manner, and the valve covers a wide range of applications. Packing The plug stem is sealed by the packing. Versions with bellows seal or insulating section or when the packing functions as a backup packing use the standard packing. The temperature range of the standard packing is between 10 and 220 C and can be extended when an insulating section is fitted on the valve bonnet. Valve bonnet of Series 240 Valves Other packings can be installed for special applications. Type 3510 Micro-flow Valve Steam-converting valve (T 8251/4 EN) Steam-converting valves are used to reduce the steam pressure and the steam temperature simultaneously. A connecting pipe supplies the spray water to the flow divider St III. At its inner wall, the spray water comes into contact with the steam flow. The steam flow and the entrained water are mixed in the narrow wire mesh of the flow divider. As the supplied spray water does not come into contact with the valve body, neither erosion nor thermal shock occur. The flow divider ensures low-noise and low-vibration operation. Packing forms Standard packing Temperature range C Self-adjusting, spring-loaded V-ring packing made of PTFE-carbon for nominal sizes DN 15 to DN 150. Self-adjusting PTFE-carbon/PTFE-silk packing for nominal sizes DN 200 to DN 500. Suitable for all applications that require a high level of sealing performance, yet requiring hardly any maintenance. Valve bonnet for Series 250 Valves Type 3281Steam-converting Valve 20 Information Sheet T EN

23 Form A Adjustable, cavity-free PTFE-silk/PTFE-carbon packing. Especially suitable for process media that crystallize out or polymerize. Form B Adjustable, cavity-free PTFE-silk/pure PTFE packing. PTFE-silk for nominal sizes DN 200 to DN 500. Suitable for process media that crystallize out or polymerize and in case carbon particles would contaminate the process medium. Form C Adjustable, cavity-free packing made of woven PTFE-silk. Application for all chemicals including hot acids and alkaline solutions. Form D Spring-loaded V-ring packing made of pure PTFE. Suitable for pure process media in case carbon particles would contaminate the process medium. Form H Adjustable high-temperature packing made of graphite and carbon rings. Especially suitable for superheated steam. Form S Spring-loaded V-ring packing made of PTFE-carbon with BAM approval (German Institute for Materials Research and Testing). Suitable for oxygen service (only when BAM-approved lubricant is used). Form W Adjustable, cavity-free packing made of PTFE-graphite thread and carbon for fresh and service water. The carbon bushings serve as wipers. Especially suitable for hard water and any process media that may cause deposits forming on the plug stem. NACE standard Spring-loaded V-ring packing made of PTFE-carbon conforming to NACE standard. Suitable for sour gas/sour water. ADSEAL Spring-loaded V-ring packing made of PTFE-carbon with ADSEAL emergency adjusting function. Packing versions for extended application conditions available on request. Steam line connection The Type 3347 Control Valve can be provided with a valve bonnet including a steam line connection to meet the requirements regarding purity in the food processing and pharmaceutical industries. Steam or a sterilizing liquid flushes the plug stem between the two PTFE V-ring packings to prevent bacteria from being trapped. Steam line connection in Type 3347 Seat and plug trims The design of the seat and the plug determines the K VS coefficient and the characteristic as well as the seat leakage rate of a valve. The drawings show seat-guided V-port plugs with asymmetric ports with metal sealing and soft sealing. Metal sealing Soft sealing The seat, plug, and plug stem are made of stainless steel. In some cases, the trim elements are subject to high stress due to high differential pressures, cavitation, flashing, or in cases where the process media contains solids. In order to increase the service life, seats and plugs with metal sealing can be provided with a Stellite hard facing, and plugs up to DN 100 can be made of solid Stellite. The seats are screwed into place, allowing them to be easily exchanged. They may also be made of other materials. Information Sheet T EN

24 Seat leakage rate The seat leakage rate is determined according to DIN EN 1349 which specifies the maximum amount of the test process medium (gas or water) that may flow through the closed control valve under test conditions. For special applications (e.g. using Type 3241-Gas or Type 3241-Oil) or with shut-off valves (Type 3351), a high leakage rate class can be achieved by using a lapped-in metal or a soft sealing. Table 2 Plug sealing and seat leakage rate Seat/plug sealing Leakage rate class acc. to DIN EN 1349 Seat leakage % of K VS Metal sealing IV 0.01 Lapped-in metal up to DN 80 IV-S Control valves with ceramic trims (T 8071 EN) Control valves with extremely resistant ceramic trims are used when the valve body and the trim are subject to considerable erosion and abrasion. The following valves can be fitted with ceramic trims: Type 3251 Globe Valve, Type 3256 Angle Valve. The Type 3256 Angle Valve can be fitted with a ceramic wear-resistant pipe. When the process medium flows in the flow-to-close (FTC) direction, this version is suitable for extreme erosive and abrasive conditions caused by process medium containing solids. Details on ceramic materials and their properties are available on request. Lapped-in metal in DN 100 or larger IV-S Soft sealing VI 0.3 Δp f L 1) PTFE ring with pressure balancing Graphite ring with pressure balancing IV 0.01 III 0.1 1) Leakage factor f L according to DIN EN 1349 Pressure balancing If the actuator force is not sufficient to handle the differential pressure, pressure-balanced plugs are a good solution. The plug is designed to function as a piston. The upstream pressure p 1 is transferred to the back of the plug via a borehole in the bottom of the plug. The forces acting on the plug are compensated for with exception of the area around the plug stem. Pressure-balanced plugs are additionally sealed with a PTFE ring or a graphite ring. The pressure-balanced components are subject to wear. As a result, the seat leakage rate (see Table 2) and the amount of maintenance needed for these valves increase. Pressure-balanced plugs should not be used, if at all possible, for high-temperature process media or for media that contain solids or crystallize out. In these cases, we recommend to use a more powerful actuator. Type 3256 Angle Valve with ceramic trim and wear-resistant pipe Low-noise operation Flow dividers (T 8081 EN) The flow dividers St I and St III serve to reduce the noise emission of gases and vapors. The process medium reaches its maximum velocity after passing the restriction between seat and plug. Before it starts to create a noise-intensive, turbulent mixing zone, the process medium hits the inner wall of the flow divider. The flow is divided and a low-noise impulse exchange with the surrounding medium takes place. Flow divider St I and St III Plug with pressure balancing The valve-specific correction values for gases and vapors are required for noise calculation according to VDMA 24422, Edition 1989 and DIN EN when flow dividers are used. Refer to the diagrams on page 30 for details. For further details regarding noise calculation, refer to the DIN EN standard or contact us and we will perform these calculations for you. The K VS coefficient of the valve trim is reduced on using a flow divider. The associated data sheets include the K VS I for the flow divider St I and K VS III for the flow divider St III. 22 Information Sheet T EN

25 AC trims (T 8082/3 EN) AC-1 and AC-2 Trims are optimized trims for low-noise pressure letdown of liquids at differential pressures up to 40 bar. The seat is raised and the parabolic plug is additionally guided in the seat. The AC-2 Trim additionally has up to four attenuation plates. Additional components Bellows seal In case, stricter emissions control requirements must be met, e.g. TA-Luft or in vacuum applications, a metal bellows is used to seal the plug stem. The plug stem is additionally sealed with a packing at the top flange. This packing serves as a backup packing. The metal bellows can be monitored for leakage or a sealing medium can be applied by means of a test connection. The bellows seal can be used for valves of Series 240 from 200 to +400 C, and Series 250/280 from 200 to +450 C. AC-1 Trim AC-2 Trim The three-staged AC-3 Trim is used for differential pressures up to 100 bar. Optionally, stellited hard facings or hardened trims are available. Metal bellows seal Insulating section The application range of a standard packing can be extended to an operating temperature of less than 10 C or over +220 C by using an insulating section. Type 3251 with AC-3 Trim Silencer The silencer acts as a fixed restriction that can be installed downstream of the valve with one to five attenuation plates for applications with gases or vapors. The silencer increases the backpressure downstream of the valve which leads to a reduction in the valve outlet velocity and sound pressure level. Insulating section Type 3381 Silencer attached to Type 3241 Valve Sandwich version for mounting between flanges when one attenuation plate is used Body accommodating 2 to 5 attenuation plates that can be flanged onto a valve Extended nominal size of the outlet The temperature ranges of the various valves series are: Series C Long insulating section C Short insulating section Series C Series 280 max C The temperature ranges specified above may be restricted by the materials used as per the pressure-temperature diagram (see Information Sheet T EN). Information Sheet T EN

26 Heating jacket Some process media only flow easily above a certain temperature. Below this temperature they start to solidify or crystallize out. The valve bodies are fitted with a heating jacket to ensure that the process medium remains at a certain temperature and can flow freely. The valve bonnet may also be equipped with a heating jacket when the plug stem is sealed by a bellows seal. Class Types 3241, 3251, 3254, 3281 and 3284 Globe Valves 600 DIN EN 558-2, Series 39 (ISA 75.03) 900 ASME B 16.10, Class 900, column ASME B 16.10, Class 1500, column ASME B Class 2500, column 4 Type 3256 and Type 3286 Angle Valve 125/150 DIN EN 558-2, Series /300 DIN EN 558-2, Series DIN EN 558-2, Series ASME B 16.10, Class 900, column ASME B 16.10, Class 1500, column ASME B 16.10, Class 2500, column 6 Versions with welding-neck ends are not standardized. Consult SAMSON first concerning their face-to-face dimensions.. Type 3241 with heating jacket and with bellows heating A heat transfer medium flowing between valve body and heating jacket ensures that the process medium is kept at a certain temperature. If steam is used as heating transfer medium, proper condensate discharge must be ensured. Versions with connecting flange heating or enlargened connecting flanges for the body are available on request. Face-to-face dimensions SAMSON control valves with flanges have the same face-to-face dimensions as valves with welding ends. The face-to-face dimensions are defined according to DIN EN as follows: Types 3241, 3251, 3254, 3281 and 3284 PN Globe Valves DIN EN 558-1, Series DIN EN 558-1, Series DIN 3202 Part 1 (edition 09.84), Series F2 250 DIN 3202 Part 1 (edition 09.84), Series F3 320 DIN 3202 Part 1 (edition 09.84), Series F3 400 Consistent with ASME B16.10 Class 2500, column 4 Type 3256 and Type 3286 Angle Valves DIN EN 558-1, Series DIN EN 558-1, Series DIN 3202 Part 1 (edition 09.84), Series F x values from DIN 3202 Part (edition 09.84), Series F Consistent with ASME B16.10, Class 2500, column 4 (halved values) ANSI valves with flanges or welding ends Types 3241, 3251, 3254, 3281 and 3284 Class Globe Valves 125/150 DIN EN 558-2, Series 37 (Class 150: ISA 75.03) 250/300 DIN EN 558-2, Series 38 (ISA 75.03) Types of pipe connections Flanged connections are most frequently used in industrial plants as they allow easy mounting and removal of valves and their milled facings provide excellent sealing reliability and quality. A summary of DIN flanges, their connection dimensions and types of flange faces for valves up to PN 100 is provided in DIN EN and , for valves with PN 160 or higher in DIN 2500, DIN 2501, and DIN The standard version of SAMSON valves has flanges with raised faces in Form B1. Other flange forms are available on request. DIN flanges in Form B1 (Raised Face) Form C (Tongue) Form D (Groove) Form E (Male Face) Form F (Female Face) The US standard for flanges is ANSI/ASME B16.1 for Class 125 and ANSI/ASME B16.5 for higher pressure ratings. The standard version of cast iron valves with a pressure rating of Class 125 has flanges with flat faces. Valves with a pressure rating of Class 300 have flanges with raised faces (0.06 height), and valves with higher pressure ratings have flanges with raised faces (0.25 height). Other versions are possible. More details available on request. For critical process media and/or high pressure ratings, the valve bodies can be supplied with welding ends or welding-neck ends. 24 Information Sheet T EN

27 For control valves according to DIN standards, the welding ends conform to EN For control valves according to US standards, the welding ends are specified in ASME/ANSI B For installation methods according to US standards, valves of the Series 240 are available with NPT female thread in sizes ½ to 2. Valve-specific parameters K VS coefficient The necessary K V coefficient is calculated according to DIN EN from the specified operating data. The K VS coefficient is specified in the data sheets to identify the valves. It corresponds to the K V coefficient at the rated travel H 100. In order to increase control accuracy and with regard to manufacturing tolerances, the selected K VS coefficient must be higher than the K V coefficient. Inherent characteristic The characteristic shows the relationship between the K V flow coefficient and the travel (H). Control valves are either designed with an equal percentage (2) or with a linear (1) characteristic. The equal percentage characteristic can be identified by equal increments of travel that yield equal percentage increments of the K V flow coefficient. Whereas, in a linear characteristic, equal increments of travel yield equal increments of the K V flow coefficient. Rangeability The rangeability is the quotient of K VS /K VR. K VR being the smallest K V where the characteristic still lies within the permissible gradient tolerance of the characteristic (DIN EN Part 2-4). Valve characteristic: 1- linear, 2 - equal percentage Information Sheet T EN

28 Actuators Actuators convert the control signal issued, for example, by a positioner into a travel motion carried out by the control valve (plug stem with valve plug). We supply pneumatic, electric and electrohydraulic actuators as well as hand-operated actuators (see Information Sheet T 8300 EN). Type 3277 Pneumatic Actuator Pneumatic actuators These are used for pneumatic or electropneumatic control equipment. Pneumatic actuators are diaphragm actuators with a rolling diaphragm and internally fitted springs. The benefits of pneumatic actuators include their low overall height, strong positioning force and fast response. Different signal pressure ranges are available. Pneumatic actuators are suitable for use in hazardous areas as well as featuring a fail-safe action: Upon air supply failure, the control valve is either closed or opened. The Type 3277 Pneumatic Actuators allow direct attachment of positioners or limit switches. This prevent the travel linkage from being misaligned as it is located within the yoke below the actuator housing. Pneumatic actuators can additionally be equipped with a handwheel (see T EN and T EN). Type 3271 Pneumatic Actuator with additional handwheel Type 3275 Pneumatic Piston Actuator Electric actuators If compressed air is not available, electric actuators with strong positioning forces and large travels may be used. These actuators are self-locking. Electric actuators are connected to three-point stepping controllers, electric positioners issuing analog signals or over a reversing contactor unit (see T 8330 EN). Type 3374 Electric Actuator Electrohydraulic actuators These actuators are connected to an analog signal via three-point stepping controllers or electric positioners. Versions with fail-safe action are available (see T 8340 EN). Hand-operated actuators They are attached to Series 240 and 250 Control Valves which are used as hand-operated control valves with rated travels of 15 or 30 mm (see T 8312 EN). Hand-operated actuators with larger travels are available on request (Type /6). Type SAM Electric Actuator with manual override Type 3274 Electrohydraulic Actuator Type 3273 Hand-operated Actuator 26 Information Sheet T EN

29 Accessories for control valves SAMSON control valves can be equipped with several additional accessories. These accessories are, for example, used for actuator control and travel indication. They are attached either according to IEC (NAMUR rib) or directly in conjunction with the Type 3277 Pneumatic Actuator (see T EN). For direct attachment, the entire travel linkage is located in a closed housing in order to prevent contamination, misalignment as well as personal injury (see Information Sheet T 8350 EN for details). Positioners Positioners (p/p or i/p) compare the signal of pneumatic or electric control equipment to the travel (manipulated variable) of the control valve. They issue a pneumatic signal pressure as the output variable. The positioners can be used in standard operation or in split-range operation (see T 8351 EN ff.). Positioners from the Series 3730 include an integrated firmware for valve diagnostics which issue alerts for predictive maintenance action (EXPERT and EXPERT +, see T 8388 EN). Smart versions (HART, PROFIBUS-PA, FOUNDATION Fieldbus) are configured and operated using a PC or handheld terminal (see T 8380/-82/-83/-84 EN). SAMSON s own TROVIS-VIEW software serves as a standard operator interface to operate these smart positioners (see T 6661 EN). Limit switch, position transmitter or potentiometer Type Positioner Solenoid valve Limit switches Whenever an adjustable limit value is exceeded or not reached, a signal is issued. Inductive limit switches are frequently used. However, versions with electric or pneumatic microswitches are also available (see Information Sheet T 8350 EN). Position transmitter/potentiometer To indicate the travel position of a control valve, the rated travel range is represented by an analog electric signal (see T 8363 EN). Solenoid valves The binary signals from control equipment are converted into binary pneumatic control signals. As a result, the control valve can quickly be brought into its final position. The solenoid valves are used for on-off valves or for control valves with fail-safe position (e.g. Type 3241 typetested, T 8016 EN; T 3701 EN). Lock-up valve Pneumatic remote adjuster Lock-up valve If the supply air pressure falls below an adjusted value, the signal pressure line is shut off. When this happens, the actuator stops in its last position (see T 8391 EN). Pneumatic remote adjuster Manually adjustable precision regulator for the set point adjustment of pneumatic control equipment. Supply pressure regulators Supply pressure regulators provide pneumatic control valves with a constant air pressure (adjustable between 0 and 6 bar) (see T 8546 EN). Supply pressure regulator with air filter They consist of a supply pressure regulator and an air filter holding back foreign particles, oil and/or condensate (see T 8546 EN). Supply pressure regulator without and with air filter Pneumatic volume booster The actuating time can be made shorter for fast control loops by using pneumatic volume boosters. Information Sheet T EN

30 Valve sizing Calculating the K V coefficient The K V coefficient is calculated according to DIN EN The data sheets contain the necessary device-specific specifications. A preliminary, simplified calculation may be made with the help of the working equations listed below. They do not take into account the influence of the connecting fittings or choked flow at critical flow velocities. Selecting the valve After calculating the K V coefficient, the corresponding K VS coefficient of the valve type in question is selected from the data sheet. In case, real operating data are used in the calculation, the following generally applies: K vmax 0.7 to 0.8 K VS. p 1 Pressure upstream of the valve p 2 Pressure downstream of the valve H Travel Q Flow rate in m 3 /h W Flow rate in kg/h ρ Density in kg/m 3 (generally also with liquids) ρ 1 Upstream density in kg/m 3 (with gases and vapors) t 1 Temperature in C upstream of the valve Medium Liquids Gases Steam Pressure drops m 3 /h kg/h m 3 /h kg/h kg/h p 2 > p1 2 Δp < p1 2 p 2 < p1 2 Δp > p1 2 K V = Q ρ 1000 Δp K V = W 1000 ρδp K V = QG 519 ρg T1 Δpp2 K V = W 519 ρg QG W K V = ρg T1 K p V = p1 T1 Δpp T ρ 1 G 2 K V = W K V = W v 2 Δp 2v * p1 Including: p 1 [bar] Absolute pressure p abs p 2 [bar] Absolute pressure p abs Δp [bar] Absolute pressure p abs T 1 [K] t 1 Q G [m 3 /h] Flow rate of gas, based on 0 C and 1013 mbar ρ [kg/m 3 ] Density of liquids ρ G [kg/m 3 ] Density of gases at 0 C and 1013 mbar v 1 [m 3 /kg] Specific volume (v from steam table) for p 1 and t 1 v 2 [m 3 /kg] Specific volume (v from steam table) for p 2 and t 1 v* [m 3 /kg] Specific volume (v from steam table) for p1 2 and t1 28 Information Sheet T EN

31 Noise prediction x Fz factor The valve-specific x Fz factor is measured on the valve test bench and provides the basis for noise prediction. When the load of the valve is y = 0.75, this factor indicates the pressure ratio at which cavitation begins. Table 3a Series K VS Seat mm Travel mm DN x Fz Acoustically determined valve factor Table 3b Series K VS Seat mm Travel mm DN x Fz Acoustically determined valve factor Information Sheet T EN

32 Gases and vapors The noise emission of single-stage and multi-stage control valves for gases is determined according to DIN EN 60534, Part 8-3. This calculation method, however, does not apply to control valves with noise-reducing equipment such as flow dividers St I and St III. In this case, the calculation must be carried out according to VDMA 24422, Edition 89. The calculation is based upon the jet power reached on expansion. The noise emission is determined by means of an acoustical conversion coefficient η G. Diagram 1 illustrates the difference between the conversion coefficients depending on the differential pressure ratio. This clearly shows the level difference of the internal sound powers and the sound pressure levels to be expected at one meter distance from the pipeline. For a differential pressure ratio of, for example, x = 0.5, the difference in sound pressure levels between a valve with and without flow divider is 20 db. Liquids The noise emission on throttling liquids is calculated according to DIN EN 60534, Part 8-4. This calculation is consistent with the calculation according to VDMA 24422, Edition 89. It is based on the jet power reached in the valve and also on the valve-specific acoustical conversion coefficient η F empirically determined according to VDMA for turbulent flows as well as the valve-specific pressure ratio x Fz at the beginning of cavitation. The sound power level and the sound level difference at a distance of 1 m for the valves with different x Fz values can be seen in the diagram 2. For a pressure ratio of x F = 0.5, and a valve with x Fz = 0.6, the sound level which is 20 db less than that of a valve with x Fz = 0.3. η G 0 [db] Without flow divider 2 - With flow divider St I 3 - With flow divider St III x Diagram 1 x Fz Diagram 2 30 Information Sheet T EN

33 Materials conforming to DIN and ANSI/ASME The body materials mainly used and their temperature limits are listed in the table below. The application limits of these materials are included in the associated pressure-temperature diagram in the second part of this Information Sheet (T EN). Table 4 Materials Designation EN material Standard Temp. range [ C] Cast iron EN-GJL-250 EN-JL1040 DIN EN A 126 B ASTM FC 250 JIS Spheroidal graphite iron EN-GJS400-18U-LT EN-JS1049 DIN EN Cast steel (carbon steel) GP240GH DIN EN ) G20Mn G17CrMo DIN EN ) G12CrMo SEW ) A 216 WCC ASTM A 352 LCC ASTM A 217 WC6 ASTM ) A 217 WC9 ASTM ) Consistent with ASTM JIS Cast stainless steel GX5CrNi DIN EN GX5CrNi MoNb ) A 351 CF 8 ASTM A 351 CF 8M ASTM ) Consistent with ASTM JIS Forged steel P250GH DIN EN ) A 105 ASTM Forged stainless steel X6CrNiMoTi DIN EN A 182 F316 ASTM ) Up to 60 C at p max 75 % PN (acc. to AD W10) 2) Higher application temperatures on request Selection and ordering Selection and sizing of the control valve 1. Calculate the required K V coefficient according to DIN EN You may use, for example, the SAMSON valve sizing software. This sizing usually is carried out by SAMSON. If real operating data are used for the calculation, the following generally applies: K Vmax = 0.7 to 0.8 K VS. 2. Select the K VS coefficient and the nominal size DN according to the table in the corresponding data sheet. 3. Select the appropriate valve characteristic on the basis of the behavior of the controlled system. 4. Determine the permissible differential pressure Δp and select an appropriate actuator using the differential pressure tables included in the associated data sheet. 5. Select the materials to be used with regard to corrosion, erosion, pressure and temperature using the materials tables and the associated pressure-temperature diagram. 6. Select the additional equipment, such as positioners and/ or limit switches. Ordering text The following details are required on ordering: Type of valve... *) Nominal size DN... *) Nominal pressure PN... *) Body material... *) Type of end Flanges/welding ends/ connections welding-neck ends Plug *) Standard, pressure-balanced, With metal sealing, soft sealing or lapped-in metal Hard facing Characteristic Equal percentage or linear Pneumatic Actuator Version acc. to T /-2 EN Fail-safe position Valve CLOSED or OPEN Transit time (Specifications only for special positioning time requirements) Process medium Density in kg/m 3 in standard or operating state and temperature in C Flow rate in kg/h or m 3 /h in standard or operating state Pressure p 1 in bar (absolute pressure p abs ) p 2 in bar (absolute pressure p abs ) at minimum, normal and maximum flow rate Accessories: Positioner and/or limit switch, position transmitter, solenoid valve, lock-up valve, volume booster, supply pressure regulator *) When no specifications are made, a suggestion is provided by SAMSON Information Sheet T EN

34 Specification sheet for control valves Specification sheet for control valves according to DIN EN Details that must be specified to select and size the valve 1 Site of installation 2 Control task 7 Pipeline DN... PN... Class... 8 Pipe material 12 Process medium 13 State at the valve inlet - Liquid - Vapor - Gas 15 Operating data 16 Flow rate 17 Inlet pressure p 1 18 Output pressure p 2 19 Temperature T 1 Min. Usual Max. Unit 20 Input density ρ 1 or M 21 Vapor pressure Pv 22 Critical pressure Pc 23 Kinematic viscosity v 31 Calculation of max. flow coefficient K V 32 Calculation of min. flow coefficient K V 33 Selected flow coefficient K VS 34 Calculated sound pressure level db(a) 35 Type... Valve 36 Valve body style 38 Nominal pressure PN Nominal size DN Type of end connections - Flange - Welding ends - Weld-neck ends - DIN / -ANSI 43 Type of bonnet - Normal - Insulating section - Bellows seal - Heating jacket Valve body 45 Body/bonnet material 47 Characteristic - Linear - Equal percentage 48 Plug/plug stem material 49 Bushing/seat material 52 Hard facing - None - Partially stellited - Solid Stellite - Hardened 54 Leakage class -%K VS - Class Packing material - Standard - Form Actuator type - Pneumatic 60 Effective area cm 2 62 Supply pressure Min.... Max Bench range Actuator 64 Fail-safe action - Fail Close - Fail Open - Fail in Position 66 Other type of actuator - Electric - Electrohydraulic - Hand-operated 67 Fail-safe position for three-way valve 68 Additional manual override - No - Yes 70 Positioner 71 Input signal - Pneumatic - Electric Positioner 72 Control valve OPEN at bar ma 73 Control valve CLOSED at bar ma 76 Air connection max. bar 78 Explosion protection - EEx i - EEx d 80 Limit switch Type of limit switch 81 Limit switch - Electric - Inductive - Pneumatic 82 Switching position - CLOSED - % travel - OPEN 83 Switching function - Closing - Opening 84 Explosion protection - EEx i - EEx d 86 Type of solenoid valve 87 Style - 2-way - 3-way Sol. valve 88 If power fails, the valve should be - OPEN - CLOSED - Last position 91 Electric data V Hz W 32 Information Sheet T EN

35 Globe, Three-way and Angle Valves Series 250 Pneumatic and electric control valves for process engineering and industrial applications Valve size: DN 15 to DN 500 NPS 1 2 to NPS 20 Pressure rating: PN 16 to PN 400 Class 150 to Class 2500 Temperature: Up to 500 C Up to 930 F 33

36

37 Series 250 Pneumatic Control Valve Type and Type Globe Valve Type 3251 Application Control valve for processing engineering applications with high industrial requirements Nominal size DN 15 to 200 Nominal pressure PN 16 to 400 Temperature 200 to +500 C Type 3251 Globe Valve operated with: Type 3271 Pneumatic Actuator (Type Control Valve) Type 3277 Pneumatic Actuator (Type Control Valve) for integral positioner attachment Valve body optionally made of: Cast steel or Stainless cast steel High-temperature or cold-resisting cast steel Low-noise valve plug With metal sealing With soft sealing or Lapped-in metal Balanced for handling high differential pressures. The control valves have a modular-assembly design and can be equipped with various accessories as follows: Positioners, limit switches, solenoid valves and further accessories according to IEC and NAMUR recommendations. Refer to Information Sheet T 8350 EN for more details. Versions Standard version with PTFE packing suitable for temperature ranges from 10 to 220 C, or with adjustable high-temperature packing suitable for 10 to 350 C, nominal size DN 15 to DN 200, nominal pressure PN 16 to 160 Type (Fig. 1) Type 3251 Valve and Type 3271 Actuator with an effective area of 350 to 2800 cm 2 (see Data Sheets T /-2 EN) Type Type 3251 Valve and Type 3277 Actuator with an effective area of 350 or 700 cm 2 (see T EN) Additional versions with Nominal pressures PN >160 to 400 On request Welding ends or welding-neck ends acc. DIN EN Flow divider For noise level reduction, see T 8081 EN AC-Trim See Data Sheets T 8082 EN and T 8082 EN Insulating section or bellows seal See Technical data Heating jacket Details on request Additional handwheel See T /-2 EN ANSI version NPS 1 2 to 8, ANSI Class 300 to 2500 (see Data Sheet T 8052 EN) Fig. 1 Type Pneumatic Control Valve with Type 3271 Actuator Type Hand-operated Valve With Type 3273 Hand-operated Actuator, for valves with max. 30 mm rated travel (see Data Sheet T 8312 EN) Type Electric Control Valve Details on request Data Sheet T 8051 EN

38 Principle of operation The process medium flows in the direction indicated by the arrow. The valve plug determines the cross-sectional area of flow. Versions with metal bellows seal (Fig. 4) have a test connection which allows the stainless steel bellows to be monitored. A pressure-balanced plug (Fig. 3) can be used when high pressures or differential pressures act on the valve plug and the force produced by the actuator is insufficient. The control valves may be supplied with Flow Dividers St I or St III (refer to Data Sheet T 8081 EN for details). Fail-safe positions Depending on how the compression springs are arranged in the actuator (see Data Sheet T EN and T EN for details), the control valve has two different fail-safe positions which are activated upon air supply failure. "Actuator stem extends" (fail-close): Upon air supply failure the force of the compression springs causes the valve to be closed. "Actuator stem retracts" (fail-open): Upon air supply failure the force of the compression springs causes the valve to be opened. Fig. 3 Type 3251 Valve with welding ends and balanced valve plug Test connection Flow divider St I Fig. 2 Type Pneumatic Control Valve with Type 3271 Actuator Fig. 4 Type 3251 Valve with Flow Divider St I and additional metal bellows seal with test connection 36 Data Sheet T 8051 EN

39 Table 1 Technical Data for Type 3251 Globe Valve Material Stainless cast steel Cast steel Cast steel Nominal size 1) DN ) Nominal pressure PN ) ) ) End connection Flanges All DIN EN versions Welding ends DIN EN Plug sealing Metal sealing, soft sealing or lapped-in metal Characteristic Equal percentage or linear Rangeability 50 : 1 Temperature ranges in C Permissible operating pressures according to pressure-temperature diagrams (see Information Sheet T EN) Valve body without insulating section Up to 350 C with high-temperature packing Valve body with Insulating section Bellows seal Valve plug 3) Standard With metal sealing With soft sealing Balanced PTFE ring Graphite ring Leakage class acc. to DIN EN 1349: 2000 Valve plug Standard With metal sealing IV With soft sealing VI Lapped-in metal IV-S2 DN 100 and larger: IV-S1 Balanced With metal sealing With PTFE ring: IV With graphite ring: III 1) Nominal size DN 200 in PN 63 to 100 2) Up to PN 400 on request 3) Only in combination with a suitable body material Table 2 Materials Standard version Valve body and flanges 1) Cast steel Cast steel Stainless cast steel Seat and plug 2) With metal sealing / / Seal ring with Soft sealing PTFE with 15 % glass fiber Balanced PTFE with carbon Graphite Guide bushings Stuffing box packing V-ring packing PTFE with carbon, spring of or high-temperature packing Body gasket Metal Insulating section Metal bellows seal Intermediate piece Metal bellows Heating jacket ) See also Pressure-Temperature Diagrams (T EN). Materials suitable for temperatures over 500 C: ; suitable for cryogenic applications: or ) Seats and plugs with metal sealing are also available either stellited or plug made of solid Stellite. Data Sheet T 8051 EN

40 Table 3 K vs coefficients available Versions in shaded areas also available with balanced plug Table 3a Overview with Flow Dividers St I (K vsi) and St III (K vsiii) Kvs KvsI KvsIII Seat mm Rated travel mm Table 3b Versions without flow divider Kvs DN Table 3c Versions with Flow Divider St I KvsI DN Table 3d Versions with Flow Divider St III KvsIII DN 50* * Version DN 50 and St III not available with bellows seal. 38 Data Sheet T 8051 EN

41 Table 4a Permissible differential pressures Δp for valves with unbalanced plug with metal sealing and without metal bellows seal; fail-safe position "Valve CLOSED" The bench ranges in the shaded areas indicate normal operation, i.e. operation at rated travel Values in non-shaded areas apply to springs pre-tensioned to the maximum Values in parentheses apply to half rated travel Table 4a Fail-safe position "Valve CLOSED" (fail-close) Bench range (bar) ( ) for actuator 1400 (cm 2 ) x2800 ( ) ( ) ( ) Required supply pressure DN 15 to to to to to to to 150 Kvs 0.1 to to to to ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) Upper spring range value bar Actuator cm 2 Δp when p2 = ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) (106) (217) (329) (252) (370) (400) (105) (217) (328) (252) (370) (400) (62.7) (129) (196) (150) (221) (250) (284) (41.4) (85.8) (130) (99.7) (147) (166) (188) (49.2) (100) (126) (129) (155) (30.6) (62.9) (79.1) (81.1) (97.3) (18.8) (38.8) (48.8) (50.1) (60.1) (11.9) (24.7) (31.1) (31.9) (38.3) (11.8) (24.6) (31) (31.8) (38.2) (15.7) (32.1) (40.3) (48.5) (24.9) (31.1) (37.2) (15.6) (32) (40.3) (48.5) (24.9) (31) (37.2) 2x2800 (31.2) (64) (80.6) (97) (49.8) (62) (74.4) (10.8) (22.2) (27.9) (33.6) (17.2) (21.5) (25.8) (10.7) (22.2) (27.9) (33.6) (17.2) (21.5) (25.7) 2x2800 (21.4) (44.4) (55.8) (67.2) (34.4) 43 (51.4) (6) (12.4) (15.6) (18.8) (9.6) (12) (14.4) 2x2800 (12) (24.8) (31.2) (37.6) (19.2) (24) (28.8) Data Sheet T 8051 EN

42 Table 4b Permissible differential pressures Δp for valves with unbalanced plug with metal sealing and without metal bellows seal; fail-safe position "Valve OPEN" (fail-open) Table 4b Fail-safe position "Valve OPEN" (fail-open) 350 Bench range 700 (bar) for actuator 1400 ( ) (cm 2 ) x2800 Required supply pressure DN Kvs Actuator cm 2 Δp at p2 = 0 15 to to to to to to to to to to (106) (245) (400) (105) (244) (400) (62.5) (146) (280) (41) (97) (185) (49) (113) (216) (30.4) (71) (135) (18.7) (43.7) (84) (134) (11.8) (27.8) (53.5) (85) (11.6) (27.7) (53.3) (85) (15.6) (36.2) (69) (15.5) (36.1) (69) 2x2800 (31) (72) (138) (10.8) (25) (47.8) (10.7) (25) (47.8) 2x2800 (21.4) (50) (95.6) (5.9) (13.9) (26.8) (42.8) 2x2800 (11.8) (27.8) (53.6) Notes regarding the differential pressure tables The differential pressure tables were prepared under the following conditions: Direction of flow: FTO Version including valve plug with metal sealing Version including PTFE packing Table 4a and 4b apply to unbalanced valve plugs with a downstream pressure of p 2 = 0 For the maximum differential pressure listed and the previously mentioned conditions, the leakage rate specified in Table 1 is not exceeded All pressures in bar (gauge pressure) The differential pressures specified in Tables 4a and 4b can be restricted by the pressure-temperature diagram. Note regarding the fail-safe position "Valve CLOSED": Always use pre-tensioned spring ranges for actuators with reduced travels. Note: Permissible differential pressures for special versions with soft-sealing plugs or lapped-in metals plugs, with metal bellows seal or balanced plug including a graphite ring are available on request. 40 Data Sheet T 8051 EN

43 Table 5 Permissible differential pressures Δp for valves with balanced plug with metal sealing and PTFE ring, without metal bellows seal The bench ranges in the shaded areas indicate normal operation, i.e. operation at rated travel Values in non-shaded areas apply to springs pre-tensioned to the maximum Values in parentheses apply to half rated travel Table 5a Fail-safe position "Valve CLOSED" (fail-close) Bench range (bar) for actuator (cm 2 ) x ( ) ( ) ( ) 5b "Valve OPEN" (fail-open) ( ) Required supply pressure Upper spring range value bar Actuator DN Kvs cm 2 Δp at p2 = (400) (400) (400) (302) (381) (221) (400) (400) (400) (400) (298) (378) (218) (400) (400) (400) (400) (293) (373) (213) (400) (114) (145) (82.6) (207) (363) (400) (400) (400) (400) (236) (298) (361) (174) (400) 2x2800 (400) (400) (400) (348) (400) (400) (400) (400) (400) (234) (296) (359) (172) (400) 2x2800 (400) (400) (400) (344) (400) (230) (292) (354) (167) (400) 2x2800 (400) (400) (400) (334) (400) Data Sheet T 8051 EN

44 Table 6 Dimensions in mm for Type and Type in standard version Valve DN Length L PN PN cm Height H1 700 cm for actuator area 1400 cm cm Height H2 (with foot PN for DN 100 or larger) PN Actuator cm x 2800 Diaphragm D Height H 1) Height H3 2) Thread M 30 x 1.5 M 60 x 1.5 M 100 x 2 a (for Type 3271 Actuator) G 3 8 (NPT 3 8) G 3 4 (NPT 3 4) G 1 (NPT 1) a2 (for Type 3277 Actuator) G 3 8 (NPT 3 8) 1) Actuator area 350 cm 2 2) without lifting ring Minimum clearance for actuator disassembly Table 7 Weights for Type and Type in standard version Valve DN Valve w/o actuator PN (approx. kg) PN w/o Actuator cm x 2800 Type 3271 handwheel (approx. kg) 1) w. handwheel Only with side-mounted handwheel, see T EN Type 3277 w/o handwheel (approx. kg) 1) w. handwheel ) Top row without handwheel, bottom row with handwheel H3 ØD a Pneumatic Actuators Type 3271 Type 3277 H3 H ØD a H 100 a2 H1 H1 H2 H2 L L Type Type Data Sheet T 8051 EN

45 Table 8 Dimensions and weights for Type 3251 Globe Valve in standard version with insulating section Without actuator Nominal size DN Height H4 for actuator area Weight (kg) w/o actuator for 350 cm cm cm cm PN PN Table 9 Dimensions and weights for Type 3251 Globe Valve in standard version with bellows seal Without actuator Nominal size DN Height H4 for PN for actuator area Height H4 for PN for actuator area Weight (kg) w/o actuator for 350 cm cm cm cm cm cm cm cm PN PN a b H4 c a a b d L Type 3251 with bellows seal or insulating section Type 3251 with heating jacket Dimensions on request Data Sheet T 8051 EN

46 Selection and sizing of the control valve 1. Calculate the K v coefficient according to IEC Select the nominal size DN and the K vs coefficient from Tables 3 to Determine the permissible differential pressure Δp from Tables 4 and Select the body material from Tables 1 and 2 as well as from the pressure-temperature diagrams in the Information Sheet T EN. 5. Select additional equipment from Tables 1 and 2. Please submit the following details when ordering Nominal size DN Nominal pressure PN Body material According to Table 2 Type of connection Flanges/Welding ends Plug Standard/balanced lapped-in metal, with soft sealing or with metal sealing Characteristic Equal percentage or linear Actuator Type 3271 or Type 3277 (see T EN or T EN) Fail-safe position Valve CLOSED or valve OPEN Process medium Density in kg/m 3 and temperature in C Flow rate kg/h or m 3 /h under normal or operating conditions Pressure p 1 and p 2 in bar (absolute pressure p abs), for minimum, normal and maximum flow rate Accessories Positioner and/or limit switch Specifications subject to change without notice. 44 Data Sheet T 8051 EN

47 Series 250 Pneumatic Control Valve Type and Type Globe Valve Type 3251 ANSI version Application Control valve for process engineering applications with high industrial requirements Valve sizes NPS 1 2 to 8 Pressure rating ANSI Class 150 to Class 2500 Temperatures 200 to 500 C ( 325 to 930 F) Type 3251 Globe Valve optionally operated with: Type 3271 Pneumatic Actuator (Type Control Valve) Type 3277 Pneumatic Actuator (Type Control Valve) for integral positioner attachment Valve body optionally made of: Carbon steel Stainless carbon steel or High-temperature or cold-resisting carbon steel Low-noise valve plugs optionally with: Metal sealing Soft sealing or Lapped-in metal sealing Balanced for handling large differential pressures The control valves, designed according to the modular assembly principle, can be equipped with various accessories: Positioners, limit switches, solenoid valves and other equipment according to IEC and NAMUR recommendation (see Information Sheet T 8350 EN for details). Versions Standard version with PTFE packing for temperatures from 10 to 220 C (15 to 428 F) or with adjustable high-temperature (HT) packing for temperatures for 10 to 350 C (15 to 660 F), valve sizes NPS 1 2 to 8, ANSI Class 150 to 900 Type (Fig. 1) Type 3251 Valve and Type 3271 Actuator with 350 to 2800 cm 2 effective areas (see Data Sheets T EN and T EN) Type Type 3251 Valve with Type 3277 Actuator with 350 or 700 cm 2 effective areas (see Data Sheet T EN) Further versions with Class 1500 and 2500 On request Welding ends or welding-neck ends acc. ANSI B16.25 Flow divider For noise level reduction, see T 8081 EN AC-Trim See Data Sheets T 8082 EN and T 8083 EN Insulating section or bellows seal See Technical data Heating jacket Details on request Additional handwheel See T /-2 EN DIN version DN 15 to 200, nominal pressure PN 16 to 400, see Data Sheet T 8051 EN Fig. 1 Type Pneumatic Control Valve with Type 3271 Pneumatic Actuator Type Hand-operated Valve With Type 3273 Hand-operated Actuator, for valves with max. 30 mm rated travel, see Data Sheet T 8312 EN Type Electric Control Valve Details on request Data Sheet T 8052 EN

48 Principle of operation The process medium flows through the valve in the direction indicated by the arrow. The valve plug position determines the cross-sectional area of flow. The version with the metal bellows seal (Fig. 4) is equipped with a test connection to allow the monitoring of the stainless steel bellows. A pressure-balanced plug (Fig. 3) can be used when high pressures or differential pressures act on the valve plug and the force produced by the actuator is insufficient. The control valves can be equipped with a Flow Divider St I or St III (Fig. 4, see Data Sheet T 8081 EN for details). Fail-safe positions Depending on how the compression springs are arranged in the actuator (see Data Sheets T EN and T EN for details), the control valve offers two different fail-safe positions effective upon air supply failure: "Actuator stem extends" (fail-close): Upon air supply failure, the force of the compression springs causes the valve to close. "Actuator stem retracts" (fail-open): Upon air supply failure, the force of the compression springs causes the valve to open. Fig. 3 Type 3251 Globe Valve with welding ends and balanced valve plug Test connection Flow Divider St I Fig. 2 Type Control Valve with Type 3271 Pneumatic Actuator Fig. 4 Type 3251 Globe Valve with Flow Divider St I and additional metal bellows seal with test connection 46 Data Sheet T 8052 EN

49 Table 1 Technical Data for Type 3251 Globe Valve Materials Carbon steel A 216 WCC Carbon steel A 217 WC6 Valve sizes NPS NPS 8 in Class 600 Pressure rating 1) Class End connection Flanges All ANSI versions Welding ends Acc. to ANSI B Plug sealing Metal sealing, soft sealing or lapped-in metal Characteristic Equal percentage or linear Rangeability 50 : 1 Stainless carbon steel A 351 CF8M Temperature ranges in C ( F) Permissible operating pressures acc. to pressure-temperature diagrams (see Information Sheet T EN) Valve body without insulating section C ( F) Up to 350 C (660 F) with high-temperature packing Body with Insulating section C ( F) C ( F) C ( F) Bellows seal C ( F) C ( F) C ( F) Valve plug 2) Standard Metal sealing C ( F) Soft sealing C ( F) Balanced PTFE ring C ( F) Graphite ring C ( F) Leakage class according to DIN EN 1349: 2000 / ANSI/FCI Valve plug Standard Metal sealing IV Soft sealing VI Lapped-in metal IV-S2 NPS 4 and larger IV-S1 Balanced, metal sealing With PTFE ring: IV With graphite ring: III 1) Up to Class 2500 on request. 2) Only in combination with a suitable body material. Table 2 Materials Standard version Valve body and flanges 1) Carbon steel A 216 WCC Carbon steel A 217 WC6 Stainless carbon steel A 351 CF8M Seat and plug 2) Metal sealing / / Seal ring with Soft sealing PTFE with 15 % glass fiber Balanced PTFE with carbon Graphite Guide bushings Stuffing box packing V-ring packing, PTFE with carbon, spring of or high-temperature packing Body gasket Metal Insulating section 3) A 217 WC6/A 182 F12 A 351 CF8M/A 182 F316 Metal bellows seal Intermediate piece 3) A 217 WC6/A 182 F12 A 351 CF8M/A 182 F316 Metal bellows Heating jacket ) See also Pressure-Temperature Diagram (T EN); material for cryogenic service: A 352 LCC. 2) All seats and plugs with metal sealing also available stellited or plug made of solid Stellite. 3) Depending on the valve bonnet material. Data Sheet T 8052 EN

50 Table 3 C v and K vs coefficients Versions in shaded areas also available with balanced plug Table 3a Overview with Flow Divider St I (C v I/K vs I) and St III (Cv III/K vs III) Cv Kvs Cv I Kvs I Cv III Kvs III Seat mm Rated travel mm in Table 3b Versions without flow divider Cv NPS DN Table 3c Versions with Flow Divider St I Cv I NPS DN Table 3d Versions with Flow Divider St III Cv III NPS DN 2* * NPS 2 version (DN 50) and St III not available with bellows seal 48 Data Sheet T 8052 EN

51 Notes on differential pressure tables The differential pressure tables were prepared under the following conditions: Direction of flow: FTO Valve plug with metal sealing Version with PTFE packing Tables 4a and 4b apply to unbalanced valve plug with a downstream pressure p 2 = 0 bar (psi) For the maximum differential pressures listed and the previously mentioned conditions, the leakage rate stated in Table 1 is not exceeded All pressures mentioned are in bar and psi The differential pressure stated can be limited by the pressure-temperature diagram (see T EN). Overview: Valve versions of the Δp tables Table 4a and 4b: Valve with unbalanced plug without metal bellows seal; fail-safe position "Valve CLOSED" Table 5a and 5b: Valve with balanced plug with PTFE ring, without metal bellows seal; fail-safe position "Valve CLOSED" or "Valve OPEN" Table 6a and 6b: Valve with unbalanced plug without metal bellows seal; "Valve OPEN" Note: Permissible differential pressures for special versions with soft sealing or lapped-in metal plugs, with metal bellows seal or balanced plug with graphite ring are available on request. Note on fail-safe position "Valve CLOSED": Always use pretensioned spring ranges for actuators with reduced travels. Data Sheet T 8052 EN

52 Table 4a Permissible differential pressures Δp for valves with unbalanced plug with metal sealing and without metal bellows seal; fail-safe position "Valve CLOSED" Pressures in bar The bench ranges in the shaded areas indicate normal operation, i.e. operation at rated travel Values in non-shaded areas apply to springs pre-tensioned to maximum Values in parentheses apply to half travel Fail-safe position "Valve CLOSED" (fail-close) Bench range (bar) with actuator (cm 2 ) x ( ) Required supply pressure NPS Cv Actuator cm to to to 4 2 to 4 3 to 6 3 to 6 4 to to to 3 5 to ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) Upper spring range value bar Δp when p2 = 0 bar ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) (106) (217) (329) (252) (370) (400) (105) (217) (328) (252) (370) (400) (62.7) (129) (196) (150) (221) (250) (284) (41.4) (85.8) (130) (99.7) (147) (166) (188) (49.2) (100) (126) (129) (155) (30.6) (62.9) (79.1) (81.1) (97.3) (18.8) (38.8) (48.8) (50.1) (60.1) (11.9) (24.7) (31.1) (31.9) (38.3) (11.8) (24.6) (31) (31.8) (38.2) (15.7) (32.1) (40.3) (48.5) (24.9) (31.1) (37.2) (15.6) (32) (40.3) (48.5) (24.9) (31) (37.2) 2x2800 (31.2) (64) (80.6) (97) (49.8) (62) (74.4) (10.8) (22.2) (27.9) (33.6) (17.2) (21.5) (25.8) (10.7) (22.2) (27.9) (33.6) (17.2) (21.5) (25.7) 2x2800 (21.4) (44.4) (55.8) (67.2) (34.4) 43 (51.4) (6) (12.4) (15.6) (18.8) (9.6) (12) (14.4) 2x2800 (12) (24.8) (31.2) (37.6) (19.2) (24) (28.8) 50 Data Sheet T 8052 EN

53 Table 4b Permissible differential pressures Δp for valves with unbalanced plug with metal sealing and without metal bellows seal; fail-safe position "Valve CLOSED" Pressures in psi The bench ranges in the shaded areas indicate normal operation, i.e. operation at rated travel Values in non-shaded areas apply to springs pre-tensioned to maximum Values in parentheses apply to half travel Fail-safe position "Valve CLOSED" (fail-close) Bench range (psi) with actuator (cm 2 ) x ( ) Required supply pressure NPS Cv Actuator cm to to to 4 2 to 4 3 to 6 3 to 6 4 to to to 3 5 to ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) Upper spring range value + 3 psi Δp when p2 = 0 psi ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) (1537) (3146) (4770) (3654) (5365) (5800) (1522) (3146) (4756) (3654) (5365) (5800) (909) (1870) (2842) (2175) (3204) (3625) (4118) (600) (1244) (1885) (1445) (2131) (2407) (2726) (713) (145) (1827) (1870) (2247) (443) (912) (1147) (1176) (1411) (272) (562) (707) (726) (871) (172) (358) (451) (462) (555) (171) (356) (449) (461) (554) (227) (465) (584) (703) (361) (451) (539) (226) (464) (584) (703) (361) (449) (539) 2x2800 (452) (928) (1168) (1406) (722) (899) (1079) (156) (322) (404) (487) (249) (312) (374) (155) (322) (404) (487) (249) (312) (372) 2x2800 (310) (644) (809) (974) (499) (623) (745) (87) (180) (226) (272) (139) (174) (209) 2x2800 (174) (359) (452) (545) (278) (348) (417) Data Sheet T 8052 EN

54 Table 5a Permissible differential pressures Δp for valves with balanced plug with metal sealing and PTFE ring, without metal bellows seal Pressures in bar The bench ranges in the shaded areas indicate normal operation, i.e. operation at rated travel Values in non-shaded areas apply to springs pre-tensioned to maximum Values in parentheses apply to half travel Fail-safe position "Valve CLOSED" (fail-close) "Valve OPEN" (fail-open) Bench range (bar) with actuator (cm ) ( ) ( ) 2800 ( ) ( ) 2x2800 Required supply pressure Upper spring range value bar NPS Cv Actuator Δp when p2 = 0 bar cm (400) (400) (400) (302) (381) (221) (400) (400) (400) (400) (298) (378) (218) (400) (400) (400) (400) (293) (373) (213) (400) (114) (145) (82.6) (207) (363) (400) (400) (400) (400) (236) (298) (361) (174) (400) 2x2800 (400) (400) (400) (348) (400) (400) (400) (400) (400) (234) (296) (359) (172) (400) 2x2800 (400) (400) (400) (344) (400) (230) (292) (354) (167) (400) 2x2800 (400) (400) (400) (334) (400) 52 Data Sheet T 8052 EN

55 Table 5b Permissible differential pressures Δp for valves with balanced plug with metal sealing and PTFE ring, without metal bellows seal Pressures in psi The bench ranges in the shaded areas indicate normal operation, i.e. operation at rated travel Values in non-shaded areas apply to springs pre-tensioned to maximum Values in parentheses apply to half travel Fail-safe position "Valve CLOSED" (fail-close) "Valve OPEN" (fail-open) Bench range (psi) with actuator (cm 2 ) x ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) Required supply pressure Upper spring range value + 3 psi Actuator NPS Cv cm 2 Δp when p2 = 0 psi (5800) (5800) (5800) (4379) (5524) (3204) (5800) (5800) (5800) (5800) (4321) (5481) (3161) (5800) (5800) (5800) (5800) (4248) (5408) (3088) (5800) (1653) (2102) (1197) (3001) (5263) (5800) (5800) (5800) (5800) (3422) (4321) (5234) (2523) (5800) 2x2800 (5800) (5800) (5800) (5046) (5800) (5800) (5800) (5800) (5800) (3393) (4292) (5205) (2494) (5800) 2x2800 (5800) (5800) (5800) (4988) (5800) (3335) (4234) (5133) (2421) (5800) 2x2800 (5800) (5800) (5800) (4843) (5800) Data Sheet T 8052 EN

56 Table 6 Permissible differential pressures Δp for valves with unbalanced plug with metal sealing and without metal bellows seal Fail-safe position "Valve OPEN" 350 Table 6a Pressures in bar Table 6b Pressures in psi Nominal bench range in bar/psi 1400 with actuator (cm 2 ( ) (3... 9) ) x2800 Required supply pressure Actuator NPS Cv cm 2 Δp when p2 = 0 bar Δp when p2 = 0 psi 1 2 to to to 4 2 to 4 3 to 6 3 to to to 3 5 to (106) (245) (400) (1537) (3552) (5800) (105) (244) (400) (1522) (3538) (5800) (62.5) (146) (280) (906) (2117) (4060) (41) (97) (185) (594) (2682) (2682) (49) (113) (216) (710) (1638) (3132) (30.4) (71) (135) (441) (1029) (1957) (18.7) (43.7) (84) (134) (271) (633) (1218) (1943) (11.8) (27.8) (53.5) (85) (171) (403) (775) (1232) (11.6) (27.7) (53.3) (85) (168) (401) (773) (1232) (15.6) (36.2) (69) (226) (525) (1000) (15.5) (36.1) (69) (224) (523) (1000) 2x2800 (31) (72) (138) (449) (1044) (2001) (10.8) (25) (47.8) (156) (362) (693) (10.7) (25) (47.8) (156) (362) (693) 2x2800 (21.4) (50) (95.6) (310) (725) (1386) (5.9) (13.9) (26.8) (42.8) (85) (201) (388) (620) 2x2800 (11.8) (27.8) (53.6) (171) (403) (777) 54 Data Sheet T 8052 EN

57 Table 7 Dimensions for Type and Type Pneumatic Control Valve as standard version Valve NPS Length L H1 for actuator 350 cm cm cm cm 2 H2 With foot for NPS 4 and larger Class 150 Class 300 Class 600 Class 900 Class 150/600 Class 900 Class 150/600 Class 900 Class 150/600 Class 900 Class 150/600 Class 900 Class 150 Class 300/600 Class 900 mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in Actuator cm x 2800 Diaphragm mm in H 1) mm in H3 2) mm in Thread M 30 x 1.5 M 60 x 1.5 M 100 x 2 a (with Type 3271 Actuator) G 3 8 (NPT 3 8) G 3 4 (NPT 3 4) G 1 (NPT 1) a2 (with Type 3277 Actuator) G 3 8 (NPT 3 8) 1) Actuator 350 cm 2 without lifting ring 2) Minimum clearance for actuator disassembly Data Sheet T 8052 EN

58 Table 8 Weights for Type 3251 Globe Valve in standard version Valve NPS Valve without actuator (approx.) Cl 150/300 Class 600 Class 900 kg lbs kg lbs kg lbs Actuator cm x 2800 Type 3271 (approx.) Type 3277 (approx.) Without With handwheel Without With handwheel kg lbs kg Only with side-mounted handwheel, see T EN lbs kg lbs kg lbs ) Top row without handwheel, bottom row with handwheel Pneumatic Actuators Type 3271 Type 3277 H3 ØD a H3 H ØD a H 100 a2 H4 H1 H1 H2 H2 L L L Type Type Type 3251 with bellows seal or insulating section 56 Data Sheet T 8052 EN

59 Table 9 Dimensions and weights for Type 3251 Globe Valve in standard version with insulating section Without actuator Nominal size NPS DN Class H4 for actuator Class 900 H4 for actuator Weight (kg) without actuator for 350 cm 2 mm in cm 2 mm in cm 2 mm in cm 2 mm in cm 2 mm in cm 2 mm in cm 2 mm in cm 2 mm in Cl kg lbs Class 900 kg lbs Table 10 Dimensions and weights for Type 3251 Globe Valve in standard version with bellows seal Without actuator Nominal size NPS DN Cl 150 H4 for actuator Cl 300/600 H4 for actuator Cl 900 H4 for actuator Weight without actuator for 350 cm 2 mm in cm 2 mm in cm 2 mm in cm 2 mm in cm 2 mm in cm 2 mm in cm 2 mm in cm 2 mm in cm 2 mm in cm 2 mm in cm 2 mm in cm 2 mm in Class kg /300 lbs 794 Class 600 kg lbs Class 900 kg lbs Data Sheet T 8052 EN

60 a b c a a b d Type 3251 with heating jacket Dimensions on request The following details are required on ordering Nominal size NPS... Nominal pressure ANSI Class... Body material According to Table 2 End connection Flanges/welding ends Plug Standard/balanced Soft sealing, metal sealing or lapped-in metal Characteristic Equal percentage or linear Actuator Type 3271 or Type 3277 (see T EN or T EN) Fail-safe position Valve CLOSED or valve OPEN Process medium Density in lb/cu.ft or kg/m 3 and temperature in C ( F) Flow rate lbs/h or kg/h or cu.ft/min or m 3 /h in standard or operating condition Pressure p 1 and p 2 in bar (psi) (absolute pressure p abs), both with minimum, standard and maximum flow Accessories Positioner and/or limit switches Selection and sizing of the control valve 1. Calculate the C v (K v) coefficient according to IEC Select the nominal size and C v (K vs) coefficient from Tables 3 to Determine the permissible differential pressure Δp from Tables 4 and Select the valve body material from Tables 1 and 2 as well as the pressure-temperature diagrams in the Information Sheet T EN. 5. Select additional equipment from Tables 1 and 2. Specifications subject to change without notice. 58 Data Sheet T 8052 EN

61 Series 250 Pneumatic Control Valve Type and Type Three-way Valve Type 3253 Application Diverting or mixing valves for heavy-duty service in process engineering Nominal sizes DN 15 to 500 Nominal pressure PN 10 to 160 Temperatures 200 to +500 C Type 3253 Three-way Valve optionally operated with: Type 3271 Pneumatic Actuator (Type Control Valve) or Type 3277 Pneumatic Actuator (Type Control Valve) for integral positioner attachment Valve body optionally made of Cast iron (DN 250 or larger for PN 10, DN 150/200 for PN 16) Cast steel (DN 15 to 100 for PN 63 or greater, DN 150 to DN 500 for PN 16 or greater), DN 400 and DN 500 for up to PN 40 Cast stainless steel Stuffing box containing either two spring-loaded PTFE V-ring packings or two adjustable high-temperature (HT) packings. Optional test connection between the two packings Conversion between mixing and diverting services by reversing the seat-guided valve plug The control valves, designed according to the modular assembly principle, can be equipped with various accessories: Positioners, limit switches, solenoid valves and other equipment according to IEC and NAMUR recommendation (see Information Sheet T 8350 EN for details). Versions Standard version with PTFE packing for temperatures from 10 to +220 C or with adjustable high-temperature packings for 10 to +350 C Type (Fig. 1). Type 3253 Valve and Type 3271 Actuator with 350 to 2800 cm 2 (see T EN and T EN) Type Type 3253 Valve and Type 3277 Actuator with 350 or 700 cm 2 (see Data Sheet T EN) Additional versions with Nominal pressures >PN 160 to 400. On request Insulating section or bellows seal See Technical Data Additional handwheel See T /-2 EN ANSI version. NPS 1 2 to 20, ANSI Class 300 to 2500 on request Type DN 15 to 150, PN 10 to 40; NPS 1 2 to 6, ANSI Class 150 to 300 (see Data Sheet T 8026 EN). Fig. 1 Type Pneumatic Control Valve with Type 3271 Actuator Type Electric Control Valve On request Type Hand-operated Valve. With Type 3273 Hand-operated Actuator (see T 8312 EN for details) Data Sheet T 8055 EN

62 Principle of operation Depending on plug arrangement, the three-way valve can be used for mixing or diverting service. When used as a mixing valve, the process media to be mixed enter through valve ports A and B. The combined stream leaves at port AB (Fig. 2 and 3). The flow rate from valve ports A and B to port AB depends on the cross-sectional area of flow between the seats and the valve plugs. When used as a diverting valve, the process medium enters at port AB and the partial streams leave at valve ports A and B (Fig. 4). AB A Fail-safe action Depending on how the compression springs are arranged in the pneumatic actuator (see T EN and T EN for further details), the control valve has two different fail-safe actions which become effective upon a supply air failure: Actuator stem extends: Whenever the air supply fails, either valve port B (mixing valve) or valve port A (diverting valve) is closed. Actuator stem retracts: Whenever the air supply fails, either valve port A (mixing valve) or valve port B (diverting valve) is closed. B Fig. 3 Type 3253 Three-way Valve Body version for DN 15 to DN 40, Plug arrangement for mixing service, Plug arrangement for diverting service DN 15 to 25 AB A AB A Fig. 2 Type Control Valve with Type 3271 Pneumatic Actuator and additional handwheel, Body version for DN 50 to DN 500, Plug arrangement for mixing service B Fig. 4 Type Control Valve with Type 3277 Pneumatic Actuator (only up to DN 100), Body version for DN 40 to DN 500, Plug arrangement for diverting service B 60 Data Sheet T 8055 EN

63 Table 1 Technical Data for Type 3253 Three-way Valve Material Cast iron EN-JL1040 Cast steel Cast stainless steel Nominal sizes DN Nominal pressure 1) PN End connection Flanges All DIN EN versions Other connections on request Seat/plug sealing Metal sealing Characteristic Linear Rangeability 50 : 1 Temperature ranges in C Permissible operating pressures according to pressure-temperature diagram (see Information Sheet T EN) Body without insulating section C up to 350 C with HT packing Body with Insul. sect ) Bellows ) Valve plug Metal sealing Leakage rate Acc. to DIN EN 1349: 2000 I 1) Up to PN 400 on request, DN 400 to DN 500 only for up to PN 40 2) In connection with suitable body material; for temperatures exceeding 500 C: Table 2. Materials (material numbers according to EN) Standard version Valve body and bonnet Cast iron EN-JL1040 Cast steel Cast stainless steel Seat and plug 1) Guide bushings Stuffing box packing V-ring packing PTFE with carbon, spring or HT packing Body gaskets Metal Insulating section Metal bellows seal Intermediate piece / / Metal bellows ) All seats and plugs also available with Stellite facing Table 3 Available Kvs coefficients Kvs Seat Travel DN Data Sheet T 8055 EN

64 Table 4a Permissible differential pressures Δp for valves with and without metal bellows seal Fail-safe action "Actuator stem extends" Pressures in bar Values specified in the columns highlighted in gray correspond to the standard bench range, i.e. applied at rated travel Values specified in the other columns apply to maximum pretensioned springs. Bench range (bar) for actuator area (cm 2 ) Required supply pressure ( ) ( ) ( ) (2... 3) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) 2 x Lower spring range value + upper spring range value DN Kvs Actuator cm 2 Δp in bar (106) (217) (252) (370) (106) (217) (252) (370) (41.5) (86) (100) (147) (49) (100) (126) (129) (155) (18.8) (38.9) (49) (50.2) (60.2) (11.2) (24.7) (31.2) (32) (38.4) (22.2) (27.9) (19.3) (25) (30.7) (12.4) (15.5) (10.7) (13.9) (17.2) 2x2800 (16.6) (25) (31) (21.4) (27.8) (34.4) (6.8) (8.8) (10.9) 2x2800 (13.6) (17.6) (21.8) x x x Data Sheet T 8055 EN

65 Table 4b Permissible differential pressure Δp for valves with or without metal bellows seal Fail-safe action "actuator stem retracts" Pressures in bar Values specified in the columns highlighted in gray correspond to the standard bench range, i.e. applied at rated travel Values specified in the other columns apply to maximum pretensioned springs. Bench range (bar) for actuator area (cm 2 ) Required supply pressure ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) 2 x Lower spring range value + upper spring range value DN Kvs Actuator cm 2 Δp in bar (22.5) (50) (189) (287) (22.5) (50) (189) (287) (8.2) (19.4) (75) (114) (10.5) (23.5) (30) (68.4) (17) (4) (8.8) (11.3) (26.4) (31.4) (5.5) (7.1) (16.7) (19.9) (5.1) (6.5) (12.2) (13.6) (15) (6.7) (7.5) (8.3) 2x2800 (5.4) (7) (13.4) (15) (16.6) (4.2) (4.8) (5.3) 2x2800 (4.4) (8.4) (9.6) (10.6) x x x Data Sheet T 8055 EN

66 Table 5 Dimensions in mm for Type and Type Pneumatic Control Valve in standard version Valve DN Length L H1 for actuator H2 approx. PN PN cm cm cm cm PN PN Actuator cm x 2800 Diaphragm D H 1) H3 2) Thread M 30 x 1.5 M 60 x 1.5 M 100 x 2 a (with Type 3271 Actuator) G 3 8 ( 3 8 NPT) G 3 4 ( 3 4 NPT) G 1 (1 NPT) a2 (with Type 3277 Actuator) G 3 8 ( 3 8 NPT) 1) Actuator 350 cm 2 without lifting ring 2) Minimum clearance required to disassemble the actuator Table 6 Weights for Type and Type Pneumatic Control Valve in standard version Valve DN Valve without actuator (approx. kg) PN ) PN ) Actuator cm x 2800 Type 3271 Without (approx.) 2) With handwheel Only with side-mounted handwheel, see T EN Type 3277 Without (approx.) 2) With handwheel ) Weights on request 2) Top row without handwheel, bottom row with handwheel H3 ØD a Pneumatic Actuators Type 3271 Type 3277 H3 H ØD a H 100 H1 H4 H2 L Type Type Data Sheet T 8055 EN

67 Table 7 Dimensions in mm and weights for Type 3253 Valve in standard version with insulating section Without actuator Nominal sizes DN Height H4 for actuator ) ) Weight without actuator (approx. kg) PN ) PN ) 1) Table 8 Dimensions in mm and weights for Type 3253 Valve in standard version with bellows seal Without actuator Nominal sizes DN H4 for PN for actuator H4 for PN for actuator Weight without actuator (apprx. kg) 1) Data on request ) ) ) PN ) 370 1) PN ) H4 H2 L Type 3253 with bellows seal or insulating section Selection and sizing of the control valve 1. Calculate the appropriate K v coefficient acc. to IEC Select the nominal size DN and K vs coefficient according to Tables 3 and 4 3. Determine the permissible differential pressure Δp according to Table 4 4. Select the body material according to Tables 1 and 2 and the pressure-temperature diagram in Information Sheet T EN 5. Select accessories according to Tables 1 and 2 The following details are required on ordering Nominal size DN Nominal pressure PN Body material According to Table 2 End connection Flanges Actuator Type 3271 or Type 3277 (see T EN or T EN) Fail-safe action Actuator stem extends/retracts Process medium Densitiy in kg/m 3 and temperature in C Flow rate kg/h or m 3 /h in standard or operating state Pressure p 1 und p 2 in bar (absolute pressure p abs) both with minimum, normal and maximum flow rate Accessories Positioner and/or limit switches Specifications subject to change without notice. Data Sheet T 8055 EN

68

69 Series 250 Pneumatic Control Valve Type and Type Globe Valve Type 3254 Application Control valve for process engineering applications with high industrial requirements, especially for high pressures and temperatures Nominal size DN 80 to 500 Nominal pressure PN 16 to 400 Temperatures 200 to +500 C Type 3254 Globe Valve with: Type 3271 Pneumatic Actuator (Type Control Valve) or Type 3277 Pneumatic Actuator (Type Control Valve) for integral positioner attachment Valve body made of: Cast steel Stainless cast steel High-temperature or cold-resisting cast steel. Valve plug optionally with: Metal sealing Soft sealing Lapped-in metal Balanced for handling high differential pressures Additional stem guide in the bottom body flange The modular design of the control valves allows them to be equipped with various accessories: Positioners, solenoid valves and other accessories according to IEC and NAMUR recommendation. See Information Sheet T 8350 EN for details. Version Standard version with PTFE packing for temperatures from 10 to 220 C or with adjustable high-temperature (HT) packing for 10 to 350 C, nominal size DN 80 to DN 500, nominal pressure PN 16 to PN 160 Type (Fig. 1) Type 3254 Valve and Type 3271 Actuator with 700 to 2800 cm² effective diaphragm area (refer to Data Sheets T EN and T EN) Type Type 3254 Valve and Type 3277 Actuator with 350 to 700 cm² effective diaphragm area (refer to T EN) Other versions Nominal pressures PN 160 to 400 On request Welding ends or welding neck ends acc. to DIN EN Flow divider For noise level reduction, see Data Sheet T 8081 EN AC-Trim See Data Sheets T 8082 EN and T 8083 EN Insulating section or bellows seal See Technical data Heating jacket Details on request Fig. 1 Type Pneumatic Control Valve with Type 3271 Actuator Additional handwheel See Data Sheet T /-2 EN ANSI version NPS 3 to 16, ANSI Class 150 to 2500 (see T 8061 EN) Type Hand-operated Valve With Type 3273 Hand-operated Actuator, for valves with max. 30 mm rated travel (see Data Sheet T 8312 EN) Type Electric Control Valve Details on request Data Sheet T 8060 EN

70 Principle of operation (Figs. 2 to 4) The process medium flows through the valve in the direction indicated by the arrow. The valve plug position determines the free area between the valve seat and the plug. The additional stem guide is located in the bottom body flange. A pressure-balanced plug (Fig. 3) can be used when high pressures or differential pressures act on the valve plug and the force produced by the actuator is insufficient. Fig. 4 shows the control valve version with a bellows seal. A test connection allows the stainless steel bellows to be monitored. The control valves can be fitted with Flow Dividers St I (Fig. 4) or St III for a further reduction in the noise level (see Data Sheet T 8081 EN for details). Fail-safe position Depending on how the compression springs are arranged in the actuator (see Data Sheet T EN or T EN for details), the control valve has two different fail-safe positions which become effective upon supply air failure: Actuator stem extends (FA) The actuator springs close the valve when the supply air fails. Actuator stem retracts (FE) The actuator springs open the valve when the supply air fails. Fig. 3 Type 3254 Globe Valve with welding ends and balanced valve plug Test connection Flow Divider St I Fig. 2 Type Control Valve with Type 3271 Pneumatic Actuator Fig. 4 Type 3254 Globe Valve with Flow Divider St I and and additional bellows seal with test connection 68 Data Sheet T 8060 EN

71 Table 1 Technical data for Type 3254 Globe Valve Material Cast steel Cast steel Stainless cast steel Nominal size 1) DN DN 80 to 500 DN 80 to 100 DN 150 to 500 Nominal pressure PN PN 16 to 160 2) PN 40 to 160 2) PN 16 to 160 PN 16 to 100 2) End connections Flanges All DIN EN versions Welding ends According to DIN EN Seat-plug sealing Metal sealing Soft sealing Lapped-in metal Characteristic Equal percentage Linear Rangeability 50 : 1 Temperature ranges in C Permissible operating pressures according to pressure-temperature diagrams (see Information Sheet T EN) Valve body without insulating section C Up to 350 C with high-temperature packing Body with Insulating section C C C Bellows seal C C C Valve plug 3) Standard Metal sealing C Soft sealing C Balanced PTFE ring C Graphite ring C Leakage class according to DIN EN 1349 (2000) Standard Metal sealing IV Valve plug Soft sealing VI Lapped-in metal IV-S2 IV-S1: DN 100 and larger Balanced Metal sealing With PTFE ring: IV With graphite ring: III 1) DN 400 in PN 40 and PN 100; DN 500 in PN 40 2) Up to PN 400 on request 3) Only in conjunction with suitable body material Table 2 Materials Standard version Body and flanges 1) Seat and plug 2) Cast steel Cast steel Stainless cast steel Metal sealing / / Seat ring with Soft sealing PTFE with 15 % glass fiber Balanced PTFE with carbon Graphite Guide bushings Packing PTFE-carbon V-ring packing, spring or high-temperature packing Body gasket Metal Insulating section / Metal bellows seal Intermediate piece / Metal bellows Heating jacket ) See also pressure-temperature diagrams in Information Sheet T EN Material for temperatures exceeding 500 C: Material for cryogenic service: or ) Seats and plugs with metal sealing also stellited or plug made of solid Stellite Data Sheet T 8060 EN

72 Table 3 K VS coefficients Versions in the gray shaded areas also available with balanced plug Table 3a Overview with Flow Divider St I (K VS I) and St III (K VS III) K VS K VSI K VSIII Seat mm Travel mm Table 3b Versions without flow divider K VS DN Table 3c Versions with Flow Divider St I K VSI DN Table 3d Versions with Flow Divider St III K VSIII DN Data Sheet T 8060 EN

73 Table 4a Permissible differential pressures Δp for valves with unbalanced plugs with metal sealing without metal bellows seal; fail-safe position Valve CLOSED Pressures in bar Values specified in shaded columns apply to standard cases, i.e. application at rated travel Differential pressures specified in white columns apply to maximum pretensioned springs Differential pressures in parentheses apply to half travel. Table 4a Fail-safe position Valve CLOSED (Actuator stem extends) Bench ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) range (bar) 1400 ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) for actuators (cm²) x2800 ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) Required supply pressure Upper spring range value bar Actuator DN K VS Δp when p 2 = 0 bar cm² (30.7) (63) (79.2) (81.2) (97.4) to to to to to to (30.4) (62.8) (78.9) (81) (97.1) (18.8) (38.9) (48.9) (50.2) (60.2) (18.7) (38.7) (48.8) (50) (60) (18.4) (38.5) (48.5) (49.7) (59.8) (11.9) (24.7) (31.2) (32) (38.4) (11.8) (24.6) (31) (31.9) (38.3) (11.6) (24.5) (30.9) (31.7) (38.1) (15.6) (32.1) (40.3) (48.5) (24.9) (31) (37.2) (15.5) (32) (40.2) (48.4) (24.7) (30.9) (37.1) 2x2800 (33) (64) (80.2) (96.8) (49.4) (61.8) (74.2) (10.8) (22.2) (27.9) (33.6) (17.2) (21.5) (25.7) (10.7) (22.1) (27.8) (33.5) (17.1) (21.4) (25.7) 2x2800 (21.4) (44.2) (55.6) (67) (34.2) (42.8) (51.4) (5.9) (12.3) (15.5) (18.8) (9.5) (11.9) (14.3) 2x2800 (11.8) (24.6) (31) (37.6) (19) (23.8) (28.6) x x x x x Data Sheet T 8060 EN

74 Table 4b Permissible differential pressures Δp for valves with unbalanced plugs with metal sealing without metal bellows seal; fail-safe position Valve OPEN Pressures in bar Table 4b Fail-safe position Valve OPEN (stem retracts) Bench 700 range (bar) for actuators (cm²) x ( ) Required supply pressure Actuator DN K VS cm² Δp when p 2 = 0 bar (30.7) (71) (136) to to to to to to (30.6) (71) (136) (18.8) (43.9) (84) (134) (18.7) (43.7) (83.8) (134) (18.4) (43.5) (83) (134) (11.8) (27.8) (53.5) (85.6) (11.8) (27.8) (53.5) (85.6) (11.6) (27.7) (53.4) (85.5) (15.6) (36.2) (69) (15.5) (36.1) (68.9) 2x2800 (31) (72) (138) (10.8) (25) (47.8) (10.7) (25) (47.8) 2x2800 (21.4) (50) (95.6) (5.9) (13.9) (26.8) (42.8) 2x2800 (11.8) (27.8) (53.6) x x x x x Notes on differential pressure tables The differential pressure tables were prepared under the following conditions: Direction of flow: FTO Valve plug version with metal sealing or soft sealing Version with PTFE packing Tables 4a and 4b for unbalanced plug with downstream pressure p 2 = 0 bar The leakage rate stated in Table 1 is not exceeded with the maximum differential pressures listed and the previously mentioned conditions All pressures mentioned are in bar (gauge) The differential pressure stated can be limited by the pressure-temperature diagram Note on fail-safe position "Valve CLOSED": For actuators with reduced travels, pretensioned spring ranges must be used. Note: Permissible differential pressures for special versions with soft sealing or lapped-in metal plugs, with metal bellows seal or balanced plug with graphite ring are available on request. 72 Data Sheet T 8060 EN

75 Table 5 Permissible differential pressures Δp for valves with balanced plugs with metal sealing and PTFE ring, without metal bellows seal Values specified in shaded columns apply to standard cases, i.e. application at rated travel Differential pressures specified in white columns apply to maximum pretensioned springs Differential pressures in parentheses apply to half travel. Table 5a Fail-safe position Valve CLOSED (Actuator stem extends) 5b Valve OPEN (stem retracts) Bench range (bar) for actuators ( ) ( ) ( ) (cm²) x2800 ( ) Required supply pressure Upper spring range value bar Actuator DN K VS cm² Δp when p 2 = 0 bar (400) (400) (400) (400) (400) to to to to to to (400) (400) (400) (400) (400) (293) (373) (213) (400) (400) (113) (145) (82.6) (207) (363) (236) (298) (361) (400) (400) (400) (236) (298) (361) (174) (400) (400) (400) (400) (400) (400) (400) (400) (234) (296) (359) (172) (400) (400) 2x2800 (400) (400) (400) (344) (400) (400) (230) (292) (355) (167) (400) (400) 2x2800 (400) (400) (400) (334) (400) (400) x x x x x Data Sheet T 8060 EN

76 Table 7 Dimensions in mm for Type and Type Pneumatic Control Valve in standard version Valve DN Length L PN PN H1 700 cm² for actuator 1400 cm² cm² H2 PN PN Actuator cm² x 2800 Diaphragm Ø D H H3 1) Thread M 30 x 1.5 M 60 x 1.5 M 100 x 2 a (with Type 3271 Actuator) G 3 8 ( 3 8 NPT) G ¾ (¾ NPT) G 1 (1 NPT) a2 (with Type 3277 Actuator) G 3 8 ( 3 8 NPT) 1) Minimum clearance for removing actuator Table 8 Weights for Type and Type Pneumatic Control Valve in standard version Valve DN Valve without PN actuator (kg) PN ) Actuator cm² x 2800 Type 3271 Without (approx. kg) 2) With handwh. 27 Only with side-mounted handwheel, see T EN Type 3277 Without 26 (approx. kg) 2) With handwh. 31 1) Weights on request 2) Top row without handwheel, bottom row with handwheel H3 H ØD a Pneumatic actuators Type 3271 Type 3277 H3 H ØD a 100 a2 H1 H1 H2 H2 L L Type Type Data Sheet T 8060 EN

77 Table 9 Dimensions and weights for Type 3254 Valve in standard version with insulating section Without actuator Valve DN H4 700 cm² for actuator 1400 cm² cm² H2 PN ) PN Table 10 Dimensions and weights for Type 3254 Valve in standard version with bellows seal Without actuator Valve DN H4 700 cm² for actuator 1400 cm² cm² On request H4 700 cm² for actuator 1400 cm² cm² On request Weight (kg) PN ) 1) without actuator PN ) 1) Weights on request H4 Type 3254 with bellows seal or insulating section L Selection and sizing of control valves 1. Calculate the K V coefficient according to IEC Select the nominal size and K VS coefficient from Tables 3 and Determine the permissible differential pressure Δp from Table 4 or Select the valve body material from Tables 1 and 2 as well as from the pressure-temperature diagrams in the Information Sheet T EN. 5. Select accessories from Tables 1 and 2. The following details are required on ordering Nominal size DN Nominal pressure PN Body material According to Table 2 End connection Flanges/welding ends Plug Standard/balanced Soft sealing, metal sealing or lapped-in metal Characteristic Equal percentage or linear Actuator Type 3271 or Type 3277 (see T EN or T EN) Fail-safe position Valve CLOSED or valve OPEN Process medium Density in kg/m³ and temperature in C Flow rate kg/h or m³/h under normal or operating condition Pressure p 1 and p 2 in bar (absolute pressure p abs ), both with minimum, normal and maximum flow rate Accessories Positioner and/or limit switches Specifications subject to change without notice. Data Sheet T 8060 EN

78

79 Series 250 Pneumatic Control Valve Type and Type Globe Valve Type 3254 ANSI version Application Control valve for process engineering applications with high industrial requirements, especially for high pressures and temperatures Valve size NPS 3 to 16 Pressure rating Class 150 to 2500 Temperatures 200 to 500 C ( 320 to 930 F) Type 3254 Globe Valve with: Type 3271 Pneumatic Actuator (Type Control Valve) or Type 3277 Pneumatic Actuator (Type Control Valve) for integral positioner attachment Valve body made of: Carbon steel Stainless carbon steel High-temperature or cold-resisting carbon steel. Valve plug optionally with: Metal sealing Soft sealing Lapped-in metal Balanced for handling high differential pressures Additional stem guide in the bottom body flange The modular design of the control valves allows them to be equipped with various accessories: Positioners, solenoid valves and other accessories according to IEC and NAMUR recommendation. See Information Sheet T 8350 EN for details. Version Standard version with PTFE packing for temperatures from 10 to 220 C (15 to 430 F) or with adjustable high-temperature (HT) packing for 10 to 350 C (15 to 660 F), valve sizes NPS 3 to 16, Class 150 to 900 Type (Fig. 1) Type 3254 Valve and Type 3271 Actuator with 700 to 2800 cm² effective diaphragm area (refer to Data Sheets T EN and T EN) Type Type 3254 Valve and Type 3277 Actuator with 350 to 700 cm² effective diaphragm area (refer to T EN) Other versions Class 1500 and 2500 On request Welding ends or welding neck ends acc. to ANSI B16.25 Flow divider For noise level reduction, see Data Sheet T 8081 EN AC-Trim See Data Sheets T 8082 EN and T 8083 EN Insulating section or bellows seal See Technical data Heating jacket Details on request Fig. 1 Type Pneumatic Control Valve with Type 3271 Actuator Additional handwheel See Data Sheet T /-2 EN DIN version Nominal size DN 80 to DN 500, nominal pressure PN 16 to 400 (see T 8060 EN) Type Hand-operated Valve With Type 3273 Hand-operated Actuator, for valves with max. 30 mm rated travel (see Data Sheet T 8312 EN) Type Electric Control Valve Details on request Data Sheet T 8061 EN

80 Principle of operation (Figs. 2 to 4) The process medium flows through the valve in the direction indicated by the arrow. The valve plug position determines the free area between the valve seat and the plug. The additional stem guide is located in the bottom body flange. A pressure-balanced plug (Fig. 3) can be used when high pressures or differential pressures act on the valve plug and the force produced by the actuator is insufficient. Fig. 4 shows the control valve version with a bellows seal. A test connection allows the stainless steel bellows to be monitored. The control valves can be fitted with Flow Dividers St I (Fig. 4) or St III for a further reduction in the noise level (see Data Sheet T 8081 EN for details). Fail-safe position Depending on how the compression springs are arranged in the actuator (see Data Sheet T EN or T EN for details), the control valve has two different fail-safe positions which become effective upon supply air failure: Actuator stem extends (FA) The actuator springs close the valve when the supply air fails. Actuator stem retracts (FE) The actuator springs open the valve when the supply air fails. Fig. 3 Type 3254 Globe Valve with welding ends and balanced valve plug Test connection Flow Divider St I Fig. 2 Type Control Valve with Type 3271 Pneumatic Actuator Fig. 4 Type 3254 Globe Valve with Flow Divider St I and and additional bellows seal with test connection 78 Data Sheet T 8061 EN

81 Table 1 Technical data for Type 3254 Globe Valve Material Carbon steel A 216 WCC Carbon steel A 217 WC6 Valve size 1) NPS 3 to 16 Pressure rating 2) Class 150 to 900 End connections Flanges All ANSI versions Welding ends According to ANSI B16.25 Seat-plug sealing Metal sealing Soft sealing Lapped-in metal Characteristic Equal percentage Linear Rangeability 50 : 1 Stainless carbon steel A 351 CF8M Temperature ranges Permissible operating pressures according to pressure-temperature diagrams (see Information Sheet T EN) Valve body without insulating section C ( F) Up to 350 C (660 F) with high-temperature packing Body with Insulating section C ( F) C ( F) C ( F) Bellows seal C ( F) C ( F) Valve plug 3) Standard Metal sealing C ( F) Soft sealing C ( F) Balanced PTFE ring Graphite ring C ( F) C ( F) C ( F) Leakage class according to DIN EN 1349 (ANSI/FCI ) Standard Metal sealing IV Valve plug Soft sealing VI Lapped-in metal IV-S2 IV-S1: NPS 4 (DN 100) and larger Balanced Metal sealing With PTFE ring: IV With graphite ring: III 1) NPS 16 in Class 300 and 600 2) Up to Class 2500 on request 3) Only in conjunction with suitable body material Table 2 Materials Standard version Body and flanges 1) Seat and plug 2) Carbon steel A 216 WCC Carbon steel A 217 WC6 Stainless carbon steel A 351 CF8M Metal sealing / / Seat ring with Soft sealing PTFE with 15 % glass fiber Balanced PTFE with carbon Graphite Guide bushings Packing PTFE-carbon V-ring packing, spring or high-temperature packing Body gasket Metal Insulating section 3) A 217 WC6/A 182 F12 A 351 CF8M/A 182 F316 Metal bellows seal Intermediate piece 3) A 217 WC6/A 182 F12 A 217 WC6/A 182 F12 Metal bellows Heating jacket ) See also pressure-temperature diagrams in Information Sheet T EN Material for cryogenic service: A 352 LCC 2) Seats and plugs with metal sealing also stellited or plug made of solid Stellite available 3) Depending on the valve bonnet material Data Sheet T 8061 EN

82 Table 3 C V coefficients Version in shaded areas also available with balanced plug Table 3a Overview with Flow Divider St I (K VS I) and St III (K VS III) C V K VS C VI K VSI C VIII K VSIII Seat mm Rated travel mm in Table 3b Versions without flow divider C V NPS DN Table 3c Versions with Flow Divider St I C VI NPS DN Table 3d Versions with Flow Divider St III C VIII NPS DN Data Sheet T 8061 EN

83 Notes on differential pressure tables The differential pressure tables were prepared under the following conditions: Direction of flow: FTO Valve plug version with metal sealing or soft sealing Version with PTFE packing Tables 4a and 4b for unbalanced plug with downstream pressure p 2 = 0 bar (psi) The leakage rate stated in Table 1 is not exceeded with the maximum differential pressures listed and the previously mentioned conditions All pressures mentioned are in bar or psi (gauge) The differential pressure stated can be limited by the pressure-temperature diagram Selection and sizing of control valves 1. Calculate the C V (K V ) coefficient according to IEC Select the nominal size and C V (K VS ) coefficient from Tables 3 to Determine the permissible differential pressure Δp from Table 4 or Select the valve body material from Tables 1 and 2 as well as from the pressure-temperature diagrams in the Information Sheet T EN. 5. Select accessories from Tables 1 and 2. Note on fail-safe position "Valve CLOSED": For actuators with reduced travels, pretensioned spring ranges must be used. Note: Permissible differential pressures for special versions with soft sealing or lapped-in metal plugs, with metal bellows seal or balanced plug with graphite ring are available on request. Data Sheet T 8061 EN

84 Table 4a Permissible differential pressures Δp for valves with unbalanced plugs with metal sealing without metal bellows seal; fail-safe position Valve CLOSED Pressures in bar Values specified in shaded columns apply to standard cases, i.e. application at rated travel Differential pressures specified in white columns apply to maximum pretensioned springs Differential pressures in parentheses apply to half travel. Table 4a Fail-safe position Valve CLOSED (Actuator stem extends) Bench ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) range (bar) 1400 ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) for actuators (cm²) x2800 ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) Required supply pressure Upper spring range value bar Actuator NPS C V Δp when p 2 = 0 bar cm² (30.7) (63) (79.2) (81.2) (97.4) to to to 16 8 to to (30.4) (62.8) (78.9) (81) (97.1) (18.8) (38.9) (48.9) (50.2) (60.2) (18.7) (38.7) (48.8) (50) (60) (18.4) (38.5) (48.5) (49.7) (59.8) (11.9) (24.7) (31.2) (32) (38.4) (11.8) (24.6) (31) (31.9) (38.3) (11.6) (24.5) (30.9) (31.7) (38.1) (15.6) (32.1) (40.3) (48.5) (24.9) (31) (37.2) (15.5) (32) (40.2) (48.4) (24.7) (30.9) (37.1) 2x2800 (33) (64) (80.2) (96.8) (49.4) (61.8) (74.2) (10.8) (22.2) (27.9) (33.6) (17.2) (21.5) (25.7) (10.7) (22.1) (27.8) (33.5) (17.1) (21.4) (25.7) 2x2800 (21.4) (44.2) (55.6) (67) (34.2) (42.8) (51.4) (5.9) (12.3) (15.5) (18.8) (9.5) (11.9) (14.3) 2x2800 (11.8) (24.6) (31) (37.6) (19) (23.8) (28.6) x x x x Data Sheet T 8061 EN

85 Table 4b Permissible differential pressures Δp for valves with unbalanced plugs with metal sealing without metal bellows seal; fail-safe position Valve CLOSED Pressures in psi Values specified in shaded columns apply to standard cases, i.e. application at rated travel Differential pressures specified in white columns apply to maximum pretensioned springs Differential pressures in parentheses apply to half travel. Table 4b Fail-safe position Valve CLOSED (Actuator stem extends) Bench ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) range (psi) 1400 ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) for actuators (cm²) x2800 ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) Required supply pressure Upper spring range value + 3 psi Actuator NPS C V Δp when p 2 = 0 psi cm² (445) (913) (1148) (1177) (1412) to to to 16 8 to to (440) (910.6) (1144) (1174) (1408) (272) (564) (709) (727) (873) (271) (561) (707) (725) (870) (266) (558) (703) (720) (867) (172) (358) (452) (464) (556) (171) (356) (449) (462) (555) (168) (355) (448) (459) (552) (226) (465) (584) (703) (361) (449) (539) (224) (464) (583) (707) (358) (448) (537) 2x2800 (478) (928) (1163) (1403) (716) (896) (1075) (156) (322) (404) (487) (249) (311) (372) (155) (320) (403) (485) (248) (310) (372) 2x2800 (310) (461) (806) (971) (495) (620) (745) (85) (178) (224) (272) (137) (172) (207) 2x2800 (171) (356) (449) (545) (275) (345) (414) x x x x Data Sheet T 8061 EN

86 Table 5a Permissible differential pressures Δp for valves with balanced plugs with PTFE ring and metal sealing, without metal bellows seal Pressures in bar Values specified in shaded columns apply to standard cases, i.e. application at rated travel Differential pressures specified in white columns apply to maximum pretensioned springs Differential pressures in parentheses apply to half travel. Fail-safe position Valve CLOSED (Actuator stem extends) Valve OPEN (stem retracts) Bench range (bar) for actuators ( ) ( ) ( ) (cm²) x2800 ( ) Required supply pressure Upper spring range value bar Actuator NPS C V cm² Δp when p 2 = 0 bar (400) (400) (400) (400) (400) (400) (400) (400) (400) (400) to to to 16 8 to to (297) (378) (218) (400) (400) (400) (400) (400) (400) (400) (293) (373) (213) (400) (400) (113) (145) (82.6) (207) (363) (236) (298) (361) (400) (400) (400) (236) (298) (361) (174) (400) (400) (400) (400) (400) (400) (400) (400) (234) (296) (359) (172) (400) (400) 2x2800 (400) (400) (400) (344) (400) (400) (230) (292) (355) (167) (400) (400) 2x2800 (400) (400) (400) (334) (400) (400) x x x x Data Sheet T 8061 EN

87 Table 5b Permissible differential pressures Δp for valves with balanced plugs with PTFE ring and metal sealing, without metal bellows seal Pressures in psi Values specified in shaded columns apply to standard cases, i.e. application at rated travel Differential pressures specified in white columns apply to maximum pretensioned springs Differential pressures in parentheses apply to half travel. Fail-safe position Valve CLOSED (Actuator stem extends) Valve OPEN (stem retracts) Bench range (psi) for actuators (6...18) ( ) ( ) (cm²) x2800 ( ) Required supply pressure Upper spring range value + 3 psi Actuator NPS C V cm² Δp when p 2 = 0 psi (5800) (5800) (5800) (5800) (5800) (5800) (5800) (5800) (5800) (5800) to to 16 8 to to (4307) (5481) (3161) (5800) (5800) (5800) (5800) (5800) (5800) (5800) (4249) (5409) (3089) (5800) (5800) (1639) (2103) (1198) (3002) (5264) (3422) (4321) (5235) (5800) (5800) (5800) (3422) (4321) (5235) (2523) (5800) (5800) (5800) (5800) (5800) (5800) (5800) (5800) (3393) (4292) (5206) (2494) (5800) (5800) 2x2800 (5800) (5800) (5800) (4988) (5800) (5800) (3335) (4234) (5148) (2422) (5800) (5800) 2x2800 (5800) (5800) (5800) (4843) (5800) (5800) x x x x Data Sheet T 8061 EN

88 Table 6 Permissible differential pressures Δp for valves with unbalanced plugs with metal sealing, without metal bellows seal; fail-safe position Valve OPEN (stem retracts) Pressures in bar and psi Table 6a Pressures in bar Table 6b Pressures in psi Bench 700 range (bar/psi) for actuators (cm²) x ( ) (3...9) Required supply pressure Actuator NPS C V cm² Δp when p 2 = 0 bar Δp when p 2 = 0 psi (30.7) (71) (136) (445) (1029) (1972) to to to 16 8 to to (30.6) (71) (136) (443) (1029) (1972) (18.8) (43.9) (84) (134) (272) (636) (1218) (1943) (18.7) (43.7) (83.8) (134) (271) (633) (1215) (1943) (18.4) (43.5) (83) (134) (266) (630) (1348) (1943) (11.8) (27.8) (53.5) (85.6) (171) (403) (775) (1241) (11.8) (27.8) (53.5) (85.6) (171) (403) (775) (1241) (11.6) (27.7) (53.4) (85.5) (168) (401) (774) (1239) (15.6) (36.2) (69) (226) (525) (1000) (15.5) (36.1) (68.9) (224) (523) (999) 2x2800 (31) (72) (138) (449) (1044) (2001) (10.8) (25) (47.8) (156) (362) (693) (10.7) (25) (47.8) (155) (362) (693) 2x2800 (21.4) (50) (95.6) (310) (725) (1386) (5.9) (13.9) (26.8) (42.8) (85) (201) (388) (620) 2x2800 (11.8) (27.8) (53.6) (171) (403) (777) x x x x Data Sheet T 8061 EN

89 Table 7 Dimensions for Type and Type Pneumatic Control Valve in standard version Valve NPS Length L H1 for actuator H2 700 cm² 1400 cm² 2800 cm² Class 150 Class 300 Class 600 Class 900 Class 150/600 Class 900 Class 150/600 Class 900 Class 150/600 Class 900 Class 150 Class 300/600 Class 900 mm inch mm inch mm inch mm inch mm inch mm inch mm inch mm inch mm inch mm inch mm inch mm inch mm inch Actuator cm² x 2800 Diaphragm Ø D mm inch H mm inch H3 1) mm inch Thread M 30 x 1.5 M 60 x 1.5 M 100 x 2 a (with Type 3271 Actuator) G 3 8 ( 3 8 NPT) G ¾ (¾ NPT) G 1 (1 NPT) a2 (with Type 3277 Actuator) G 3 8 ( 3 8 NPT) 1) Minimum clearance for removing actuator Data Sheet T 8061 EN

90 Table 8 Weights for Type and Type Pneumatic Control Valve in standard version Valve NPS Valve without actuator (approx.) Class 150/300 Class 600 Class 900 kg lbs kg On request lbs kg lbs On request Actuator cm² x 2800 Type 3271 (approx.) Type 3277 (approx.) Without handwheel With handwheel Without handwheel With handwheel kg lbs kg 27 lbs 59.5 kg 26 lbs 57.6 kg 31 lbs 68.5 Only with side-mounted handwheel, see T EN Pneumatic actuators H3 H ØD a Type 3271 Type 3277 H3 H ØD a 100 a2 H1 H1 H2 H2 L L Type Type Data Sheet T 8061 EN

91 Table 9 Dimensions and weights for Type 3254 Valve in standard version with insulating section Without actuator Valve NPS Class 150 to 600 H4 for actuator Class 900 H4 for actuator Weight without actuator for 700 cm² 1400 cm² 2800 cm² 700 cm² 1400 cm² 2800 cm² Class 150/300 Class 600 Class 900 mm inch mm inch mm inch mm inch mm inch mm inch mm inch mm On inch request mm inch On request Table 10 Dimensions and weights for Type 3254 Valve in standard version with bellows seal Without actuator Valve NPS Class 150 H4 for actuator Class 300/600 H4 for actuator Class 900 H4 for actuator Weight without actuator for 700 cm² 1400 cm² 2800 cm² 700 cm² 1400 cm² 2800 cm² 700 cm² 1400 cm² 2800 cm² Class 150/300 Class 600 Class 900 mm inch mm inch mm inch mm inch mm inch mm inch mm inch mm inch mm inch mm inch mm On inch request mm inch On request Data Sheet T 8061 EN

92 H4 Type 3254 with bellows seal or insulating section L The following details are required on ordering Valve size NPS Pressure rating PN Body material According to Table 2 End connection Flanges/welding ends Plug Standard/balanced Soft sealing, metal sealing or lapped-in metal Characteristic Equal percentage or linear Actuator Type 3271 or Type 3277 (see T EN or T EN) Fail-safe position Valve CLOSED or valve OPEN Process medium Density in lb/cu.ft or kg/m³ and temperature in C Flow rate lbs/h or kg/h or cu.ft/min or m³/h under normal or operating condition Pressure p 1 and p 2 in bar (psi) (absolute pressure p abs ), both with minimum, normal and maximum flow rate Accessories Positioner and/or limit switches Specifications subject to change without notice. 90 Data Sheet T 8061 EN

93 Series 250 Pneumatic Control Valve Type and Type Angle Valve Type 3256 Application Control valve for process engineering applications with high industrial requirements Nominal sizes DN 15 to 200 Nominal pressures PN 16 to 400 Temperatures 200 to 500 C Conversion of valve sizing coefficients: C v (in US gallons/min) = 1.17 K vs (in m 3 /h) K vs (in m 3 /h) = 0.86 C v (in US gallons/min) Type 3256 Angle Valve optionally operated with: Type 3271 Pneumatic Actuator (Type Control Valve) or Type 3277 Pneumatic Actuator (Type Control Valve) for integral positioner attachment. Valve body optionally made of High-temperature steel Cold-resisting steel or Stainless cast steel. Valve plug optionally with Metal sealing Soft sealing up to PN 40 or Lapped-in metal sealing Balanced plug to handle large differential pressures. Stuffing boxes optionally with Spring-loaded, PTFE V-ring packings or Two adjustable high-temperature (HT) packings, optionally available with a test connection between the two packings. The control valves, designed according to the modular assembly principle, can be equipped with various accessories: Positioners, solenoid valves and other accessories according to IEC and NAMUR recommendation. See Information Sheet T 8350 EN for details. Versions Standard version (Fig. 1) DN 15 to 150 in PN 16 to 160, DN 200 in PN 40 to 100, with PTFE packing for temperatures from 10 to 220 C or with adjustable high-temperature packings for 10 to 350 C. Type (Fig. 1) With Type 3271 Pneumatic Actuator (350 to 2800 cm 2 ). Type With Type 3277 Pneumatic Actuator (350 and 700 cm 2 ) for integral positioner attachment (see Data Sheet T EN for details). Additional versions with Nominal pressures > PN 160 to 400 On request Nominal size DN 250 and DN 300 On request Welding ends or welding neck ends acc. to DIN EN Flow divider for noise level reduction See T 8081 EN AC-Trim See Data Sheets T 8082 EN, T 8083 EN Heating jacket Details on request Fig. 1 Type Pneumatic Control Valve with Type 3271 Actuator, positioner and solenoid valve Insulating section or bellows seal See Technical Data Additional handwheel See T /-2 EN ANSI version NPS 1 2 to 8, ANSI Class 300 to 2500 See Data Sheet T 8066 EN Type Hand-operated Control Valve With Type 3273 Manual Actuator for valves with a max. travel of 30 mm See Data Sheet T 8312 EN Type Electric Control Valve On request Data Sheet T 8065 EN

94 Principle of operation (Figs. 2 to 4) The process medium flows through the valve in the direction indicated by the arrow. The position of the valve plug determines the cross-sectional area of flow between the valve seat and the plug. The version with metal bellows seal (Fig. 3) is equipped with a test connection to allow the monitoring of the stainless steel bellows. A pressure-balanced plug (Fig. 4) needs to be used when high pressures or differential pressures act on the plug and the force produced by the actuator is insufficient. The control valves can be equipped with a Flow Divider St I or St III (see Data Sheet T 8081 EN for details). Fig. 2 Type Pneumatic Control Valve with Type 3271 Pneumatic Actuator Fail-safe action Depending on how the compression springs are arranged in the pneumatic actuator (see Data Sheets T EN and T EN for details), the control valve offers two fail-safe actions which become effective upon a supply air failure: "Actuator stem extends" (fail-close) The valve is closed when the air supply fails. "Actuator stem retracts" (fail-open) The valve is opened when the air supply fails. Fig. 3 Type 3256 Valve with metal bellows seal and Flow Divider St I Fig. 4 Type 3256 Angle Valve with balanced valve plug 92 Data Sheet T 8065 EN

95 Table 1 Technical Data for Type 3256 Angle Valve Material Cast steel Cast steel Nominal size DN DN DN 200 up to PN 100 Nominal pressure 1) PN PN End connection Flanges All DIN EN versions Welding ends DIN EN Seat/plug sealing Metal sealing, soft sealing or lapped-in metal Characteristic Equal percentage or linear Rangeability 50 : 1 Stainless cast steel Temperature ranges [ C] Permissible operating pressures according to pressure-temperature diagram (see Information Sheet T EN) Valve body without insulating section C with high-temperature packing: C Body with Insulating section C C C Bellows section C C C Metal sealing C Standard Valve plug 2) Soft sealing C Balanced With PTFE ring C With graphite ring C Leakage class according to DIN EN 1349: 2000 Valve plug Standard Balanced Metal sealing Soft sealing Lapped-in metal With PTFE ring With graphite ring IV VI IV-S2 DN 100 and larger: IV-S1 IV III 1) Up to PN 400 on request 2) Only when suitable body material is used Table 2 Materials (material numbers according to EN) Standard version Valve body 1) Cast steel Cast steel Stainless cast steel Seat/plug 2) Metal sealing / / Sealing ring for soft sealing PTFE with glass fiber Sealing ring for balanced plug PTFE with carbon Graphite Guide bushings Stuffing box packing V-ring packing of PTFE with carbon, spring of or HT packing Body gasket Metal Insulating section Metal bellows seal Intermediate piece Metal bellows Heating jacket ) Also see pressure-temperature diagrams (T EN) Material for temperatures above 500 C: Material for cryogenic service: or ) All seats and valve plugs with metal sealing also stellited or plugs of solid Stellite Data Sheet T 8065 EN

96 Table 3 Kvs coefficients Table 3a Overview with Flow Divider St I (Kvs I) or St III (Kvs III) Kvs Kvs I Kvs III Seat Travel Table 3b Versions without flow divider Versions in shaded areas also available with balanced valve plug Kvs DN 1) Table 3c Versions with Flow Divider St I Versions in shaded areas also available with balanced valve plug Kvs I DN 1) Table 3d Versions with Flow Divider St III Versions in shaded areas also available with balanced valve plug Kvs III DN 1) 50 2) ) DN 65 on request 2) DN 50 version with Flow Divider St III not possible with bellows seal 94 Data Sheet T 8065 EN

97 Table 4a Permissible differential pressures Δp for valves with unbalanced plug with metal sealing, without metal bellows seal; fail-safe action "valve CLOSED" Values specified in the fields highlighted in gray correspond to the standard bench range, i.e. applied at rated travel Values specified in the other fields apply to maximally pretensioned springs Values in parentheses apply to 50 % travel Table 4a Fail-safe action "valve CLOSED" (fail-close) Bench range (bar) with actuator (cm 2 ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) x ( ) Required supply pressure DN Kvs Actuator cm 2 15 to to to to to to to to to to ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) Upper spring range value bar Δp when p2 = 0 bar ( ) ( ) (106) (217) (329) (252) (370) (400) (105) (217) (328) (252) (370) (400) (62.5) (129) (196) (150) (221) (250) (284) (41.2) (85.7) (130) (99.6) (147) (166) (188) (49.2) (100) (126) (129) (155) (30.6) (62.9) (79.1) (81.1) (97.3) (18.8) (38.8) (48.8) (50.1) (60.1) (11.9) (24.7) (31.1) (31.9) (38.3) (11.8) (24.6) (31) (31.8) (38.2) (15.7) (32.1) (40.3) (48.5) (24.9) (31.1) (37.2) (15.6) (32) (40.3) (48.5) (24.9) (31) (37.2) 2x2800 (31.2) (64) (80.6) (97) (49.8) (62) (74.4) (10.8) (22.2) (27.9) (33.6) (17.2) (21.5) (25.8) (10.7) (22.2) (27.9) (33.6) (17.2) (21.5) (25.7) 2x2800 (21.4) (44.4) (55.8) (67.2) (34.4) 43 (51.4) (6) (12.4) (15.6) (18.8) (9.6) (12) (14.4) 2x2800 (12) (24.8) (31.2) (37.6) (19.2) (24) (28.8) Data Sheet T 8065 EN

98 Table 4b Permissible differential pressures Δp for valves with unbalanced plug with metal sealing, without metal bellows seal; fail-safe action "valve OPEN" Table 4b Fail-safe action "valve OPEN" (fail-open) 350 Bench range (bar) with actuator (cm 2 ) x ( ) Required supply pressure DN Kvs Actuator cm 2 Δp when p2 = 0 bar 15 to to to to to to to to to to (106) (245) (400) (105) (244) (400) (62.5) (146) (280) (400) (41) (97) (185) (297) (49) (113) (216) (344) (30.4) (71) (135) (216) (18.7) (43.7) (84) (134) (11.8) (27.8) (53.5) (85) Notes on differential pressure tables The differential pressure tables were prepared under the following conditions: Direction of flow: FTO Version with valve plug with metal sealing Version with PTFE packing Tables 4a and 4b for unbalanced valve plug with downstream pressure p 2 = 0 bar For the listed maximum differential pressures and the previously mentioned conditions, the leakage rate stated in Table 1 is not exceeded All pressures in bar (gauge) The stated differential pressures can be limited by the pressure-temperature diagram Note on fail-safe action "valve CLOSED": Always use pretensioned spring ranges for actuators with reduced travels. Note! Permissible differential pressures are available on request for special versions with: Soft sealing or Lapped-in metal plug, Metal bellows seal or Balanced valve plug with graphite ring. Selection and sizing of the control valve 1. Calculate the appropriate K v coefficient according to IEC Select the nominal size and K vs coefficient according to Table Determine the permissible differential pressure Δp. Select the appropriate actuator according to Tables 4a to 5b. 4. Select materials, pressure and temperature according to Tables 1 and 2 and the pressure-temperature diagram (see T EN) 5. Select accessories according to Tables 1 and (11.6) (27.7) (53.3) (85) (15.6) (36.2) (69) (110) (15.5) (36.1) (69) (110) 2x2800 ( 31) (72) (138) (220) (10.8) (25) (47.8) (76.4) (10.7) (25) (47.8) (76.3) 2x2800 (21.4) (50) (95.6) (152) (5.9) (13.9) (26.8) (42.8) 2x2800 (11.8) (27.8) (53.6) (85.6) 96 Data Sheet T 8065 EN

99 Table 5 Permissible differential pressures Δp for valves with balanced plug with metal sealing and PTFE ring, without metal bellows seal Values specified in the fields highlighted in gray correspond to the standard bench range, i.e. applied at rated travel Values specified in the other fields apply to maximally pretensioned springs Values in parentheses apply to 50 % travel Table 5a Fail-safe action "valve CLOSED" (fail-close) Table 5b "Valve OPEN" (fail-open) Bench range (bar) with actuator (cm 2 ) x ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) Required supply pressure Upper spring range value bar DN Kvs Actuator cm 2 Δp when p2 = 0 bar (400) (400) (400) (302) (381) (221) (400) (400) (400) (400) (298) (378) (218) (400) (400) (400) (400) (293) (373) (213) (400) (114) (145) (82.6) (207) (363) (400) (400) (400) (400) (236) (298) (361) (174) (400) 2x2800 (400) (400) (400) (348) (400) (400) (400) (400) (400) (234) (296) (359) (172) (400) 2x2800 (400) (400) (400) (344) (400) (230) (292) (354) (167) (400) 2x2800 (400) (400) (400) (334) (400) Data Sheet T 8065 EN

100 Table 6 Dimensions in mm for Type and Type Control Valve in standard version Valve DN Length L PN PN H1 for actuator 350 cm cm cm cm Actuator cm x 2800 Diaphragm D H 1) H3 2) Thread M 30 x 1.5 M 60 x 1.5 M 100 x 2 a (with Type 3271 Actuator) G 3 8 ( 3 8 NPT) G 3 4 ( 3 4 NPT) G 1 (1 NPT) a2 (with Type 3277 Actuator) G 3 8 ( 3 8 NPT) 1) Actuator 350 cm 2 2) without lifting ring Minimum clearance to disassemble the actuator Table 7 Weights for Type and Type Control Valve in standard version Valve DN Valve without PN actuator (approx. kg) PN On request Without Actuator cm x 2800 Type (approx. kg) 1) With handwheel Only with side-mounted handwheel, see T EN Type 3277 Without (approx. kg) 1) With handwheel ) Top row without handwheel, bottom row with handwheel ØD a H3 Pneumatic Actuators Type 3271 Type 3277 ØD a H3 H H 100 a2 H1 H1 L L L Type L Type Data Sheet T 8065 EN

101 Table 8 Dimensions and weights for Type 3256 Angle Valve in standard version with insulating section Without actuator Nominal size DN Height H4 for actuator Weight (kg) without actuator 350 cm cm cm cm PN PN On request Table 9 Dimensions and weights for Type 3256 Angle Valve in standard version with bellows seal Without actuator Nominal size DN H4 for PN for actuator H4 for PN for actuator Weight (kg) without actuator 350 cm cm cm cm cm cm cm cm PN PN On request H4 a b c L a L Type 3256 Angle Valve with insulating section or bellows seal Type 3256 with heating jacket Dimensions on request The following details are required on ordering Nominal size DN Nominal pressure PN Body material According to Table 2 End connection Flanges/welding ends Valve plug Standard/balanced Soft sealing, metal sealing or lapped-in metal sealing Characteristic Equal percentage or linear Actuator Type 3271 or Type 3277 (see T EN and T EN) Fail-safe action Valve CLOSED/valve OPEN Process medium Density in kg/m 3 and temperature in C Flow rate kg/h or m 3 /h under standard or operating conditions Pressure p 1and p 2 in bar (absolute pressure p abs) with minimum, standard and maximum flow rate Accessories Positioner and/or limit switches Specifications subject to change without notice. Data Sheet T 8065 EN

102

103 Series 250 Pneumatic Control Valve Type and Type Angle Valve Type 3256 ANSI version Application Control valve for process engineering applications with high industrial requirements Valve size NPS 1 2 to 8 Pressure rating ANSI Class 300 to 2500 Temperatures 200 C to 500 C ( 325 to 930 F) Type 3256 Angle Valve optionally operated with: Type 3271 Pneumatic Actuator (Type Control Valve) or Type 3277 Pneumatic Actuator (Type Control Valve) for integral positioner attachment. Valve body optionally made of High-temperature carbon steel Cold-resisting carbon steel or Stainless carbon steel. Valve plug optionally with Metal sealing Soft sealing up to Class 300 or Lapped-in metal Balanced to handle large differential pressures. Stuffing boxes optionally with Spring-loaded PTFE V-ring packings or Two adjustable high-temperature (HT) packings, optionally available with a test connection between the two packings. The control valves, designed according to the modular assembly principle, can be combined with various accessories: Positioners, solenoid valves and other accessories according to IEC and NAMUR recommendation. See Information Sheet T 8350 EN for details. Versions Standard version (Fig. 1) NPS 1 2 to 6, ANSI Class 300 to 900, NPS 8 up to Class 600, with PTFE packing for temperatures from 10 to 220 C (15 to 430 F) or with adjustable high-temperature packing for 10 to 350 C (15 to 660 F). Type (Fig. 1) With Type 3271 Actuator (effective area 350 to 2800 cm 2 ). Type With Type 3277 Actuator (350 and 700 cm 2 ) for integral positioner attachment (see Data Sheet T EN). Additional versions with ANSI Class 1500 and 2500 On request Valves in NPS 10 and 12 On request Welding ends or welding neck ends acc. to ANSI B16.25 Flow divider For noise level reduction See T 8081 EN AC-Trim See T 8082 EN, T 8083 EN Fig. 1 Type Pneumatic Control Valve with Type 3271 Actuator, positioner and solenoid valve Insulating section or bellows seal See Technical Data Heating jacket Details on request Additional handwheel See T /-2 EN DIN version DN 15 to 200, PN 10 to 160 See Data Sheet T 8065 EN Type Hand-operated Control Valve With Type 3273 Manual Actuator for valves with a max. travel of 30 mm See T 8312 EN Type Electric Control Valve On request Data Sheet T 8066 EN

104 Principle of operation (Figs. 2 to 4) The process medium flows through the valve in the direction indicated by the arrow. The position of the valve plug determines the cross-sectional area of flow between the valve seat and plug. The version with metal bellows seal (Fig. 3) is equipped with a test connection to allow the monitoring of the stainless steel bellows. A pressure-balanced plug (Fig. 4) needs to be used when high pressures or differential pressures act on the plug and the force produced by the actuator is insufficient. The control valves can be equipped with Flow Divider St I or St III (see Data Sheet T 8081 EN for details). Fig. 2 Type Valve with Type 3271 Actuator Fail-safe action Depending on how the compression springs are arranged in the actuator (see Data Sheets T EN and T EN for details), the control valve offers two different fail-safe actions which become effective upon supply air failure. "Actuator stem extends": Whenever the air supply fails, the valve is closed (fail-close). "Actuator stem retracts": Whenever the air supply fails, the valve is opened (fail-open). Fig. 3 Type 3256 Valve with Flow Divider St I and additional metal bellows seal with test connection Fig. 4 Type 3256 Valve with welding ends and balanced valve plug 102 Data Sheet T 8066 EN

105 Table 1 Technical Data for Type 3256 Angle Valve Material Carbon steel A 216 WCC Carbon steel A 217 WC6 Valve sizes NPS NPS 8 up to Class 900 Pressure rating 1) Class End connection Flanges All ANSI versions Welding ends According to ANSI B16.25 Seat/plug sealing Metal sealing, soft sealing or lapped-in metal sealing Characteristic Equal percentage Linear Rangeability 50 : 1 Stainless carbon steel A 351 CF8M Temperature ranges in C ( F) Permissible operating pressures acc. to pressure-temperature diagrams (see Information Sheet T EN) Valve body without insulating section C ( F) Up to 350 C (660 F) with high-temperature packing Body with Insulating section C ( F) C ( F) C ( F) Bellows section C ( F) C ( F) C ( F) Valve plug 2) Standard Metal sealing C ( F) Soft sealing C ( F) Balanced PTFE ring C ( F) Graphite ring C ( F) Leakage class according to DIN EN 1349: 2000 / ANSI/FCI Valve plug Standard Metal sealing IV Soft sealing Lapped-in metal Balanced, metal sealing VI IV-S2 NPS 4 and larger: IV-S1 With PTFE ring: IV With graphite ring: III 1) Up to Class 2500 on request 2) Only when suitable body material is used Table 2 Materials (material numbers according to EN) Standard version Body and flanges 1) Carbon steel A 216 WCC Carbon steel A 217 WC6 Stainless carbon steel A 351 CF8M Seat and plug 2) Metal sealing / / Seal ring for Soft sealing PTFE with 15 % glass fiber Balanced plug PTFE with carbon Graphite Guide bushings Stuffing box packing V-ring packing of PTFE with carbon, spring of or high-temperature packing Body gasket Metal Insulating section 3) A 217 WC6/A 182 F12 A 351 CF8M/A 182 F316 Metal bellows seal Intermediate piece 3) A 217 WC6/A 182 F12 A 351 CF8M/A 182 F316 Metal bellows Heating jacket ) Also see pressure-temperature diagram (T EN) Material for cryogenic service: A 352 LCC 2) Also available: seats and plugs with metal sealing also stellited or plugs of solid Stellite 3) Depending on the valve bonnet material Data Sheet T 8066 EN

106 Table 3 Kvs coefficients Table 3a Overview with Flow Divider St I (Cv I/K vs I) or St III (Cv III/K vs III) Cv Kvs Cv I Kvs I Cv III Kvs III Seat mm Rated mm travel in Table 3b Versions without flow dividers Versions in highlighted fields also available with balanced valve plug Cv NPS DN Table 3c Versions with Flow Divider St I Versions in highlighted fields also available with balanced valve plug Cv I NPS DN Table 3d Versions with Flow Divider St III Versions in shaded areas also available with balanced valve plug Cv III NPS DN 2 * 50 * * NPS 2 version (DN 50) with Flow Divider St III not possible with bellows seal 104 Data Sheet T 8066 EN

107 Notes on differential pressure tables The differential pressure tables were prepared under the following conditions: Direction of flow: FTO Version with valve plug with metal sealing Version with PTFE packing Tables 4a and 4b for unbalanced valve plug with downstream pressure p 2 = 0 bar (psi) For the listed maximum differential pressures and the previously mentioned conditions, the leakage rate stated in Table 1 is not exceeded. All pressures in bar (gauge) and psi The stated differential pressures can be limited by the pressure-temperature diagram (see T EN). Overview: valve versions of the Δp tables Tables 4a and 4b: valve with unbalanced valve plug without metal bellows seal; fail-safe action "valve CLOSED" Tables 5a and 5b: valve with balanced valve plug with PTFE ring without metal bellows seal; fail-safe action "valve CLOSED" or "valve OPEN" Tables 6a and 6b: valve with unbalanced valve plug without metal bellows seal; fail-safe action "valve OPEN" Note on fail-safe action "valve CLOSED": Always use pretensioned spring ranges for actuators with reduced travels. Note! Permissible differential pressures are available on request for special versions with: Soft sealing or Lapped-in metal plug, Metal bellows seal or Balanced valve plug with graphite ring. Selection and sizing of the control valve 1. Calculate the appropriate K v coefficient according to IEC Select the nominal size and K vs coefficient according to Table Determine the permissible differential pressure Δp. Select the suitable actuator according to Tables 4a to Select materials, pressure and temperature according to Tables 1 and 2 and the pressure-temperature diagram (see T EN) 5. Select accessories according to Tables 1 and 2. Data Sheet T 8066 EN

108 Table 4a Permissible differential pressures Δp for valves with unbalanced plug with metal sealing, without metal bellows seal; fail-safe action "valve CLOSED" Pressures in bar Values specified in the fields highlighted in gray correspond to the standard bench range, i.e. applied at rated travel Values specified in the other fields apply to maximally pretensioned springs Values in parentheses apply to 50 % travel Table 4a Fail-safe action "valve CLOSED" (fail-close) Bench range (bar) with actuator 1400 ( ) (cm 2 ) x2800 ( ) ( ) ( ) Required supply pressure NPS Cv Actuator cm to to to 4 2 to 4 3 to 6 3 to 6 4 to to to 3 5 to ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) Upper spring range value bar Δp when p2 = 0 bar ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) (106) (217) (329) (252) (370) (400) (105) (217) (328) (252) (370) (400) (62.5) (129) (196) (150) (221) (250) (284) (41.2) (85.7) (130) (99.6) (147) (166) (188) (49.2) (100) (126) (129) (155) (30.6) (62.9) (79.1) (81.1) (97.3) (18.8) (38.8) (48.8) (50.1) (60.1) (11.9) (24.7) (31.1) (31.9) (38.3) (11.8) (24.6) (31) (31.8) (38.2) (15.7) (32.1) (40.3) (48.5) (24.9) (31.1) (37.2) (15.6) (32) (40.3) (48.5) (24.9) (31) (37.2) 2x2800 (31.2) (64) (80.6) (97) (49.8) (62) (74.4) (10.8) (22.2) (27.9) (33.6) (17.2) (21.5) (25.8) (10.7) (22.2) (27.9) (33.6) (17.2) (21.5) (25.7) 2x2800 (21.4) (44.4) (55.8) (67.2) (34.4) (43) (51.4) (6) (12.4) (15.6) (18.8) (9.6) (12) (14.4) 2x2800 (12) (24.8) (31.2) (37.6) (19.2) (24) (28.8) 106 Data Sheet T 8066 EN

109 Table 4b Permissible differential pressures Δp for valves with unbalanced plug with metal sealing, without metal bellows seal; fail-safe action "valve CLOSED" Pressures in psi Values specified in the fields highlighted in gray correspond to the standard bench range, i.e. applied at rated travel Values specified in the other fields apply to maximally pretensioned springs Values in parentheses apply to 50 % travel Table 4b Fail-safe action "valve CLOSED" (fail-close) Bench range (psi) with actuator (cm 2 ) x ( ) Required supply pressure NPS Cv Actuator cm to to to 4 2 to 4 3 to 6 3 to 6 4 to ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) Upper spring range value + 3 psi Δp when p2 = 0 psi ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) 0.12 to to to (1537) (3146) (4770) (3654) (5365) (5800) (1522) (3146) (4756) (3654) (5365) (5800) (906) (1870) (2842) (2175) (3204) (3625) (4118) (597) (1242) (1885) (1444) (2131) (2407) (2726) (713) (145) (1827) (1870) (2247) (443) (912) (1147) (1176) (1411) (272) (562) (707) (726) (871) (172) (358) (451) (462) (555) (171) (356) (449) (461) (554) (227) (465) (584) (703) (361) (451) (539) (226) (464) (584) (703) (361) (449) (539) 2x2800 (452) (928) (1168) (1406) (722) (899) (1079) (156) (322) (404) (487) (249) (312) (374) (155) (322) (404) (487) (249) (312) (372) 2x2800 (310) (644) (809) (974) (499) (623) (745) (87) (180) (226) (272) (139) (174) (209) 2x2800 (174) (359) (452) (545) (278) (348) (417) Data Sheet T 8066 EN

110 Table 5a Permissible differential pressures Δp for valves with balanced plug with metal sealing and PTFE ring, without metal bellows seal Pressures in bar Values specified in the fields highlighted in gray correspond to the standard bench range, i.e. applied at rated travel Values specified in the other fields apply to maximally pretensioned springs Values in parentheses apply to 50 % travel Fail-safe action "Valve CLOSED" (fail-close) "Valve OPEN" (fail-open) Bench range (bar) with actuator (cm 2 ) x ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) Required supply pressure Upper spring range value bar Actuator NPS Cv cm 2 Δp when p2 = 0 bar (400) (400) (400) (302) (381) (221) (400) (400) (400) (400) (298) (378) (218) (400) (400) (400) (400) (293) (373) (213) (400) (114) (145) (82.6) (207) (363) (400) (400) (400) (400) (236) (298) (361) (174) (400) 2x2800 (400) (400) (400) (348) (400) (400) (400) (400) (400) (234) (296) (359) (172) (400) 2x2800 (400) (400) (400) (344) (400) (230) (292) (354) (167) (400) 2x2800 (400) (400) (400) (334) (400) 108 Data Sheet T 8066 EN

111 Table 5b Permissible differential pressures Δp for valves with balanced plug with metal sealing and PTFE ring, without metal bellows seal Pressures in psi Values specified in the fields highlighted in gray correspond to the standard bench range, i.e. applied at rated travel Values specified in the other fields apply to maximally pretensioned springs Values in parentheses apply to 50 % travel Fail-safe action "Valve CLOSED" (fail-close) "Valve OPEN" (fail-open) Bench range (psi) with actuator (cm 2 ) x ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) Required supply pressure Upper spring range value + 3 psi Actuator NPS Cv cm 2 Δp when p2 = 0 psi (5800) (5800) (5800) (4379) (5524) (3204) (5800) (5800) (5800) (5800) (4321) (5481) (3161) (5800) (5800) (5800) (5800) (4248) (5409) (3088) (5800) (1653) (2102) (1197) (3001) (5263) (5800) (5800) (5800) (5800) (3422) (4321) (5234) (2523) (5800) 2x2800 (5800) (5800) (5800) (5046) (5800) (5800) (5800) (5800) (5800) (3393) (4292) (5205) (2494) (5800) 2x2800 (5800) (5800) (5800) (4988) (5800) (3335) (4234) (5133) (2421) (5800) 2x2800 (5800) (5800) (5800) (4843) (5800) Data Sheet T 8066 EN

112 Table 6 Permissible differential pressures Δp for valves with unbalanced plug with metal sealing, without metal bellows seal Fail-safe action "valve OPEN" Table 6a Pressures in bar Table 6b Pressures in psi 350 Bench range (bar/psi) with actuator (cm 2 ) x ( ) (3... 9) Required supply pressure NPS Cv Actuator cm 2 Δp when p2 = 0 bar Δp when p2 = 0 psi 1 2 to to to to 3 5 to (106) (245) (400) (1537) (3552) (5800) (105) (244) (400) (1522) (3538) (5800) (62.5) (146) (280) (400) (906) (2117) (4060) (5800) to 4 2 to 4 3 to 6 3 to 6 4 to (41) (97) (185) (297) (49) (113) (216) (344) (710) (1638) (3123) (30.4) (71) (135) (216) (441) (1023) (1957) (3132) (18.7) (43.7) (84) (134) (271) (633) (1218) (1943) (11.8) (27.8) (53.5) (85) (171) (403) (775) (1232) (11.6) (27.7) (53.3) (85) (168) (401) (773) (1232) (15.6) (36.2) (69) (110) (226) (525) (1000) (1595) (15.5) (36.1) (69) (110) (224) (523) (1000) (1595) 2x2800 (31) (72) (138) (220) (449) (1044) (2001) (3190) (10.8) (25) (47.8) (76.4) (156) (362) (693) (1108) (10.7) (25) (47.8) (76.3) (156) (362) (693) (1108) 2x2800 (21.4) (50) (95.6) (152) (310) (725) (1386) (2204) (5.9) (13.9) (26.8) (42.8) (85) (201) (388) (620) 2x2800 (11.8) (27.8) (53.6) (85.6) (171) (403) (777) (1241) 110 Data Sheet T 8066 EN

113 Table 7 Dimensions in mm for Type and Type Control Valve in standard version Valve NPS Length L H1for actuator Class 150 Class 300 Class 600 Class cm 2 Cl 150/600 Class cm 2 Cl 150/600 Class cm 2 Cl 150/600 Class cm 2 Cl 150/600 Class 900 mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in On request Actuator cm x 2800 Diaphragm mm in H 1) mm in H3 2) mm in Thread M 30 x 1.5 M 60 x 1.5 M 100 x 2 a (with Type 3271 Actuator) G 3 8 ( 3 8 NPT) G 3 4 ( 3 4 NPT) G 1 (1 NPT) a2 (with Type 3277 Actuator) G 3 8 ( 3 8 NPT) 1) Actuator 350 cm 2 without lifting ring 2) Minimum clearance to disassemble the actuator Data Sheet T 8066 EN

114 Table 8 Weights for Type and Type Control Valve in standard version Valve NPS Valve without actuator (approx.) Class 150/300 Class 600 Class 900 kg On On request lbs request kg On request lbs kg On request lbs On request Actuator cm x 2800 Type 3271 (approx. kg) 1) Without With handwheel Type 3277 (approx. kg) 1) Without With handwheel kg lbs kg lbs kg lbs kg lbs ) Top row without handwheel, bottom row with handwheel Only with side-mounted handwheel, see T EN ØD a H3 Pneumatic Actuators Type 3271 Type 3277 ØD a H3 H H 100 a2 H1 H1 L Type Type L L L H4 Type 3256 with heating jacket Dimensions on request a L Type 3256 with bellows seal or insulating section b c L a 112 Data Sheet T 8066 EN

115 Table 9 Dimensions and weights for Type 3256 Angle Valve in standard version with insulating section Without actuator Valve NPS Class H4 for actuator Class 900 H4 for actuator Weight without actuator for 350 cm 2 mm in cm 2 mm in cm 2 mm in cm 2 mm in cm 2 mm in cm 2 mm in cm 2 mm in cm 2 mm in Class 150/300 Class 600 Class 900 kg lbs On request kg lbs On On request kg request lbs On request Table 10 Dimensions and weights for Type 3256 Angle Valve in standard version with bellows seal Without actuator Valve NPS cm 2 mm in Class cm 2 mm in H cm 2 mm On for actuator in request 2800 cm 2 mm in cm 2 mm in Class 300/ cm 2 mm in H cm 2 mm for actuator in cm 2 mm in cm 2 mm in On request Class cm 2 mm in H cm 2 mm for actuator On request in On request 2800 cm 2 mm in Class kg /300 lbs On request Weight Class 600 kg without actuator for lbs On request Class 900 kg On request lbs Data Sheet T 8066 EN

116 The following details are required on ordering Nominal size NPS... Nominal pressure ANSI Class... Body material According to Table 2 Connection Flanges/welding ends Plug Standard/balanced Soft sealing, metal sealing or lapped-in metal Characteristic Equal percentage or linear Actuator Type 3271 or Type 3277 (see T EN or T EN) Fail-safe action Valve CLOSED or valve OPEN Process medium Density in lb/cu.ft or kg/m 3 and temperature in C ( F) Flow rate lbs/h or kg/h or cu.ft/min or m 3 /h in standard or operating conditions Pressure p 1 and p 2 in bar (psi) (absolute pressure p abs) with minimum, standard and maximum flow rate Accessories Positioner and/or limit switches Specifications subject to change without notice. 114 Data Sheet T 8066 EN

117 Pneumatic Control Valve Type and Type High Pressure Valve Type 3252 Application Control valve used to control very low flow rates in process engineering Valve sizes G ½ to G 1 ½ NPT to 1 NPT DN 15 to 25 NPS ½ to 1 Pressure rating PN 40 to 400 Class 300 to 2500 Temperatures 200 to 450 C 328 to 842 F Type 3252 High Pressure Valve with globe-style or angle-style valve body with: Type 3271 Pneumatic Actuator (Type Control Valve) or Type 3277 Pneumatic Actuator (Type Control Valve) Valve body Material /A 316 L G or NPT threaded connection, optionally welding ends or weld-on flanges Valve plug With metal sealing The control valves have a modular-assembly design and can be equipped with various accessories as follows: Positioners, limit switches, solenoid valves and other equipment for attachment according to IEC and NAMUR recommendation. For more details, refer to Information Sheet T 8350 EN. Versions Standard version designed as globe-style or angle-style valve body with V-ring PTFE packing suitable for temperatures from 10 to 220 C (15 to 430 F) Nominal pressure PN 40 to PN 400, Class 300 to 2500 Female thread G ½, G ¾,G1or½NPT, ¾ NPT, 1 NPT Body material /A 316 L Type Valve with Type Pneumatic Actuator (120 cm²) or Type 3271 Pneumatic Actuator (350 cm²) Type Valve (Fig. 1) with Type Pneumatic Actuator (120 cm²) or with Type 3277 Pneumatic Actuator (350 cm²) for integral positioner attachment. Additional versions available with Welding ends DN 15, 20, 25 or NPS ½, ¾, 1 Flanges DN 15, 20, 25 or NPS ½, ¾, 1 Male thread On request Insulating section For temperatures from 200 to 450 C ( 328 to 842 F) Bellows seal For PN 40 to PN 400 or Class 150 to 2500 Special valve body materials On request Adjustable packing Heating jacket Details on request Fig. 1 Type High Pressure Valve with Type 3767 Electropneumatic Positioner Data Sheet T 8053 EN

118 Principle of operation The process medium flows through the valve in the direction indicated by the arrow. The position of the plug determines the cross-sectional area of flow between the seat and the plug. The plug stem is connected to the actuator stem by a stem connector and sealed with a self-adjusting packing. In case stricter emissions requirements are specified, the valve can be equipped with a multiple-walled metal bellows. Fail-safe position Depending on how the compression springs are arranged in the actuator (see Data Sheet T EN for details), the control valve has two different fail-safe positions in case the supply air fails: Actuator stem extends (FA) Whenever the supply air fails, the valve closes. Actuator stem retracts (FE) Whenever the supply air fails, the valve opens. Fig. 3 Type 3252 High Pressure Valve as angle-style valve with welding ends Fig. 2 Type 3252 High Pressure Valve as globe-style valve with welding ends Fig. 4 Type High Pressure Valve with insulating section or bellows seal 116 Data Sheet T 8053 EN

119 Table 1 Technical data for Type 3252 Connection Female thread Welding ends Weld-on flanges Nominal sizes G ½, G ¾, G 1 ½ NPT, ¾ NPT, 1 NPT DIN 15, 20, 25 NPS ½, ¾, 1 DIN 15, 20, 25 NPS ½, ¾, 1 Nominal pressures PN or Class Seat/plug sealing Metal sealing or lapped-in metal, Soft sealing for K VS 0.1 and larger up to an operating pressure of 50 bar Characteristic Equal percentage Linear Quick opening Rangeability 50 : 1 Temperature ranges Body without insulating section Body with Insul. section short long Bellows seal C ( F) C ( F) C ( F) C ( F) Leakage class acc. to DIN EN 1349 Metal sealing: IV Lapped-in metal: IV-S2 Soft sealing: VI Table 2 Materials Standard version Valve body Valve bonnet (wetted parts) Seat and plug Packing Body gasket Insulating section Metal bellows seal Intermediate piece Metal bellows / A 316 L Other materials on request / A 316 L / A 316 L (stellited seats as well as plugs made of solid Stellite available) V-ring packing PTFE with carbon / A 316 L / A 316 L / A 316 L / A 316 Ti Table 3 Available K VS and C V coefficients Table 3a Overview K VS C V Seat Travel 7.5 Plug stem 10 Table 3b Nominal sizes and associated K VS and C V coefficients K VS C V DN NPS 15 ½ 20 ¾ 25 1 Data Sheet T 8053 EN

120 Table 4 Permissible differential pressures for versions without bellows seal Pressures in bar Table 4a Fail-safe position Valve CLOSED Bench range Operating range 120 cm² with 7.5 mm travel and actuator size 350 cm² Required supply pressure bar Valve size K VS Actuator in cm² Δp when p 2 = 0 bar DN 15 to 25 NPS ½ to to Table 4b Fail-safe position Valve OPEN Bench range Operating range 120 cm² with 7.5 mm travel and actuator size 350 cm² Required supply pressure bar Valve size K VS Actuator in cm² Δp when p 2 = 0 bar DN 15 to to Table 5 Permissible differential pressures for versions with bellows seal Pressures in bar Table 5a Fail-safe position Valve CLOSED Bench range 120/350 cm² Operating range 120 cm² with 7.5 mm travel and actuator size cm² Bench range 700 cm² Operating range 700 cm² with 7.5 mm travel and actuator size Required supply pressure bar Valve size K VS Actuator in cm² Δp when p 2 = 0 bar DN 15 to to Data Sheet T 8053 EN

121 Table 5b Fail-safe position Valve OPEN Bench range Operating range 120 cm² with 7.5 mm travel and actuator size 350 cm² cm² Required supply pressure bar Valve size K VS Actuator in cm² Δp when p 2 = 0 bar DN 15 to to Table 6 Dimensions and weights for Type 3252 High Pressure Valve with globe-style valve body Valve Length L with female thread Length L with welding ends Length L with flanges Size DIN ANSI DN NPS ½ ¾ 1 PN PN (PN 40 only) 130 Cl Cl PN Cl PN 63 Cl PN Cl. 900/ Cl B PN Cl H H Weights in kg for globe valve including yoke With female thread PN Cl On request With welding ends 6.5 With flanges PN Cl Data Sheet T 8053 EN

122 Table 7 Dimensions and weights for Type 3252 High Pressure Valve with angle-style valve body Valve Length L with female thread Length L with welding ends Length L with flanges Size DIN ANSI DN NPS ½ ¾ 1 PN PN (PN 40 only) 57 Cl Cl PN Cl ) 97 1) 98 1) PN PN Cl ) 103 1) 105 1) Cl. 900/ Cl B PN Cl H Weights in kg for angle valve including yoke With female thread PN Cl. 300 With welding ends On request With flanges PN Cl ) Special length Table 8 Dimensions in mm for versions with insulating section or bellows seal Globe-style valve DN NPS ½ ¾ 1 H4 with insulating section PN Cl H4 with bellows seal PN Cl PN Cl PN Cl Angle-style valve DN NPS ½ ¾ 1 H4 with insulating section PN Cl H4 with bellows seal PN Cl PN Cl PN Cl Weights DN NPS ½ ¾ 1 Bellows seal, additional weight in kg PN 40/ PN PN Cl On request 120 Data Sheet T 8053 EN

123 Table 9 Dimensions and weights for actuators Actuator cm² Diaphragm D H (700 cm² and larger with lifting ring) H3 1) (Type 3271 and Type 3277 Actuator) Thread M30 x 1.5 a (for Type 3271 Actuator) G 1 8 ( 1 8 NPT) G 3 8 ( 3 8 NPT) G 3 8 ( 3 8 NPT) a2 (for Type 3277 Actuator) G 3 8 ( 3 8 NPT) G 3 8 ( 3 8 NPT) Weight of Type 3271Actuator W/o handwh (approx. kg) With handwh Weight of Type 3277Actuator W/o handwh (approx. kg) With handwh Dimensions for Type 3252 High Pressure Valve with globe-style and angle-style body ØD H3 H ØD H3 H a2 100 H4 H1 DN DN H1 DNH1 DN H2 H2 H2 H2 L Female thread L Welding ends L Flanges L Type with insulating section or bellows seal B DN H1 DN H1 DN H1 47 L1 L1 47 L1 L1 L1 47 L1 Data Sheet T 8053 EN

124 Ordering text Type 3252 Valve Valve size Pressure rating Type of connection Characteristic Direction of flow Globe- or angle-style valve body DN.../NPS PN.../Class Female thread G or NPT/ welding ends or flanges Equal percentage or linear FTO or FTC Pneumatic actuator Type 3271 or Type 3277 see T EN Fail-safe position Valve CLOSED or valve OPEN Process medium Density in kg/m³ and temperature in C Max. flow rate in kg/h or m³/h Pressure p 1 in bar (absolute pressure p abs ) p 2 in bar (absolute pressure p abs ) Accessories Positioner and/or limit switch Specifications subject to change without notice. 122 Data Sheet T 8053 EN

125 Series 250 Pneumatic Control Valve Type and Angle Valve Type 3259 Application Control valve for industrial high pressure plants according to the IG standard Nominal sizes DN 16 to DN 90 Nominal pressure PN 325 Temperature range 200 to 450 C Type 3259 Angle Valve optionally operated with: Type 3271 Pneumatic Actuator as Type Control Valve or Type 3277 Pneumatic Actuator as Type Control Valve for integral positioner attachment. The valve body is made of forged stainless steel. The end connections are screwed flanges with lens ring gaskets. Valve plug optionally with: Metal sealing or Lapped-in metal. The control valves, designed according to the modular assembly principle, can be equipped with various accessories: Positioners, limit switches, solenoid valves and other equipment according to IEC and NAMUR recommendation (see Information Sheet T 8350 EN for details). Versions Standard version with spring-loaded double packing for temperatures between 10 and 220 C; nominal sizes DN 16, 24, 30, 45, 58, 70 and 90; nominal pressure PN 325. Body of with intermediate flanges made of , end connections with screwed flanges and lens ring gaskets. Type Type 3259 Valve and Type 3271 Actuator with 350 to 2800 cm 2 effective area (see T EN and T EN) Type Type 3259 Valve and Type 3277 Actuator with 350 and 700 cm 2 effective area for the integral positioner attachment (see T EN) Additional versions with Adjustable high-temperature packing For temperatures from 10 to 350 C Insulating section For temperatures from 200 to 450 C (see pressure-temperature diagram for pressures and temperatures) Heating jacket Available on request Metal bellows seal Material with additional backup packing and test connection Nominal size DN 120 Available on request Nominal sizes DN 6 and DN 10 As Type 3510 Microflow Valve version Fig. 1 Type Control Valve, DN 70, PN 325 according to the IG standard, pneumatic actuator with 2800 cm 2 effective diaphragm area Data Sheet T 8059 EN

126 Principle of operation The medium flows through the valve in the flow-to-open direction. The position of the valve plug determines the cross-sectional area of flow between the valve seat and plug. The plug stem is sealed with a spring-loaded double PTFE packing. A metal bellows seal (Fig. 3) can be used for higher requirements. A test connection is available on request for both versions. The actuators are designed for pressure from both sides (see Tables 4b and 5b). Fail-safe position Depending on how the compression springs are arranged in the actuator (see Data Sheets T EN and T EN for further details), the control valve offers two different fail-safe positions effective upon air supply failure: Actuator stem "extends": When the air supply fails, the valve is closed (fail-close). Actuator stem "retracts": When the air supply fails, the valve is opened (fail-open) Fig. 2 Type 3259 Valve as standard version Test connection Legend to Fig Connecting flange 4.1 Spring 4.2 PTFE V-ring packing (double) 5 Bonnet 5.1 Guide bushing 5.5 Intermediate flange 23 Lens ring gasket p [bar] t [ C] Fig. 4 Pressure-Temperature Diagram for Fig. 3 Type 3259 Valve with metal bellows seal and test connection 124 Data Sheet T 8059 EN

127 Table 1 Technical data Nominal size DN Nominal pressure PN 325 End connection Screwed flanges with lens ring gaskets according to the IG standard Seat/plug sealing Metal sealing or lapped-in metal Characteristic Equal percentage or linear Rangeability 50 : 1 with Kvs 1 30 : 1 with Kvs < 1 Temperature ranges in C Permissible operating pressures according to Pressure-Temperature Diagram Body PTFE packing C without insul. section HT packing C Body with Insulating section C Bellows seal C Leakage rate acc. to DIN EN 1349 Valve plug Metal sealing IV Lapped-in metal IV-S2 Table 2 Materials Standard version Body / Flanges Bolts Seat and plug Seat: stellited Plug: Stellite hardened Guide bushings / Stuffing box packing V-ring packing PTFE carbon compound Body gasket Lens ring gaskets / Insulating section / Metal bellows seal Intermediate piece / Metal bellows Table 3 K vs coefficients Table 3a Overview Kvs Seat Travel Table 3b Versions Kvs DN Data Sheet T 8059 EN

128 Table 4a Actuator sizing for Type 3259 Valve without bellows seal; fail-safe position "actuator stem extends" (fail-close) DN Kvs Actuator/cm 2 Bench range in bar applicable when Δp=50 bar Δp=100 bar Δp=200 bar Δp=325 bar to to to to to to x x Table 4b Actuator sizing for Type 3259 Valve without bellows seal; fail-safe position "actuator stem retracts" (fail-open) DN Kvs Actuator/cm 2 Bench range Required supply pressure in bar applicable when Δp=50 bar Δp=100 bar Δp=200 bar Δp=325 bar to to to to to to x x Data Sheet T 8059 EN

129 Table 5a Actuator sizing for Type 3259 Valve with bellows seal; fail-safe position "actuator stem extends" (fail-close) DN Kvs Actuator/cm 2 Bench range applicable when Δp=50 bar Δp=100 bar Δp=200 bar Δp=325 bar to to to to to to x x Table 5b Actuator sizing for Type 3259 Valve with bellows seal; fail-safe position "actuator stem retracts" (fail-open) DN Kvs Actuator/cm 2 Required supply pressure in bar applicable when Bench range Δp=50 bar Δp=100 bar Δp=200 bar Δp=325 bar to to to to to to x Data Sheet T 8059 EN

130 Table 6 Dimensions in mm for Type and Type as standard version Valve DN Length L H1 for actuator with 350 cm cm cm cm x2800 cm Actuator cm x 2800 Diaphragm D H 1) H3 2) Thread M 30 x 1.5 M 60 x 1.5 M 100 x 2 a (with Type 3271 Actuator) G 3 8 ( 3 8 NPT) G 3 4 ( 3 4 NPT) G 1 (1 NPT) a2 (with Type 3277 Actuator) G 3 8 ( 3 8 NPT) 1) Actuator 350 cm 2 2) without lifting ring Minimum clearance for actuator disassembly Table 7 Weights for Type and Type as standard version Valve DN Valve without actuator (approx. kg) ) 90 1) 220 1) 230 1) 1) The weight increases by 30 kg with an actuator with 2800 cm 2 or 2x2800 cm 2 without Actuator cm x 2800 Type (approx. kg) 1) with handwheel Only with side-mounted handwheel, see T EN Type 3277 without (approx. kg) 1) with handwheel ) Top row without handwheel, bottom row with handwheel Table 8a Dimensions and weights for Type 3259 as standard version with insulating section Without actuator Nominal size DN cm cm Height H4 for actuator with 1400 cm cm x2800 cm Weight without actuator kg ) 105 1) 295 1) 305 1) 1) The weight increases by 30 kg with an actuator with 2800 cm 2 or 2x2800 cm 2 Table 8b Dimensions and weights for Type 3259 as standard version with bellows seal Without actuator Nominal size DN cm cm Height H4 for actuator with 1400 cm cm x2800 cm Weight without actuator kg ) 105 1) 357 1) 365 1) 1) The weight increases by 30 kg with an actuator with 2800 cm 2 or 2x2800 cm Data Sheet T 8059 EN

131 Dimensional diagrams ØD H3 H ØD H3 ØD H3 H ØD H3 H H 100 H4 H4 H1 H1 L L L L L L L L Type Type Type with insulating section Type with bellows seal Selection and sizing of the control valve 1. Calculate the K v coefficient according to IEC Select the nominal size DN and K vs coefficient according to Tables 3 to Determine the permissible differential pressure Δp according Tables 4 and Accessories according to Tables 1 and 2. The following details are required on ordering Nominal size DN... Direction of flow FTO or FTC Plug Metal sealing or lapped-in metal Characteristic Equal percentage or linear Actuator Type 3271 or Type 3277 (see T EN or T EN) Fail-safe action Valve CLOSED or valve OPEN Process medium Density in kg/m 3 and temperature in C Flow rate kg/h or m 3 /h in standard or operating condition Pressure p 1 and p 2 in bar (absolute pressure p abs) both with minimum, standard and maximum flow Accessories Positioner and/or limit switches Specifications subject to change without notice. Data Sheet T 8059 EN

132

133 Pneumatic Control Valve Type and Type Micro-flow Valve Type 3510 Application Control valve especially designed for controlling low flow rates in pilot plants and technical research facilities Nominal sizes G ¼ G 3 8 G ½ ¼ NPT 3 8 NPT ½ NPT DN 10 DN 15 DN 25 Nominal pressure PN 40 to PN 400 Temperatures 200 to +450 C The pneumatic control valve essentially consists of: Type 3510 Micro-flow Valve and Type Actuator or optionally Type Actuator. The Type 3510 Micro-flow Valves are available either as: Globe valves or Angle valves. Their valve bodies have either: G or NPT screwed connections, Welding ends or flanges. Stainless steel is used as the standard body material. However, a wide variety of special materials can also be used on customer request. Versions Standard version For temperatures ranging from 10 to +220 C PN 40 to 400 Globe or angle valve Female thread G ¼, G 3 8, G ½ or ¼ NPT, 3 8 NPT, ½ NPT Flanges DN 10, 15 or 25 Welding ends DN 10, 15 or 25 Type (Fig. 3) With Type Pneumatic Actuator, 120 cm² effective area or Type with 60 cm² effective area (see Data Sheet T EN) Type (Figs. 1 and 2) With Type Pneumatic Actuator, 120 cm² effective area designed for integral positioner attachment (see Data Sheet T EN). Other versions with Insulating section for temperatures from 200 to +450 C, made of special material up to +650 C Metal bellows seal up to PN 100 with a sealing performance of 10 5 mbar l s, higher pressure ratings on request Handwheel Electric actuator On request Body connections with threaded flanges and lens ring gaskets in nominal sizes DN 6 and DN 10, nominal pressure PN 325 acc. to IG standard (K VSmax = 0.4) Fig. 1 Type Control Valve with Type 3760 Positioner Fig. 3 Type Control Valve with Type Actuator Fig. 2 Type Control Valve with Type 3767 Positioner Data Sheet T 8091 EN

134 Principle of operation The process medium flows through the micro-flow control valve in the direction indicated by the arrow. The position of the valve plug (3) determines the cross-sectional area of flow between the seat (2) and the plug. The plug stem (6) is connected to the actuator stem (8.1) via the stem connector (7) and sealed with an adjustable packing (4). To comply with stricter environmental emissions requirements, the valve can be equipped with a double-walled metal bellows (10). The anti-rotation device (13) prevents loosening of the screw connection between the valve body (1) and the bonnet (5) or the intermediate piece (9). Fail-safe position Depending on how the springs are arranged in the actuator (8) (see Data Sheet T EN for details), the control valve has two different fail-safe positions: Actuator stem extends (FA) The valve is closed upon air supply failure. Actuator stem retracts (FE) The valve is opened upon air supply failure. Fig. 4 Type Control Valve Fig. 5 Type 3510 Valve, angle valve with insulating section and Type Actuator (60 cm²) Fig. 6 Type 3510 Valve, globe valve with metal bellows seal 132 Data Sheet T 8091 EN

135 Table 1 Technical data for Type 3510 Connection Female thread Welding ends Flanges Nominal size G ¼ G 3 8 G ½ ¼ NPT 3 8 NPT ½ NPT DN 10 DN 15 DN 25 DN 10 DN 15 DN 25 Nominal pressure PN 40 to PN 400 Seat-plug seal Metal sealing Characteristic Equal percentage with K VS 0.01 Linear Quick opening Rangeability 50 : 1 Lower than 50 : 1 for K VS < 0.1 Temperature range 10 to 220 C 200 to 450 C with insulating section Leakage rate Metal sealing IV acc. to DIN EN 1349 Lapped-in metal IV-S2 For K VS < 0.01: Metal sealing III Lapped-in metal IV Table 2 Materials Valve body 1) and bonnet 2) / A 316 Ti Seat and plug / / / Stellite / Packing PTFE compound Body gasket Insulating section Metal bellows seal Intermediate piece Metal bellows for PN 100 3) ) Other materials on request 2) Wetted parts 3) For higher nominal pressures on request Legends for Figs. 4 to 6 1 Valve body 2 Seat 3 Plug 4 Packing 5 Valve bonnet 5.1 Body gasket 6 Plug stem 7 Stem connector 8 Actuator 8.1 Actuator stem 9 Intermediate piece for insulating section or bellows seal 10 Metal bellows 13 Anti-rotation device Data Sheet T 8091 EN

136 Table 3 Available K VS coefficients Table 3a Overview K VS to ) 0.01 to to 1.6 2) Rangeability < 15 : 1 15 : 1 to 50 : 1 50 : 1 Seat Ø mm Plug stem Ø mm 4 4 Travel mm ) Seat and plug made only of /Stellite 2) Only up to PN 100. Table 3b K VS coefficients and associated nominal sizes End connections Female thread Welding ends Flanges Flow rate K VS Characteristic Equal percentage Linear G NPT G NPT G NPT DN 10 DN 15 DN 25 DN 10 DN 15 DN ) 1.0 1) 1.6 1) 1) Versions up to max. PN 100 can be used. 134 Data Sheet T 8091 EN

137 Table 4 Permissible differential pressures Pressures in bar (gauge) Table 4a Standard version without bellows seal Fail-safe position Valve CLOSED Bench range 60 cm² for actuator size 120 cm² Nominal size K VS Actuator Δp when p 2 = 0 bar G ¼ G 3 8 G ½ cm² ¼ NPT 8 NPT ½ NPT to DN 10 DN 15 DN cm² G ½ ½ NPT DN 15 DN to cm² cm² Table 4b Standard version with bellows seal Fail-safe position Valve CLOSED Bench range 60 cm² for actuator size 120 cm² Nominal size K VS Actuator Δp when p 2 = 0 bar G ¼ G 3 8 G ½ cm² ¼ NPT 8 NPT ½ NPT to DN 10 DN 15 DN cm² G ½ ½ NPT DN 15 DN to cm² cm² Table 4c Standard version without bellows seal Fail-safe position Valve OPEN Bench range 60 cm² for actuator size 120 cm² Supply pressure Nominal size K VS Actuator Δp when p 2 = 0 bar G ¼ G 3 8 G ½ cm² ¼ NPT 8 NPT ½ NPT to DN 10 DN 15 DN cm² G ½ ½ NPT DN 15 DN to cm² cm² Table 4d Standard version with bellows seal Fail-safe position Valve OPEN Bench range 60 cm² for actuator size 120 cm² Supply pressure Nominal size K VS Actuator Δp when p 2 = 0 bar G ¼ G 3 8 G ½ cm² ¼ NPT 8 NPT ½ NPT to DN 10 DN 15 DN cm² G ½ ½ NPT DN 15 DN to cm² cm² Data Sheet T 8091 EN

138 Table 5 Dimensions in mm End connections Female thread Welding ends Flanges Valve G/NPT DN 10, 15, 25 DN 10 DN 15 DN 25 L PN PN 63 to PN 250 to PN H1 60/120 cm² 122 H4 with ins. section PN 40 to H4 with bellows PN 40 to seal PN 160 to H2 or PN flange Ø D1 PN 63 to PN 250 to PN H3 60/120 cm² 150 L1 PN PN 63 to PN 250 to PN Actuator 60 cm² 120 cm² Diaphragm Ø D H H Thread M20 x 1.5 M20 x 1.5 Supply pressure connection G 1 8 or 1 8 NPT G 1 8 or 1 8 NPT Table 6 Weights in kg End connections Female thread Welding ends Flanges Valve G / NPT DN 10, 15, 25 DN 10 DN 15 DN 25 Valve without PN actuator PN 63 to PN 250 to PN Optional Insulating section 0.5 Bellows seal 0.6 Actuator 60 cm² 120 cm² Approx. kg Data Sheet T 8091 EN

139 Dimensions in mm ØD H3 ØD H3 H H ØD L L H1 H4 ØD1 L1 57 L1 L1 L1 L1 SW50 SW46 L H2 L1 Type angle valve with female thread Type globe valve with female thread - with bellows seal/ insulating section Type valve versions with flanges and welding ends Ordering text Micro-flow Valve Type 3510 Globe or angle valve Nominal size DN... Nominal pressure PN Valve body material According to Table 2 End connections Female thread G, NPT flanges or welding ends Direction of flow FTO or FTC Characteristic Equal percentage, linear, or quick-opening Pneumatic actuator Type /Type or 120 cm 2 Fail-safe position Valve CLOSED or OPEN Process medium Density kg/m 3 Maximum flow rate... kg/h or m 3 /h in in standard or operating state Pressure p 1 and p 2 in bar (absolute pressure) Process medium temperature C or K Accessories Positioner and/or limit switch Specifications subject to change without notice. Data Sheet T 8091 EN

140

141 Pneumatic Control Valve Type and Type Micro-flow Valve Type 3510 ANSI version Application Control valve designed for controlling low flow rates in pilot plants and technical research facilities. Valve sizes G ¼, G 3 8, G ½ ¼ NPT, 3 8 NPT, ½ NPT R C ¼, 3 8, ½ NPS ½, ¾, 1 Pressure rating ANSI Class 150 to Class 2500 Temperatures 200 to +450 C 328 to 842 F The pneumatic control valve consists of: Type 3510 Micro-flow Valve and a Type or optionally Type Actuator Type 3510 Micro-flow Valves are available either as: Globe valves Angle valves Their valve bodies are available with: G, NPT, or R C screwed connections Welding ends or flanges Stainless steel is used as the standard body material. However, a variety of special materials can also be used according to customer requirements. Versions Standard version For temperatures from 10 to +220 C (14 to 428 F) ANSI Class 150 to 2500 Globe valve or angle valve Female thread G ¼, G 3 8, G ½ or ¼ NPT, 3 8 NPT, ½ NPT Flanges NPS ½, ¾, 1, Class 150 to 2500 Welding ends NPS ½ and 1 Type (Fig. 3) With Type Pneumatic Actuator, 120 cm 2 effective diaphragm area or Type Pneumatic Actuator, 60 cm² effective diaphragm area (see Data Sheet T EN) Type (Figs. 1 and 2) With Type Pneumatic Actuator with 120 cm² effective diaphragm area, for integral positioner attachment (see Data Sheet T EN) Other versions with Insulating section for temperatures from 200 to +450 C ( 328 to 842 F), with special material up to +650 C (1200 F) Metal bellows seal up to Class 600 with a sealing performance 10 5 mbar l s, higher pressure ratings on request Handwheel Electric actuator On request Fig. 1 Type Control Valve with Type 3760 Positioner Fig. 3 Type Control Valve with Type Actuator Fig. 2 Type Control Valve with Type 3767 Positioner Data Sheet T EN

142 Principle of operation The process medium flows through the micro-flow control valve in the direction indicated by the arrow. The position of the valve plug (3) determines the cross-sectional area of flow between the seat (2) and the plug. The plug stem (6) is connected to the actuator stem (8.1) by the stem connector (7) and sealed with an adjustable packing (4). To comply with stricter environmental emissions requirements, the valve can be equipped with a double-walled metal bellows (10). The anti-rotation device (13) prevents loosening of the screw connection between the valve body (1) and the bonnet (5) or the intermediate piece (9). Fail-safe position Depending on the arrangement of the compression springs in the actuator (8) (see Data Sheet T EN for details), the control valve has two different fail-safe positions effective upon air supply failure: Actuator stem extends (FA) The valve is closed upon air supply failure. Actuator stem retracts (FE) The valve is opened upon air supply failure. Fig. 4 Type Control Valve Fig. 5 Type 3510 Valve, angle valve with insulating section and Type Actuator (60 cm 2 ) Fig. 6 Type 3510 Valve, globe valve with metal bellows seal 140 Data Sheet T EN

143 Table 1 Technical data for Type 3510 Connection Female thread Welding ends Flanges Valve size G ¼ G 3 8 G ½ ¼ NPT, 3 8 NPT, ½ NPT R C ¼, 3 8, ½ NPS ½ NPS 1 NPS ½ NPS ¾ NPS 1 Pressure rating Class 150 to 2500 Seat/plug sealing Metal sealing Characteristic Equal percentage with C V Linear Quick opening Rangeability 50 : 1 Smaller than 50 : 1 with C V 0.12 Temperature range 10 to 220 C With insulating section 200 to 450 C Leakage rate Metal sealing IV acc. to DIN EN 1349 Lapped-in metal IV-S2 With C V 0.012: Metal sealing III Lapped-in metal IV Table 2 Materials Valve body 1) and bonnet 2) A 316 Ti (UNS: S31635) (UNS: N 06455) Seat and plug / / / Stellite / Stuffing box packing PTFE compound Body gasket Insulating section A 316 Ti Metal bellows seal Intermediate piece A 316 Ti Metal bellows for Cl ) ) Other materials available on request 2) Wetted parts 3) For higher pressure ratings on request Legend for Figs. 4 to 6 1 Valve body 2 Seat 3 Plug 4 Stuffing box packing 5 Valve bonnet 5.1 Body gasket 6 Plug stem 7 Stem connector 8 Actuator 8.1 Actuator stem 9 Intermediate piece for insulating section or bellows seal 10 Metal bellows 13 Anti-rotation device Data Sheet T EN

144 Table 3 Available C V coefficients Table 3a Overview C V to ) to to 2.0 2) Rangeability < 15 : 1 15 : 1 to 50 : 1 50 : 1 Seat Ø mm Plug stem Ø mm 4 4 Travel mm ) Seat and plug material in /Stellite only 2) Only up to Class 600 Table 3b K VS coefficients and associated valve sizes End connection Female thread Welding ends Flanges Flow coefficient C V Characteristic Equal percentage Linear G ¼ ¼ NPT R C ¼ G NPT R C 3 8 G ½ ½ NPT R C ½ NPS ½ NPS 1 NPS ½ NPS ¾ NPS ) 1.2 1) 2.0 1) 1) Versions up to max. Class 600 can be used. 142 Data Sheet T EN

145 Table 4 Permissible differential pressures Pressures in bar (gauge) Table 4a Standard version without bellows seal Fail-safe position Valve CLOSED Bench range 60 cm² with actuator size 120 cm² Valve size C V Actuator Δp when p 2 = 0 bar NPS ½, ¾, 1 G ¼ G 3 8 G ½ NPT/R C ¼, 3 8, ½ NPS ¾, 1 G ½ NPT/R C ½ 1) Only up to Class to to 2.0 1) 60 cm cm cm cm Table 4b Version with bellows seal Fail-safe position Valve CLOSED Bench range 60 cm² with actuator size 120 cm² Valve size C V Actuator Δp when p 2 = 0 bar NPS ½, ¾, 1 G ¼ G 3 8 G ½ NPT/R C ¼, 3 8, ½ NPS ¾, 1 G ½ NPT/R C ½ 1) Only up to Class to to 2.0 1) 60 cm cm cm cm Table 4c Standard version without bellows seal Fail-safe position Valve OPEN Bench range 60 cm² with actuator size 120 cm² Supply pressure Valve size C V Actuator Δp when p 2 = 0 bar NPS ½, ¾, 1 G ¼ G 3 8 G ½ NPT/R C ¼, 3 8, ½ NPS ¾, 1 G ½ NPT/R C ½ 1) Only up to Class to to 2.0 1) 60 cm cm cm cm Table 4d Version with bellows seal Fail-safe position Valve OPEN Bench range 60 cm² with actuator size 120 cm² Supply pressure Valve size C V Actuator Δp when p 2 = 0 bar NPS ½, ¾, 1 G ¼ G 3 8 G ½ NPT/R C ¼, 3 8, ½ NPS ¾, 1 G ½ NPT/R C ½ 1) Only up to Class to to 2.0 1) 60 cm cm cm cm Data Sheet T EN

146 Table 5 Permissible differential pressures Pressures in psi (gauge) Table 5a Standard version without bellows seal Fail-safe position Valve CLOSED Bench range 60 cm² with actuator size 120 cm² Valve size C V Actuator Δp when p 2 = 0 psi NPS ½, ¾, 1 G ¼ G 3 8 G ½ NPT/R C ¼, 3 8, ½ NPS ¾, 1 G ½ NPT/R C ½ 1) Only up to Class to to 2.0 1) 60 cm cm cm cm Table 5b Version with bellows seal Fail-safe position Valve CLOSED Bench range 60 cm² with actuator size 120 cm² Valve size C V Actuator Δp when p 2 = 0 psi NPS ½, ¾, 1 G ¼ G 3 8 G ½ NPT/R C ¼, 3 8, ½ NPS ¾, 1 G ½ NPT/R C ½ 1) Only up to Class to to 2.0 1) 60 cm cm cm cm Table 5c Standard version without bellows seal Fail-safe position Valve OPEN Bench range 60 cm² 3 15 with actuator size 120 cm² 6 12 Supply pressure Valve size C V Actuator Δp when p 2 = 0 psi NPS ½, ¾, 1 G ¼ G 3 8 G ½ NPT/R C ¼, 3 8, ½ NPS ¾, 1 G ½ NPT/R C ½ 1) Only up to Class to to 2.0 1) 60 cm cm cm cm Table 5d Version with bellows seal Fail-safe position Valve OPEN Bench range 60 cm² 3 15 with actuator size 120 cm² 6 12 Supply pressure Valve size C V Actuator Δp when p 2 = 0 psi NPS ½, ¾, 1 G ¼ G 3 8 G ½ NPT/R C ¼, 3 8, ½ NPS ¾, 1 G ½ NPT/R C ½ 1) Only up to Class to to 2.0 1) 60 cm cm cm cm Data Sheet T EN

147 Table 6 Dimensions Valve Connection Female thread Welding ends Flanges L Class 150 Class 300 Class 600 Class 900/1500 G/NPT/R C ¼, 3 8, ½ NPS ½, 1 NPS ½ NPS ¾ NPS 1 mm in mm in mm 74 mm 80 mm in mm in Class 2500 mm in H1 60/120 cm mm / 4.80 H4 H2 or Flange Ø D1 Insulating section Up to Cl mm / Bellows seal Class 150 Class 300 Class 600 Class 900/1500 Up to Cl mm / Class mm / mm in mm in mm 23 mm 23mm in mm in Class 2500 mm in H3 60/120 cm mm / 5.90 L1 Class 150 mm in Class 300 mm in Class 600 mm 34 mm 40 mm in Class 900/1500 mm in Class 2500 mm in Actuator 60 cm² 120 cm² Diaphragm Ø D 120 mm / mm / 6.6 H 63 mm / mm / 2.71 H3 150 mm / mm / 5.90 Thread M20 x 1.5 M20 x 1.5 Loading pressure connection G 1 8 or 1 8 NPT G 1 8 or 1 8 NPT Data Sheet T EN

148 Table 7 Weights Valve Connection Female thread Welding ends Flanges G/NPT/R C ¼, 3 8, ½ NPS ½, 1 NPS ½ NPS ¾ NPS 1 Valve without Class 150 kg/lbs 2.6/ / /8.2 actuator Class 300 kg/lbs 3.2/ / /10.6 Class 600 kg/lbs 1.7/ / / / /11.5 Class 900/1500 kg/lbs 5.2/ / /19.2 Class 2500 kg/lbs 6.5/ /20 9.8/21.7 Optional Insulating section kg/lbs 0.5 / 1.2 Bellows seal kg/lbs 0.6 / 1.4 Actuator 60 cm² 120 cm² Approx. kg/lbs 1.3 / / 7.8 Dimensions in mm ØD H3 ØD H3 H H L L H L1 20 H1 L1 ØD1 ØD1 L1 L1 L1 SW50 SW46 L H2 L1 Type Angle valve with end connections with female thread Type Globe valve with end connections with female thread and with bellows seal or insulating section Type 3510 Valve bodies with flanges and welding ends Ordering text Micro-flow Valve Type 3510 Globe or angle valve in ANSI version Valve size NPS Pressure rating Class Body material According to Table 2 End connections Female thread G, NPT, R C, flanges or welding ends Direction of flow FTO or FTC Characteristic Equal percentage, linear, quick opening Pneumatic actuator Type /Type or 120 cm 2 (T EN) Fail-safe position Valve CLOSED or valve OPEN Process medium Density kg/m 3 Maximum flow rate... kg/h or m 3 /h in standard or operating state Pressure p 1 and p 2 in bar/psi (absolute pressure) Medium temperature C or K Accessories Positioner and/or limit switch Specifications subject to change without notice. 146 Data Sheet T EN

149 Series W&T Pneumatic Control Valve Type RVG Globe valve and angle valve Application Control valve for feedwater and steam applications in power plant engineering and the petrochemical industry Nominal size DN 25 to 150 NPS 1 to 6 Nominal pressure PN 16 to 400 Class 150 to 2500 Type RVG Globe Valve equipped with Type 3271 Pneumatic Actuator Valve body made of Forged steel / A105 High-temperature forged steel / A182 F12 or / A182 F1 Special properties No cavitation No oscillation or vibrations Long service life Exact characteristics Easy-to-replace internal parts Versions Type RVG Standard version in globe or angle body style with single-stage, two-stage, or three-stage perforated plug, with welding ends Special versions Electric actuators Pressure-balanced plugs 4-stage to 10-stage plugs for very high pressure letdown Application limits for multi-stage plugs Δp < 50 bar / 725 psi - single-stage plug Δp < 100 bar / 1450 psi - two-stage plug Δp < 150 bar / 2175 psi - three-stage plug Fig. 1 Type RVG Globe Valve Fig. 2 Single-stage perforated cage Data Sheet T 9933 EN

150 Principle of operation The process medium flows through the valve in the direction indicated by the arrow. The cross-sectional area of flow across the perforated cage is determined by the edge of the valve plug. The arrangement and size of the bores in the perforated cage determine the valve characteristic and the flow coefficient. With two-stage plugs, the pressure is further reduced by a downstream perforated plug. In valves with three-stage plugs (only for liquids), an additional stage is located downstream of the seat ring. The seat ring is kept inside the body by the cage and can be removed without special tools. Fail-safe action Depending on how the compression springs are arranged in the actuator (for details refer to Data Sheets T EN and T EN), the control valve provides two fail-safe actions that become effective when the supply air fails. Actuator stem extends (FA): The valve is closed when the supply air fails. Actuator stem retracts (FE): The valve is opened when the supply air fails. Fig. 4 Three-stage plug Fig. 3 Two-stage plug Fig. 5 Type RVG with three-stage plug, sectional drawing 148 Data Sheet T 9933 EN

151 Table 1 Technical data Material A A182 F12 Class ( A181 F1) Nominal size DN NPS 1 6 Nominal pressure PN Class Connection Flanges All DIN and ANSI flanges on request Welding ends DIN ANSI Seat-plug seal Metal sealing Characteristic Equal percentage Linear Throttling element Perforated plug, single-stage to three-stage Rangeability 1 : 30 (higher rangeabilities on request) Temperature PTFE 260 C 500 F range Graphite > 260 C > 500 F Leakage class according to EN 1349 Valve plug Metal sealing V Pressure balancing IV Table 2 Materials Standard version A A182 F12 Class ( A181 F1) Nominal pressure PN Class Valve body ( A181 F1) Bonnet ( A181 F1) Seat and plug Guide bushing Mehanite Packing Pure graphite Body gasket Graphite on metal core (1.4541) Table 3 Available K VS and C V coefficients Versions marked * are only available in PN 40 to PN 250 or Class 300 to Reduced K VS coefficients apply when used with two-stage plugs in steam applications (details on request). Table 3a Globe valve with single-stage plug K VS * C V * Flow cross-section (cm²) Seat (mm) Travel (mm) DN NPS ¼ 40 1½ ½ Data Sheet T 9933 EN

152 Table 3b Globe valve with two-stage plug K VS * C V * Flow cross-section (cm²) Seat (mm) Travel (mm) DN NPS ¼ 40 1½ ½ Table 3c Globe valve with three-stage plug K VS * 114* C V * 131.8* Flow cross-section (cm²) Seat (mm) Travel (mm) DN NPS ¼ 40 1½ ½ Table 3d Angle valve with single-stage plug K VS * C V * Flow cross-section (cm²) Seat (mm) Travel (mm) DN NPS ¼ 40 1½ ½ 150 Data Sheet T 9933 EN

153 K VS * C V * Flow cross-section (cm²) Seat (mm) Travel (mm) DN NPS Table 3e Angle valve with two-stage plug K VS * C V * Flow cross-section (cm²) Seat (mm) Travel (mm) DN NPS ¼ 40 1½ ½ Table 3f Angle valve with three-stage plug (for water only) K VS C V Flow cross-section (cm²) Seat (mm) Travel (mm) DN NPS ¼ 40 1½ ½ Table 4 Parameters for flow rate and noise level calculation Travel [%] F L x Fz Data Sheet T 9933 EN

154 Table 5 Permissible differential pressures Note! Required supply pressure p supply = 4 bar Differential pressure Δp at p 2 = 0 bar Actuators marked E require the use of pressure-balanced valve plugs Actuator sizing on request Bench range [bar] for actuator [cm²] 350 cm² ( bar) Δp at p 2 = 0 bar 700 cm² ( bar) 1400 cm² ( bar/ bar) p DN Seat Actuator See Table 3a to Table 3f E E Fig. 6 W&T Type RVG, dimensional drawings 152 Data Sheet T 9933 EN

155 Table 6 Dimensions in mm/in and weights in kg/lbs Table 6a Globe valve with single-stage or two-stage plug Valve DN NPS 1 1¼ 1½ 2 2½ Length L (a) 350 mm / mm / mm / 22 H1 230 mm / mm / mm / 12.2 Weight PN kg 84 kg 296 kg Cl lbs 185 lbs 651 lbs Table 6b Angle valve with single-stage or two-stage plug Valve DN NPS 1 1¼ 1½ 2 2½ Length L (a) 175 mm / mm / 9.8 Length L (b) 150 mm / mm / 8.8 H1 175 mm / mm / 8.66 Weight PN kg 120 kg Cl lbs 264 lbs Table 6c Angle valve with three-stage plug Valve DN NPS 1 1¼ 1½ 2 2½ Length L (a) 175 mm / 6.88 Length L (b) 325 mm / 12.8 H1 195 mm / 7.6 Weight PN Cl kg 152 lbs Table 7 Pneumatic actuator Dimensions and weights Actuator cm² Diaphragm D 280 mm / mm / mm / H (700 cm² and larger: including lifting ring) 85 mm / mm / mm / 11.3 H3 (min. clearance for actuator disassembly) 190 mm / mm / 24 Threads M30 x 1.5 M60 x 1.5 a (for Type 3271 Actuator) G 3 8 ( 3 8 NPT) G ¾ (¾ NPT) Weight Type kg / 17.6 lbs 22 kg / 48.5 lbs 70 kg / lbs Data Sheet T 9933 EN

156 Ordering text Valve Type RVG Globe valve or angle valve Nominal size DN / NPS Nominal pressure PN / ANSI Class Body material According to Table 2 Plug version Standard or pressure-balanced single-stage to three-stage Characteristic Equal percentage or linear Actuator Type 3271 (see T EN or T EN) Fail-safe action Valve CLOSED or valve OPEN Process medium Density and temperature Flow rate During operation Pressure p 1 and p 2 in bar/psi (absolute pressure p abs ), each at minimum, standard, and maximum flow rate Accessories Positioner and/or limit switch Specifications subject to change without notice. 154 Data Sheet T 9933 EN

157 Series W&T Pneumatic Control Valve Type RVG Flange Globe valve and angle valve Application Control valve for high industrial requirements in process engineering applications involving feedwater and steam Nominal size DN 50 to 150 NPS 2 to 6 Nominal pressure PN 40 to 400 Class 300 to 2500 Type RVG Flange Globe Valve with Type 3271 Pneumatic Actuator as W&T Type RVG-1 Valve body made of Carbon steel /A 216 WCC High-temperature carbon steel /A 217 WC6 Versions Type RVG Flange Standard version with flanged, globe-style body with single-stage perforated cage and clamped seat ring Further versions Electric actuators Pressure-balanced plugs Two-stage or three-stage perforated cages/plugs 4-stage to 10-stage plugs on request Angle valves Valves with welding ends as Type RVG, see T 9933 EN Application limits for multi-stage plugs Δp < 50 bar / 725 psi - single-stage plug Δp < 100 bar / 1450 psi - two-stage plug Δp < 150 bar / 2175 psi - three-stage plug Fig. 1 Type RVG Flange Globe Valve Fig. 2 Single-stage perforated cage Data Sheet T EN

158 Principle of operation The process medium flows through the valve in the direction indicated by the arrow. The cross-sectional area of flow across the perforated cage is determined by the edge of the valve plug. The arrangement and size of the bores in the perforated cage determine the valve characteristic and the flow coefficient. With two-stage plugs, the pressure is further reduced by a downstream perforated plug. In valves with three-stage plugs (only for liquids), an additional stage is located downstream of the seat ring. Fail-safe action Depending on how the compression springs are arranged in the actuator (for details refer to Data Sheets T EN and T EN), the control valve provides two fail-safe actions that become effective when the supply air fails. Actuator stem extends (FA): the valve is closed when the supply air fails. Actuator stem retracts (FE): the valve is opened when the supply air fails. Fig. 4 Three-stage plug Fig. 3 Two-stage plug Fig. 5 Type RVG Flange in angle-body version 156 Data Sheet T EN

159 Table 1 Technical data Material A 216 WCC A 217 WC6 Nominal size DN NPS 2 6 Nominal pressure PN ) ANSI Class ) Connection Flanges All DIN and ANSI flanges Welding ends See T 9933 EN - Type RVG Seat-plug seal Metal sealing Characteristic Equal percentage Linear Throttling element Perforated plug, single-stage to three-stage Rangeability 1 : 30 (higher rangeabilities on request) Temperature PTFE 260 C 500 F range Graphite > 260 C > 500 F Leakage class according to EN 1349 Valve plug Metal sealing V Pressure balancing IV 1) Nominal pressures up to PN 400/ANSI Class 2500 on request Table 2 Materials Valve body A 216 WCC A 217 WC6 Nominal pressure PN ANSI Class Valve bonnet (C22.8) A 216 WCC (13CrMo44) A 182 F11 Seat and plug Guide bushing Packing Graphite Body gasket Graphite with metal core (1.4541) Table 3 Available K VS and C V coefficients Table 3a Globe or angle valve with single-stage plug K VS C V Flow cross-section (cm²) Seat (mm) Travel (mm) DN NPS Data Sheet T EN

160 Table 3b Globe or angle valve with two-stage plug Reduced K VS /C V coefficients apply for vapor applications. K VS C V Flow cross-section (cm²) Seat (mm) Travel (mm) DN NPS Table 3c Globe valve with three-stage plug K VS C V Flow cross-section (cm²) Seat (mm) Travel (mm) DN NPS Table 4 Parameters for flow rate and noise level calculation Travel [%] F L x Fz Data Sheet T EN

161 Table 5 Permissible differential pressures Note! Required supply pressure p supply = 4 bar Differential pressure Δp at p 2 = 0 bar Actuators marked E require the use of pressure-balanced valve plugs Actuator sizing on request Bench range [bar] for actuator [cm²] 350 cm² ( bar) 700 cm² ( bar) 1400 cm² ( bar/ bar) Δp at p 2 = 0 bar p 1 in bar DN Seat Actuator size in cm² E See Table 3a to Table 3f E Data Sheet T EN

162 H3 ØD a H H1 H2 L W&T Type RVG-1 Fig. 6 Dimensional drawing of W&T Type RVG Flange Globe Valve Table 6 Dimensions and weights for W&T Type RVG Flange Globe valve in standard version Table 6a Globe valve DIN version Valve DN Length L H1 for actuator [cm²] H2 Weight in kg Valve without actuator PN PN PN PN PN PN Data Sheet T EN

163 Table 6b Globe valve ANSI version Valve NPS Length L H1 for actuator [cm²] H2 Weight Valve without actuator Class 300 Class 600 Class 900 Cl. 300/600 Cl. 900 Cl. 300/600 Cl. 900 Cl. 300/600 Cl. 900 Cl. 300/600 Cl. 900 Cl. 300/600 Cl. 900 Cl. 300 Cl. 600 Cl. 900 mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in kg lbs kg lbs kg lbs See Table 8 for dimensions for actuators Data Sheet T EN

164 ØD a H3 H H1 L W&T Type RVG-1 L Fig. 7 W&T Type RVG Flange Angle Valve Table 7 Dimensions and weights for W&T Type RVG Flange Angle valve in standard version Table 7a Angle valve DIN version Valve DN Length L H1 for actuator [cm²] Weight in kg Valve without actuator PN PN PN PN Table 7b Angle valve ANSI version Valve NPS Length L Cl. 300 Cl. 600 Cl. 900 mm in mm in mm in Data Sheet T EN

165 Valve NPS H1 for actuator [cm²] Weight in kg Valve without actuator Cl. 300 /600 Cl. 900 Cl. 300 /600 Cl. 900 Cl. 300 /600 Cl. 900 Cl. 300 /600 Cl. 900 Cl. 300 Cl. 600 Cl. 900 mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in kg lbs kg lbs kg On request lbs Table 8 Dimensions and weights for Types 3271 Pneumatic Actuator Actuator cm² x 2800 Diaphragm D H (700 cm² and larger including lifting ring) mm in mm in H3 (min. clearance for mm actuator disassembly) in Thread M30 x 1.5 M60 x 1.5 M100 x 2 a (for Type 3271 Actuator) G 3 8 ( 3 8 NPT) G ¾ (¾ NPT) G 1 (1 NPT) Weight Type 3271 Without handwheel With handwheel kg lbs kg lbs Only with side-mounted handwheel, see T EN Data Sheet T EN

166 Ordering text Valve Type RVG Globe valve or angle valve Nominal size DN / NPS Nominal pressure PN / ANSI Class Body material According to Table 2 Plug version Standard or pressure-balanced single-stage to three-stage Characteristic Equal percentage or linear Actuator Type 3271 (see T EN or T EN) Fail-safe action Valve CLOSED or valve OPEN Process medium Density and temperature Flow rate During operation Pressure p 1 and p 2 in bar/psi (absolute pressure p abs ), each at minimum, standard, and maximum flow rate Accessories Positioner and/or limit switch Specifications subject to change without notice. 164 Data Sheet T EN

167 Series 250 Control Valves with Ceramic Valve Trims Application Control valves for use in process engineering where valve trim and valve body are subjected to erosive and abrasive wear Nominal size DN 25 to DN 150 Nominal pressure PN 16 to PN 400 Temperatures Up to 500 C In industrial plants, pneumatic and electric control valves control different media, often under unfavorable flow conditions. In flashing service and with aggressive fluids containing solid matter, the valve trim, i.e. seat and plug, as well as the valve body are subject to erosive and abrasive wear. In some applications, valve trims made of cast iron or PTFE are worn out within only a few days and valve trims of stellited or forged titanium within a few weeks. Valve trims made of low-wear ceramic, however, shows almost no signs of wear after one year in service. Depending on the valve design and the particular properties of the ceramic material used, the following advantages can be attained: Seat and plug made of hot-pressed silicon nitride (HPSN) Constant high flexural strength and resistance to abrasive wear Corrosion resistance Service life 200 times longer compared to valve trims made of austenitic steel used under highly erosive and abrasive conditions Longer service life of angle valve bodies thanks to the flowto-close direction of flow and an additional anti-wear sleeve of silicon carbide (SiC) The control valves have a modular design and can be equipped with various accessories, such as positioners, solenoid valves and other accessories according to IEC and NAMUR recommendation. See Information Sheet T 8350 EN for details. Fig. 1 Type Pneumatic Control Valve with Type 3271 Actuator Versions The pneumatic control valves illustrated in Figs. 1 and 2 can be equipped with ceramic valve trims. They are equipped with the Type 3271 Pneumatic Actuator. Type Type 3251 Globe Valve Type Type 3256 Angle Valve Additional versions with Electric actuator On request Fig. 2 Type Pneumatic Control Valve with Type 3271 Actuator Data Sheet T 8071 EN

168 Fail-safe position Depending on the arrangement of the compression springs in the actuator (for details, see Data Sheets T EN and T EN), the control valve has two different fail-safe positions which become effective when the supply air fails: "Actuator stem extends", The valve is closed when the air supply fails. "Actuator stem retracts", The valve is opened when the air supply fails. Materials The data sheets listed in Table 1 contain exact details on the materials used. The valve bodies are available in standard or stainless cast steel as well as in cold-resisting or high-temperature cast steel. The ceramic valve trim, i.e. plug and seat or seat ring, consists of silicon nitride (Si 3N 4), which is hot-pressed at 1700 to 1800 C. The anti-wear sleeve is made of hot-pressed silicon carbide (SiC). The data in Table 2 indicate the favorable properties of these materials. Fig. 3 Type with ceramic trim Permissible differential pressures Δp The permissible differential pressures for versions with K vs values of 1.6 to 160 are specified in the data sheets listed in Table 1. Here, only the combination of nominal sizes and seat diameters shown in Tables 3 can be applied. Permissible differential pressures for versions with K vs 1 and K vs > 160 are available on request. Fig. 4 Type with ceramic trim and ceramic anti-wear sleeve 166 Data Sheet T 8071 EN

169 Table 1 Technical data Valve Type Actuator 1) Type Type 3271 or Type 3277 (up to 700 cm 2 ) Body style Globe valve Angle valve Nominal sizes DN Nominal pressure PN Reinforcement Ceramic valve trim HPSN (Si3N4) Ceramic anti-wear sleeve SiC Temperature ranges (see associated data sheet) Permissible operating pressures acc. to pressure-temperature diagrams (see T EN) Temperature limits C Leakage class according to DIN EN 1349: 2000 Valve plug IV-S2 For details, see Data Sheet T 8051 EN T 8065 EN 1) Type and Type Electric Control Valves on request Table 2 Properties of ceramic materials Material HPSN SiC Flexural strength (4-point) N/mm >350 Tensile strength N/mm >180 Compressive strength N/mm >1200 Young s Modulus kn/mm >330 Hardness HV 10 N/mm 2 > > Thermal expansion (α) 10 6 / C Corrosion resistance Better than all metal valve materials Selection and sizing Control valves with ceramic valve trim require especially careful sizing. Therefore, final sizing is carried out by SAMSON. 1. Calculate the appropriate K v coefficient according to IEC Select the nominal size and K vs coefficient according to Table Determine the permissible differential pressure Δp and select the appropriate actuator according to the data sheets listed in Table Select materials and accessories according to the pressuretemperature diagram and the corresponding data sheets. The following details are required on ordering Valve type DN... PN... Body material Acc. to associated data sheet End connection Flanges/welding ends Plug Ceramic/balanced Characteristic Equal percentage or linear Anti-wear sleeve For Type 3256 Actuator Versions according to T EN and T EN Fail-safe action Valve OPEN/CLOSED Process medium Density in kg/m 3 and temperature in C or K Max. flow rate kg/h or m 3 /h under standard or operating conditions Pressure p 1 in bar (absolute pressure p abs) p 2 in bar (absolute pressure p abs) Accessories Positioner and/or limit switch Data Sheet T 8071 EN

170 Table 3 K vs and z values Overview Kvs Seat mm Rated travel mm Table 3a Type 3251 Globe Valve with ceramic valve trim Flow-to-open Versions in fields highlighted in gray also available with balanced plug Kvs DN z values Terms for control valve sizing according to DIN EN 60534, Parts 2-1 and 2-2: FL = 0.95, xt = 0.75 Table 3b Type 3256 Angle Valve with ceramic valve trim and ceramic anti-wear sleeve Flow-to-close Versions in fields highlighted in gray also available with balanced plug Kvs DN z values Terms for control valve sizing according to DIN EN 60534, Parts 2-1 and 2-2: FL = 0.85, xt = 0.6 Specifications subject to change without notice. 168 Data Sheet T 8071 EN

171 Series 250 Pneumatic Control Valve Type Angle Valve with Split Body Type 3258 Application Control valve assembly for process engineering applications, especially for chemical plants where the valve materials must meet severe requirements Nominal sizes DN 25 to DN 125 Nominal pressures PN 16 to PN 40 Temperatures 10 C to +220 C Conversion of valve sizing coefficients: C v (in U.S.-gallons/min) = 1.17 K vs (in m 3 /h) K vs (in m 3 /h) = 0.86 C v (in U.S.-gallons/min) Type 3258 Angle Valve with split body with Type 3271 Pneumatic Actuator (Type Control Valve) Type 3277 Pneumatic Actuator (Type Control Valve) Valve body made of Cast steel Stainless cast steel Special materials Hastelloy B or Hastelloy C Titanium Monel Valve plug with Metal sealing Soft sealing Lapped-in metal The valves designed according to the modular-assembly principle can be equipped with various optional accessories: Positioners, solenoid valves and other accessories conforming with IEC and NAMUR recommendations. Refer to Information Sheet T 8350 EN for more details. Versions Standard version Type 3258 Valve with split-body in DN 15 to 150 and nominal pressures PN 16 or PN 40 for temperatures ranging from 10 C to +220 C Type Valve with Type 3271 Pneumatic Actuator Type Valve with Type 3277 Pneumatic Actuator Further versions with Adjustable packing Additional metal bellows seal Nominal size up to DN 200, nominal pressure up to PN 160, temperature range up to 450 C On request Body made of special materal such as Hastelloy B or C, titanium, Monel Ceramic trim for eroding or abrasive media See Data Sheet T 8071 EN Additional handwheel See Data Sheet T /-2 EN Electric actuator On request Fig. 1 Type Pneumatic Control Valve Data Sheet T 8070 EN

172 Principle of operation The process medium flows through the valve in the direction indicated by the arrow. The position of the plug determines the flow rate between the plug and the seat. The valve bonnet can be separated from the bottom section of the valve after removing the connecting bolts. The seat is then easily accessible. The angle valve can be cleaned while remaining in the line since complete draining is possible as the body has a smooth passage with no dead cavities. Fail-safe action Depending on how the springs are arranged in the actuator (for details refer to Data Sheets T EN and T EN), the control valve has two different fail-safe positions which become effective upon a supply air failure: "Actuator stem extends" (FA), The valve closes when the supply air fails. "Actuator stem retracts" (FE), The valve opens when the supply air fails. Table 1 Technical data Nominal size DN 25, 50, 80, 100, 150 Material Cast steel Stainless cast steel Nominal pressure PN 16 to 40 Connection Flange Form B1 Plug/seat sealing Metal, soft or lapped-in metal Characteristic Equal percentage or linear Rangeability 50 : 1 Fig. 2 Type Pneumatic Control Valve Temperature ranges in C Body without ins. section With insulating section or bellows seal Leakage rate according to DIN EN 1349: 2000 Metal sealing IV Soft sealing VI Lapped-in metal IV-S2 IV-S3 up to DN 80 Table 2 Materials Standard version Valve body and flanges 1) Cast steel Stainless cast steel Seat and plug 2) With metal sealing / / Seat ring With soft sealing PTFE with glass fiber Guide bushings Stuffing box packing V-ring packing PTFE with carbon; spring or high-temperature packing Upon request, other body materials: Titanium, Monel, Hastelloy B, Hastelloy C or tantalum or zirconium lining All seats and plugs with metal sealing are also available with Stellite facing 170 Data Sheet T 8070 EN

173 Table 3 Available K vs values Ceramic trims available on request Kvs Seat mm Tr. mm DN Table 4 Differential pressure tables Permissible differential pressures Δp for plug with metal sealing when p2 = 0 Values in the gray columns apply to standard applications Differential pressures in the white columns apply to maximum pretensioned springs Differential pressures in parentheses apply to the values in parentheses in the Bench range row. Table 4a Valve with fail-safe position "Actuator stem extends" Valve CLOSED when the signal pressure is 0 bar Table 4b Valve with fail-safe position "Actuator stem retracts" Valve CLOSED at the required signal pressure Table 4a Fail-safe position "Actuator stem extends" Table 4b "Stem retracts" Bench range [bar] ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) Required supply air Actuator DN Kvs cm 2 Δp when p2 = and (40) (40) (40) (40) (40) (40) (40) (40) (40) (40) (40) (40) (40) (40) (40 ) (40 ) (40 ) (40 ) (27) (40 ) (40 ) (40) (40) (35) (40) (40) (40) (20) (40) (135) (28) (38) (12.6) (40) (40) and ,4 4.7 (18) (24) (7.9) (27) (40) (16) (22) (7.4) (25) (40) Notes concerning permissible differential pressures in Table 4 The differential pressure tables were created under the following conditions: The maximum supply pressure is 4 bar for valves in nominal sizes DN 15 to DN 80 and actuators with 700 cm 2 effective diaphragm area values. Direction of flow: FTO Version with PTFE packing The leakage rates as per Table 1 are kept with the specified permissible differential pressures. The specified differential pressure can be limited by the Pressure-Temperature Diagram. The actuator sizing must be checked separately for a version with metal bellows seal and p2 0 bar. Data Sheet T 8070 EN

174 Table 5 Dimensions for Type 3258 Angle Valve Valve DN L mm H1 with Type 3271 Actuator (Type mm) 350 cm cm cm cm Actuator cm Diaphragm D H H3 (Types 3271 and 3277 Actuators) 1) Thread M30 x 1.5 M60 x 1.5 M100 x 2 a (with Type 3271 Actuator) G 3 8 ( 3 8 NPT) G 3 4 ( 3 4 NPT) G 1 (1 NPT) a2 (with Type 3277 Actuator) G 3 8 ( 3 8 NPT) 1) Minimum distance to be kept clear for removing the actuator Table 7 Weights for the standard version of the Type 3258 Angle Valve Valve DN Weight without actuator kg Actuator cm Type 3271 (approx kg) 1) Type 3277 (approx kg) 1) ) Top row without handwheel and bottom row with handwheel Ordering text Nominal size DN Acc. to Table 3; DN 200 on request Nominal pressure Up to PN 40; up to PN 200 on request Ø D a H3 Valve body material End connections Acc. to Table 2; special materials and linings on request Flanges; others on request H Seat and plug Plug sealing Standard, stellited Metal sealing, soft sealing or lapped in metal Characteristic Equal percentage or linear Actuator Versions according to T EN/ T EN H1 Fail-safe position Valve OPEN or CLOSED Process medium Density in kg/m 3 and temperature in C Flow rate In kg/h or m 3 /h in standard or operating conditions L Pressure p 1 in bar (absolute pressure p abs) p 2 in bar (absolute pressure p abs) at minimum, normal and maximum flow rate L Accessories Specifications subject to change without notice. 172 Data Sheet T 8070 EN

175 Flow Dividers for Control Valves St I St III Application These valve components serve to reduce noise emission and are designed for installation in globe and angle valves used to control vapors or gases. The noise emission of control valves controlling gases or vapors as well as the connected pipeline is determined by the free jet leaving the restriction and by the downstream turbulent mixing zone. A particularly effective and low-cost solution to reduce noise is achieved by using flow dividers which shorten the free jet of gas or vapor and accelerate the exchange of energy in the mixing zone. Special features Effective, reliable and cost-effective components for noise reduction Noticeable deviation from the characteristic only in the travel range beyond 80% The valve s K vs coefficient is reduced to the K vs I and K vs III coefficients specified in the data sheets Installation in Types 3241, 3251 and 3254 Globe Valves, Type 3256 Angle Valves as well as globe valves as part of self-operated regulators In Series 280 Steam-converting Valves, the Flow Divider St III is also used to split up and vaporize cooling water (see Information Sheet T 8250 EN). Fig. 1 Flow Divider St I, installed in Type 3241 Valve Versions Flow Divider St I (Figs. 1 and 4) made of perforated sheet steel with perforation diameters of 2.5 mm; suitable for gases and vapors. Flow Divider St III (Fig. 2) made of stainless wire mesh; suitable for gases and vapors containing small-sized suspended matter. It additionally has an internal and external perforated sheet steel (Fig. 3) and is designed for Series 250 and 280 Valves. Fig. 2 Flow Divider St III, installed in Type 3241 Valve Fig. 3 Flow Divider St III, installed in Type 3254 Valve 1 Valve body 2 Seat 3 Plug 13 Flow divider Data Sheet T 8081 EN

176 Principle of operation (Fig. 4) After having passed the cross-sectional area of the restriction located between the valve seat (2) and the plug (3), the process medium reaches its maximum velocity. Before a noise-intensive, turbulent mixing zone can be created, the medium hits the inner wall of the flow divider (13) which splits up the jet into numerous smaller jets, thus ensuring low-noise energy transfer to the surrounding medium. Calculation of noise emission Gases and vapors The noise emitted by gases in single- and multi-stage control valves is determined according to IEC 60534, Part 8-3. This calculation method, however, does not apply to control valves containing noise-reducing elements, such as Flow Dividers St I and St III. In this case, calculation is performed according to VDMA , Edition 89. The calculation is based on the jet power reached during expansion. An acoustical conversion ratio η G is used to determine the noise emission. Diagram 1 illustrates the difference between the conversion ratios depending on the differential pressure ratio. This difference immediately shows the level difference of the internal sound power. The difference between the sound pressure levels to be expected at one meter distance from the pipe is also sufficiently accurate. Assuming a differential pressure ratio of x = 0.5, the difference in sound pressure level amounts to 10 db between a valve without a flow divider and a valve with a Flow Divider St I and 20 db with a Flow Divider St III. Fig. 4 Type 3251 Valve with Flow Divider St I η G [db] x Diagram 1 1 Without flow divider 2 With Flow Divider St I 3 With Flow Divider St III Specifications subject to change without notice. 174 Data Sheet T 8081 EN

177 Series 240 and 250 Pneumatic Control Valves with AC-1 or AC-2 Trim Application Optimized trim for low-noise and low-wear pressure reduction for liquids with differential pressures up to 40 bar Nominal size DN 50 to 300 NPS 2 to 12 Nominal pressure PN 16 to 160 Class 150 to 900 Temperature range 10 to 220 C 14 to 428 F The AC-1 Trim includes the following special features: Raised seat Parabolic plug with integrated guide in the seat. One to four attenuation plates are integrated into seat of the AC-2 Trim upstream of the parabolic plug and the plug guide. The differential pressure may not exceed 40 bar (580 psi). Versions Standard version for SAMSON valves acc. to Tables 2 and 3 AC-1 Optimized trim for valve sizes DN 50 to DN 300 (NPS 2 to NPS 12) AC-2 Optimized trim with one to four attenuation plates for valve sizes DN 80 to DN 250 (NPS 3 to NPS 10) Other versions Pressure-balanced version on request Fig. 1 Type 3251 Valve with AC-1 Trim Fig. 2 Type 3251 Valve and AC-2 Trim with four attenuation plates Data Sheet T 8082 EN

178 Principle of operation The medium flows in the flow-to-open direction through the valve. The valve plug determines the cross-sectional area of flow. The K V coefficient is adapted over the plug and, if necessary, using a combination of attenuation plates upstream of the seat. To avoid vibrations, the plug is double guided by a guide bushing at the top and a second guide in the seat. AC-1 Compared to standard valve trims, these trims considerably reduce the sound pressure level for differential pressure ratios between X F = 0.25 and X F = 0.75 by shifting the point of incipient cavitation. Depending on the valve load, the sound pressure level is reduced to varying degrees. AC-2 Optionally one to four attenuation plates can be integrated in the seat on the upstream side. In this way, the point of incipient cavitation is shifted at large valve loads to higher differential pressure ratios X F. For small valve loads, the onset of cavitation is shifted by higher X fz values of the parabolic plug to higher differential pressure ratios. Compared to standard valve trims, these trims considerably reduce the sound pressure level for differential pressure ratios between X F = 0.25 and X F = 0.9 by shifting the point of incipient cavitation. Fig. 3 Sectional view of AC-1 Trim The differential pressure ratio X F is defined as X F = p1 Δp pv with Δp being the differential pressure across the valve, p 1 being the upstream pressure, and p v representing the vapor pressure of the medium. The reduction of the sound pressure level ΔL pa compared to a standard valve trim is exemplified in Figs. 5 and 6. The diagrams illustrate four different valve loads. Fig. 4 Sectional view of AC-2 Trim with four attenuation plates Table 1 Technical data for AC-1 Trim and AC-2 Trim AC-1 AC-2 Nominal size DN 50 to 300 NPS 2 to 12 DN 80 to 250 NPS 3 to 10 Nominal pressure PN 16 to 160 Class 150 to 900 Temperature range 10 to 220 C 14 to 428 F Δp max Operation without cavitation: < 40 bar < 580 psi Max. perm. differential pressure Operation with cavitation: < 25 bar < 360 psi Medium Liquids only Direction of flow Flow-to-open (FTO) only Closure member Double-guided parabolic plug Double-guided parabolic plug with attenuation plates integrated into the seat Seat-plug seal Metal sealing: Class IV Leakage class (DIN EN 1349) IV-S1for SB 100 IV-S2 for SB < 100 K V /C V value See Table 2 See Table 3 Characteristic Equal percentage Equal percentage modified Rangeability 50 : 1 See Table 3 Seat bore See Table 2 See Table 3 Travels See Table 2 See Table 3 Trim materials Stellite hard facing/ Stellite hard facing/ Data Sheet T 8082 EN

179 Reduction of the sound pressure level The diagrams illustrate the reduction of the sound pressure level ΔLpa when using the AC Trims as opposed to a standard trim. ΔLpa values of other AC Trims available on request. Figs. 5 and 6 Nominal size DN 80 (NPS 3) and DN 150 (NPS 6) Sound pressure level difference ΔLpa [db(a)] between special trim and V-port trim Nominal size DN 80 K v 35/C v % Valve load 50 % Valve load 75 % Valve load 90 % Valve load -10 ΔLp a [db( A)] X F [ - ] 1.2 Sound pressure level difference ΔLpa [db(a)] between special trim and V-port trim Nominal size DN 150 K v 135/C v % Valve load 50 % Valve load 75 % Valve load 90 % Valve load -10 ΔLpa [db(a)] X F [ - ] Data Sheet T 8082 EN

180 Table 2 AC-1 Trim Nominal sizes and their associated flow coefficients (K V and C V ) The specified travels must be achieved including an overtravel of 10 %. The use of a mechanical travel stop is required for actuators with fail-safe action stem extends. DN/NPS DN 50 NPS 2 DN 80 NPS 3 DN 100 NPS 4 DN 150 NPS 6 SB [mm] Travel [mm] K V C V Valve Type X fz value [Valve load %] (90 %) 0.38 (75 %) / (50 %) 0.54 (25 %) (90 %) 0.38 (75 %) / (50 %) 0.54 (25 %) (90 %) 0.35 (75 %) / (50 %) 0.56 (25 %) (90 %) 0.42 (75 %) 0.49 (50 %) 0.60 (25 %) 0.35 (90 %) 0.38 (75 %) 0.47 (50 %) 0.58 (25 %) (90 %) 0.36 (75 %) / (50 %) 0.53 (25 %) (90 %) (75 %) 3251/ (50 %) 0.54 (25 %) (90 %) (75 %) 3251/ (50 %) 0.57 (25 %) 0.42 (90 %) / (75 %) 0.53 (50 %) 0.63 (25 %) (90 %) (75 %) 3251/ (50 %) 0.59 (25 %) (90 %) (75 %) 3251/ (50 %) 0.53 (25 %) 0.28 (90 %) /3251/ (75 %) 0.41 (50 %) 0.54 (25 %) (90 %) (75 %) / (50 %) 0.50 (25 %) (90 %) 0.37 (75 %) 0.45 (50 %) 0.57 (25 %) 0.28 (90 %) 0.33 (75 %) 0.41 (50 %) 0.54 (25 %) 178 Data Sheet T 8082 EN

181 DN/NPS DN 200 NPS 8 DN 250 NPS 10 DN 300 NPS 12 SB [mm] Travel [mm] K V C V Valve Type X fz value [Valve load %] 0.27 (90 %) 0.31 (75 %) 0.40 (50 %) 0.53 (25 %) 0.22 (90 %) 0.26 (75 %) 0.36 (50 %) 0.49 (25 %) 0.24 (90 %) 0.28 (75 %) 0.37 (50 %) 0.51 (25 %) 0.33 (90 %) 0.37 (75 %) 0.45 (50 %) 0.57 (25 %) 0.26 (90 %) 0.31 (75 %) 0.40 (50 %) 0.52 (25 %) 0.27 (90 %) 0.31 (75 %) 0.40 (50 %) 0.53 (25 %) 0.22 (90 %) 0.26 (75 %) 0.36 (50 %) 0.49 (25 %) 0.24 (90 %) 0.28 (75 %) 0.37 (50 %) 0.51 (25 %) 0.33 (90 %) 0.37 (75 %) 0.45 (50 %) 0.57 (25 %) 0.26 (90 %) 0.31 (75 %) 0.40 (50 %) 0.52 (25 %) 0.22 (90 %) 0.26 (75 %) 0.36 (50 %) 0.49 (25 %) 0.24 (90 %) 0.28 (75 %) 0.37 (50 %) 0.51 (25 %) 0.26 (90 %) 0.31 (75 %) 0.40 (50 %) 0.52 (25 %) 0.20 (90 %) 0.24 (75 %) 0.33 (50 %) 0.48 (25 %) Data Sheet T 8082 EN

182 Table 3 AC-2 Trim Nominal sizes and their associated flow coefficients (K V and C V ) The specified travels must be achieved including an overtravel of 10 %. The use of a mechanical travel stop is required for actuators with fail-safe action stem extends. DN/NPS DN 80 NPS 3 DN 100 NPS 4 DN 150 NPS 6 DN 200 NPS 8 DN 250 NPS 10 SB [mm] Travel [mm] K V C V Valve Type Attenuation plate Rangeability Quantity Bore Ø >10: >15: >20: >25: >20: >15: >10: >15: >20: >30: >20: >15: >20: >15: >20: >25: >15: >10: >15: : >20: >20: >25: >15: >10: >15: : >20: >25:1 180 Data Sheet T 8082 EN

183 Table 4 Permissible differential pressures for Series 240 Valves with AC-1 or AC-2 Trim Table 4a Valves with fail-safe position Valve CLOSED (FA) Differential pressures >40 bar for ANSI version only Bench range in bar with actuator size in cm 2 Required supply pressure DN K VS SB DN DN 80 DN 80 PN 40 DN 100 DN 100 PN 40 DN 150 DN 150 PN 40 DN 200 and DN 250 DN 200/250 PN 40 DN / ( ) ( ) ( ) x Actuator in cm 2 Upper spring range value bar Δp when p 2 = 0 bar (23.8) (23.8) (47.6) (13.8) (27.6) (23.8) (47.6) (50) (13.8) (27.6) (41.5) (23.8) (47.6) (50) (50) x Data Sheet T 8082 EN

184 Table 4b Series 240 Valves with fail-safe position Valve OPEN (FE) Differential pressures >40 bar for ANSI version only / Bench range in bar with actuator size (cm 2 ) x ( ) Required supply pressure DN K VS SB DN DN 80 DN 80 PN 40 DN 100 DN 100 PN 40 DN 150 DN 150 PN 40 DN 200 and DN 250 DN 200/250 PN 40 DN 300 Actuator in cm 2 Δp when p 2 = 0 bar (23.8) (23.8) (50) (50) (50) (13.8) (31.1) (50) (50) (35.7) (50) (50) (10.4) (44.9) (50) (6.4) (27.9) (50) (4.1) (17.8) (34.3) (6.4) (27.9) (50) (4.1) (17.8) (34.3) (2.6) (11.4) (21.9) (4.1) (17.8) (34.3) (39.8) (50) (5.3) (22.8) (43.9) (50) (3.7) (15.8) (30.5) (35.3) (2.1) (8.9) (17.1) (19.9) (10.5) (45.6) x2800 (7.3) (31.7) (4.1) (17.8) (5.3) (22.8) (43.9) (50) (3.7) (15.8) (30.5) (35.3) (2.1) (8.9) (17.1) (19.9) Data Sheet T 8082 EN

185 Table 5 Permissible differential pressures for Series 250 Valves with AC-1 or AC-2 Trim Table 5a Valves with fail-safe position Valve CLOSED (stem extends) Bench range in bar with actuator size in cm 2 Required supply pressure DN K VS SB DN 50 PN DN 50 PN DN 80 PN DN 80 PN DN 100 PN DN 100 PN x2800 Actuator in cm ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) Upper spring range value bar Δp when p 2 = 0 bar ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) (43.9) (87.8) (109.7) (112.4) (134.4) (43.9) (87.8) (27.6) (55.3) (17.1) (34.3) (43.9) (87.8) (109.7) (134.4) (27.6) (55.3) (69.1) (70.8) (84.6) (17.1) (43.3) (42.8) 43.9 (52.5) (43.9) (87.8) (109.7) (134.4) (27.6) (55.3) (69.1) 70.8 (84.6) (17.1) (34.3) (42.8) (43.9) (52.5) (11) (21.9) (27.4) (28.1) (33.6) (43.9) (87.8) (109.7) (134.4) (27.6) (55.3) (69.1) 70.8 (84.6) (17.1) (34.3) (42.8) 43.9 (52.5) (11) (21.9) (27.4) 28.1 (33.6) Data Sheet T 8082 EN

186 Bench range in bar with actuator size in cm 2 Required supply pressure DN K VS SB DN x2800 Actuator in cm ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) Upper spring range value bar Δp when p 2 = 0 bar ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) (17.1) (34.3) (42.8) 43.9 (52.5) (11) (21.9) (27.4) 28.1 (33.6) (14) (28.1) (35.1) (42.1) (22.8) (49.1) 2x2800 (28.1) (56.2) (45.6) (9.8) (19.5) (24.4) (29.3) (15.8) (34.1) 2x2800 (19.5) (39) (31.7) (11) (21.9) (27.4) 28.1 (33.6) (14) (28.1) (35.1) (42.1) (22.8) (49.1) 2x2800 (28.1) (56.2) (70.2) (84.2) (45.6) (9.8) (19.5) (24.4) (29.3) (15.8) (34.1) 2x2800 (19.5) (39) (48.8) (58.5) (31.7) (5.5) (11) (13.7) (16.5) (8.9) (19.2) 2x2800 (11) (21.9) (27.4) (32.9) (17.8) (14) (28.1) (35.1) (42.1) (22.8) (49.1) 2x2800 (28.1) (56.2) (70.2) (84.2) (45.6) (9.8) (19.5) (24.4) (29.3) (15.8) (34.1) 2x2800 (19.5) (39) (48.8) (58.5) (31.7) (5.5) (11) (13.7) (16.5) (8.9) (19.2) 2x2800 (11) (21.9) (27.4) (32.9) (17.8) x Data Sheet T 8082 EN

187 Table 5b Series 250 Valves with fail-safe position Valve OPEN (FE) Bench range in bar with actuator size in cm ( ) 2x2800 Required supply pressure DN K VS SB DN 50 PN DN 50 PN DN 80 PN DN 80 PN DN 100 PN DN 100 PN DN 150 Actuator in cm 2 Δp when p 2 = 0 bar (71.3) (71.3) (44.9) (27.9) (71.3) (137.1) (159.1) (44.9) (86.4) (100.2) (27.9) (53.6) (62.1) (71.3) (137.1) (44.9) (86.4) (27.9) (53.6) (17.8) (34.3) (71.3) (137.1) (159.1) (44.9) (86.4) (100.2) (27.9) (53.6) (62.1) (17.8) (34.3) (39.8) (27.9) (53.6) (62.1) (83.6) (105) (17.8) (34.3) (39.8) (53.5) (67.2) (22.8) (43.9) (50.9) 2x2800 (45.6) (15.8) (30.5) (35.3) 2x2800 (31.7) Data Sheet T 8082 EN

188 Bench range in bar with actuator size in cm ( ) 2x2800 Required supply pressure DN K VS SB DN 200 DN Actuator in cm 2 Δp when p 2 = 0 bar (17.8) (34.3) (39.8) (53.5) (67.2) (22.8) (43.9) (50.9) (68.4) (86) 2x2800 (45.6) (15.8) (30.5) (35.3) (47.5) (59.7) 2x2800 (31.7) (8.9) (17.1) (19.1) (26.7) (33.6) 2x2800 (17.8) (22.8) (43.9) (50.9) (68.4) (86) 2x2800 (45.6) (87.8) (15.8) (30.5) (35.3) (47.5) (59.7) 2x2800 (31.7) (60.9) (8.9) (17.1) (19.9) (26.7) (33.6) 2x2800 (17.8) (34.3) x The following details are required on ordering AC-1 Trim with K V /C V according to Table 2 or AC-2 Trim with K V /C V according to Table 3 Material For tag no. in order/quotation... Operating pressure in bar (a), bar (g) or psi (a), psi (g) with minimum, normal, and maximum flow rate Flow rate kg/h or m 3 /h in operating state with minimum, normal, and maximum flow rate Process medium Density in kg/m 3 and temperature in C/ F Vapor pressure in bar Pipe diameter DN or NPS Nominal pressure PN or ANSI Class... Material According to Table 1 Specifications subject to change without notice. 186 Data Sheet T 8082 EN

189 Series 250 Pneumatic Control Valves with AC-3 Trim Application Optimized trim for low-noise and low-wear pressure reduction for liquids with differential pressures up to 100 bar Nominal size DN 15 to 200 NPS ½ to 8 Nominal pressure PN 40 to 400 Class 300 to 2500 Temperature range 10 to 220 C 14 to 428 F The optimized three-stage AC-3 Trim is used in Type 3251 Globe Valves or Type 3256 Angle Valves Special features Raised seat Multi-stage parabolic plug Additional plug guiding integrated into the seat Optionally low-wear version equipped with stellited seating surfaces or hardened trim Standard version AC-3 Optimized three-stage trim for Type 3251 Globe Valves and Type 3256 Angle Valves in nominal sizes from DN 15 to DN 200 (NPS ½ to 8) Additional versions AC-3 Trim engineered for special applications for pressure drops over 100 bar (1450 psi) Details available on request Five-stage AC-5 Trim optimized for low-noise and low-wear performance for Type 3254 Globe Valves or Type 3256 Angle Valve Details available on request Fig. 1 Type 3251 Globe Valve with AC-3 Trim Data Sheet T 8083 EN

190 Principle of operation The medium flows through the valve in the flow-to-open direction. The valve plug determines the cross-sectional area of flow. To avoid vibrations, the plug is double guided by a guide bushing at the top and a second guide in the seat. Compared to standard valve trims, the AC-3 Trims considerably reduce the sound pressure level for differential pressure ratios between X F = 0.25 and X F = 0.95 by shifting the point of incipient cavitation. Depending on the valve load, the sound pressure level is reduced to varying degrees. The differential pressure ratio X F is defined as X F = p1 Δp pv with Δp being the differential pressure across the valve, p 1 being the upstream pressure, and p v representing the vapor pressure of the medium. The reduction of the sound pressure level ΔLp Aa compared to a standard valve trim is exemplified in Fig. 3. The diagram illustrates four different valve loads. Table 1 Technical data for AC-3 Trim Fig. 2 Type 3256 Angle Valve with AC-3 Trim and metal bellows seal AC-3 Nominal size DN 15 to 200 NPS ½ to 8 Depending on valve type Nominal pressure PN 40 to 400 Class 300 to 2500 Depending on valve type Temperature range 10 to 220 C 14 to 428 F Δp max Case 1: < 100 bar 1450 psi, if no restrictions on trim material apply Max. perm. differential pressure Case 2: < 60 bar 870 psi, if any restriction on trim material applies Medium Liquids only Direction of flow Flow-to-open (FTO) only Closure member Double-guided multi-stage parabolic plug Seat-plug seal Leakage class (DIN EN 1349) Characteristic Metal sealing: Class IV IV-S1for SB 100 IV-S2 for SB < 100 Equal percentage or linear Trim materials Wear resistance Multi-stage pressure relief Stellited seating surfaces Hardening (up to DN 150/NPS 6) Plug balancing DN 100/NPS 4: K V 25/C V 30 and higher, except with hardened plugs DN 100 to 150/NPS 4 to 6: K V 40/C V 47 and higher, except with hardened plugs DN 200/NPS 8: K V 63/C V 75 and higher, except with hardened plugs Valve bonnet Standard Insulating section Bellows seal 188 Data Sheet T 8083 EN

191 Reduction of the sound pressure level The diagram illustrates the reduction of the sound pressure level when using an AC-3 Trim as opposed to a standard trim. Sound pressure level difference ΔLpa [db(a)] between AC-3 Trim and V-port trim ΔLpa 0-5 [db(a)] Valve load 25 % 50 % 75 % 90 % [ ] XF Fig. 3 Valve DN 80 (NPS 3) and K V 25 (C v 30) Permissible differential pressures for Type 3251 and Type 3256 Valves are available on request The following details are required on ordering Operating pressure in bar (a), bar (g) or psi (a), psi (g) at minimum, standard, and maximum flow rate Flow rate kg/h or m 3 /h in standard or operating state at minimum, standard, and maximum flow rate Process medium Density in kg/m 3 and temperature in C/ F Pipe diameter DN or NPS Nominal pressure PN or ANSI Class... Material According to Table 1 Specifications subject to change without notice. Data Sheet T 8083 EN

192 Table 2 AC-3 Trim Nominal sizes with associated K VS and C V coefficients The specified travels must be achieved including an overtravel of 10 %. The use of a mechanical travel stop is recommended for actuators with fail-safe action stem extends. DN/in DN 15 NPS ½ DN 25 NPS 1 DN 40 NPS 1½ DN 50 NPS 2 DN 80 NPS 3 DN 100 NPS 4 DN 150 NPS 6 DN 200 NPS 8 Seat bore [mm] Travel [mm] K V C V Valve Type Data Sheet T 8083 EN

193 Silencer Type 3381 DIN and ANSI versions Application Noise attenuation, velocity reduction at valve outlet for gases and vapors Nominal size DN 50 to 400 NPS 2 to 16 Nominal pressure PN 10 to 160 Class 300 to 900 Type 3381 Silencer acting as a fixed restriction to reduce the sound pressure level. One or two attenuation plates in flangeless version (Type , see Figs. 3 and 4 or Type , see Fig. 5) or System of two to five attenuation plates in a body (Type x, see Figs. 1, 2, 6) Flow velocity reduction of compressible media at the valve outlet Used in conjunction with SAMSON Series 240 and Series 250 Valves Versions Type x Attenuation plates mounted between the valve and the pipe flange. The nominal size of the silencer can either be the same as the nominal valve size (Type , Fig. 3) or the same as the following expander (Type , Fig. 4). Depending on the K V /C V coefficient of the attenuation plates either Type or Type is used. Type A combination of the Type and Type , always with two attenuation plates. This version can only be used with certain K V /C V coefficient combinations as the attenuation plates are mounted directly between the valve and pipe flange, not requiring a separate housing. The pipe expander is not scope of the delivery of both versions (Type x and Type ). Type x Silencer with two to five attenuation plates located in one housing. The x in the type designation indicates the number of attenuation plates. A pipe expander similar to the Types x and is not required since it is already provided by the housing holding the attenuation plates. The scope of delivery includes all parts necessary for installation including bolts. Fig. 1 Type Control Valve with Type Silencer Other versions for Higher differential pressures On request Fig. 2 Type Data Sheet T 8084 EN

194 Principle of operation The Type 3381 Silencer provides noise attenuation by acting as a fixed restriction. The silencer raises the pressure of the medium flow at the valve outlet and reduces the pressure downstream of the silencer to the required downstream pressure p 2. As a result, the sound pressure level is reduced. In applications using compressible media, it additionally lowers the flow velocity at the valve outlet. The pressure reduction per attenuation plate (Δp) depends on the flow rate and the prevailing operating temperature. Generally, the pressure reduction is between 5 and 7 bar. A five-stage silencer (Type ) normally provides a maximum pressure drop of 35 bar. Selecting and sizing the silencer and the upstream control valve The silencer should always be sized together with the upstream control valve to achieve the best results. 1. Calculate appropriate K V coefficient according to IEC Select nominal valve size from Table Select materials, pressure and temperature from Table 1 and from the associated pressure-temperature diagram (see T EN). The number of attenuation plates and the nominal size is determined from the operating data at hand. Fig. 3 Type Dimensions The dimensions of Type x depend on the number of attenuation plates and the pressure rating. More details are available on request. Fig. 4 Type The following details are required on ordering: Operating pressure in bar (a), bar (g), psi (a), psi (g) at minimum, normal and maximum flow rate Flow rate in kg/h m³/h in standard or operating state at minimum, normal and maximum flow rate Process medium Density in kg/m³ and temperature in C or F Pipe diameter DN or NPS upstream and downstream of the silencer PN... According to DIN, ANSI or JIS Material According to Table 1 Others All other data required to size the control valve Fig. 5 Type Fig. 6 Sectional drawing of Type , five-stage 192 Data Sheet T 8084 EN

195 Table 1 Technical data Type x, Type and Type x Silencers Version according to DIN ANSI Material 1) Forged steel P250GH Stainless forged steel Forged steel A105 Stainless forged steel A182 F316 Nominal size (inlet) 2) DN NPS 2 16 Nominal pressure 3) PN Class Type of end connections All DIN flanges Flanges RF Temperature range 4) C F 1) Other materials on request 2) Available nominal sizes and possible combinations as listed in Table 2 3) Varying pressure ratings for inlet and outlet for Type x on request 4) Other temperature ranges for Type x and Type on request Table 2 Available nominal size combinations Nominal valve size (inlet) Outlet pipe nominal size DN NPS ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) 80 3 ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) Special version Specifications subject to change without notice. Data Sheet T 8084 EN

196

197 Steam-converting Valves Series 280 Pneumatic and electric steam converters for process engineering and industrial applications Pressure rating: PN 16 to PN 630 Class 150 to Class 2500 Valve size: DN 50 to DN 500 NPS 2 to NPS 20 Temperature: Up to 560 C Up to 1040 F 195

198

199 Series 280 Pneumatic Steam Converter Type and Type Steam-converting Valve Type 3281 and Type 3286 Application Final control element with either globe or angle valve for use in process engineering applications and thermal plants. Nominal size DN 50 to 200 Nominal pressure PN 16 to 160 Temperatures up to 500 C Conversion of valve sizing coefficients: C v (in U.S. gallons/min) = 1.17 K vs (in m 3 /h) K vs (in m 3 /h) = 0.86 C v (in U.S. gallons/min) Steam converters reduce the pressure and the temperature to the set point adjusted on the pressure and temperature controller (Fig. 1). They consist of a Type 3281 or Type 3286 Steam-converting Valve with: Type 3271 Pneumatic Actuator (Type or Type Steam Converters). The steam-converting valve largely corresponds to a Type 3251 Globe Valve (see Data Sheet T 8051 EN) or a Type 3256 Angle Valve (see Data Sheet T 8065 EN) equipped with a Flow Divider St III. Valve body material Cast steel or High-temperature cast steel. Low-noise valve plug Metal sealing Lapped-in metal or Pressure balanced to handle high differential pressures. Water supply via the Flow Divider St III ensures Full utilization of the kinetic energy of the steam for mixing and splitting up the spray water Fast evaporation independent of the steam flow Homogenous condition of the reduced and desuperheated steam No thermal shock or erosion by the supplied spray water because it has no contact with the valve body Low-vibration and low-noise operation The steam converters are based on the modular principle and can be combined with various accessories: Positioners, limit switches, solenoid valves and other accessories according to IEC and NAMUR recommendation (see Information Sheet T 8350 EN). Versions Standard version with PTFE packing for temperatures up to 220 C or with an adjustable high-temperature packing up to 350 C; nominal pressure PN 16 to 160; with Type 3271 Pneumatic Actuator (effective diaphragm area 350 to 2800 cm 2, see T EN and T EN). Type (Fig. 2) DN 50 to 200 Type DN 50 to 200 DN 250/300 on request Water Superheated steam 4 Fig. 2 Type Pneumatic Steam Converter 3 Further versions Nominal pressure PN >160 to 400 on request Welding ends according to DIN EN Insulating section for temperatures up to 500 C Type 3277 Pneumatic Actuator Effective diaphragm area 350 or 700 cm 2 on request (see T EN) Additional handwheel See Data Sheet T EN and T EN ANSI version NPS 2 to 8, Class 300 to Reduced and desuperheated steam 1 Transmitter 3 Steam converter 2 Controller 4 Control valve for spray water Fig. 1 Steam pressure/temperature control with steam converter Data Sheet T 8251 EN

200 Principle of operation (Figs. 3 and 4) The process medium flows through the valve in the direction indicated by the arrow. The position of the valve plug determines the cross-sectional area of flow between the valve seat (2) and the plug (3). The spray water has no contact with the valve body. It is piped to the Flow Divider St III (13) via the connecting pipe (5.5) and the annular chamber formed by the cage element (13.1). Having passed the throttling area between the valve seat and the plug, the steam flow reaches its maximum velocity and contacts the supplied spray water at the inner wall of the flow divider (13). The steam and the entrained water are split up and mixed in the close-mesh wire fabric of the flow divider. At the same time, the steam velocity is reduced, giving up heat which is transferred to the spray water across the the large surface area of the wire mesh coil, leading to quick evaporation. The steam water mixture leaves the flow divider as mist with a high steam content. Evaporation is completed a short distance downstream of the steam valve. The water atomization described is ensured over the entire load range, because the steam velocity at the throttling point is independent of flow. Water Superheated steam p 3 t p 13 1 p t 2 1 t2 Fail-safe action Depending on how the compression springs are arranged in the actuator (see Data Sheets T EN and T EN), the steam converter provides two different fail-safe positions which become effective upon air supply decrease or failure. "Actuator stem extends" Whenever the air supply fails, the valve closes. "Actuator stem retracts" Whenever the air supply fails, the valve opens. Fig. 3 Type Pneumatic Steam Converter with flanges and Type 3271 Actuator Water p 3 t p 2 t p 1 t 1 Superheated steam Legend of Figs. 3 and 4 2 Seat 3 Plug 5.5 Water connection 13 Flow Divider St III 13.1 Cage element Fig. 4 Type Pneumatic Steam Converter with welding ends and Type 3271 Actuator 198 Data Sheet T 8251 EN

201 Table 1 Technical data of the Type 3281 and Type 3286 Material Cast steel GS-C Nominal size DN 50 to 200 2) Cast steel GS-17 CrMo Nominal pressure 1) PN 16 to to 160 Type of connection Flanges All DIN versions Welding ends According to DIN 3239 Part 1 with edge form acc. to DIN 2559 Seat-plug sealing Metal sealing or lapped-in metal Characteristic Equal percentage or linear Rangeability 50 : 1 Temperature ranges in C Permissible operating pressures acc. to pressure-temperature diagrams (see Information Sheet T EN) Body without insulating section 10 to 220 Up to 350 C with high-temperature packing Body with Insulating section 10 to to 500 Bellows seal 10 to to 500 Valve plug Standard Metal sealing 200 to 500 Balanced with graphite ring 220 to 500 Leakage class acc. to DIN EN 1349 Valve plug Standard Metal sealing IV Balanced 1) Up to PN 400 on request 2) DN 200 in PN 40 to100 Lapped-in metal Metal sealing IV-S2 DN 100 and larger: IV-S1 With graphite ring: III Table 2 Materials Cast steel GS-C25 Standard version Body and flanges 1) Seat and plug 2) Metal-sealing / Sealing ring when Balanced Graphite Guide bushings Packing Body gasket Metal Cast steel GS-17 CrMo V-ring packing PTFE with carbon; spring: or high-temperature packing Insulating section 13 CrMo 44 1) See also pressure-temperature diagrams in T EN, materials for temperatures up to 500 C: GS-12 CrMo 910 (1.7380). 2) Seats and plugs also stellited, or plug of solid Stellite Table 3 Available Kvs coefficients Versions highlighted in gray are also available with balanced plug Kvs ) 270 1) Seat Travel DN Data Sheet T 8251 EN

202 Table 4a Permissible differential pressures Δp for valves with unbalanced, metal-seated plug Without metal bellows seal Values specified in the grey shaded columns apply to standard operation, i.e. rated travel Values specified in the white columns apply to maximum pretensioned springs Values in parentheses apply to half travel Table 4a Fail-safe position "Valve CLOSED" (FA) Bench range (bar) for actuator (cm 2 ) to to to 1.2 (0.8 to 1.2) 0.4 to to to 2.4 (1.6 to 2.4) 0.6 to to to to to to 3.6 (2.4 to 3.6) 1.0 to 3.0 (2.0 to 3.0) 1.4 to 2.3 (1.85 to 2.3) 1.1 to to 3.3 (2.7 to 3.3) 1.4 to 2.7 (2.05 to 2.7) 2.35 to to 4.3 (3.05 to 3.8) (3.45 to 4.3) 1.3 to to 3.2 (2.45 to 3.2) to 1.2 2x2800 (0.8 to 1.2) Required supply pressure DN Kvs 3 to to 2.4 (1.6 to 2.4) 1.0 to 3.0 (2.0 to 3.0) 1.2 to 3.6 (2.4 to 3.6) 0.9 to to 1.8 (1.25 to 1.6) 1.0 to 2.1 Upper spring range value bar Actuator cm 2 Δp when p2 = to 2.35 (1.55 to 2.1) 1.1 to to 3.0 (1.85 to 2.6) (105) (217) (328) (252) (370) (400) (62.7) (129) (196) (150) (221) (250) (284) (41.4) (85.8) (130) (99.7) (147) (166) (188) (49.2) (100) (126) (129) (155) (30.6) (62.9) (79.1) (81.1) (97.3) (18.8) (38.8) (48.8) (50.1) (60.1) (11.9) (24.7) (31.1) (31.9) (38.3) (11.8) (24.6) (31) (31.8) (38.2) (15.6) (32) (40.3) (48.5) (24.9) (31) (37.2) 2x2800 (31.2) (64) (80.6) (97) (49.8) (62) (74.4) (10.7) (22.2) (27.9) (33.6) (17.2) (21.5) (25.7) 2x2800 (21.4) (44.4) (55.8) (67.2) (34.4) 43 (51.4) 200 Data Sheet T 8251 EN

203 Table 4b Permissible differential pressures Δp for valves with unbalanced, metal-seated plug Without metal bellows seal Table 4b Fail-safe position "Valve OPEN" (FE) 350 Bench range (bar) for actuator (cm 2 ) x to 1.0 (0.2 to 0.6) Required supply pressure DN Kvs Actuator cm 2 Δp when p2 = to (105) (244) (400) ) ) ) (62.5) (146) (280) (41) (97) (185) (49) (113) (216) (30.4) (71) (135) (18.7) (43.7) (84) (134) (11.8) (27.8) (53.5) (85) (11.6) (27.7) (53.3) (85) (15.5) (36.1) (69) 2x2800 (31) (72) (138) (10.7) (25) (47.8) 2x2800 (21.4) (50) (95.6) Limits of application The Type 3281 and Type 3286 have a broad range of application. However, optimum operation can only be guaranteed when the following operational conditions are provided (for absolute pressures p abs in bar): Pressure ratio X = Δp/p Water pressure (p 3) at connecting flange (5.5): p 3 p p 1 The water pressure upstream of the control valve (4) illustrated in Fig. 1 must be higher than p 3. The pressure must be selected carefully so that efficient control of the supplied water is ensured over the entire operating range. The steam converter can only be used when the superheated steam and the spray water contain no or only small-sized suspended matter. For further details, please refer to the Information Sheet T 8250 EN. Selection and sizing of the steam converter The steam converters require particularly careful sizing. SAMSON therefore assumes the final sizing of the valves. 1. The ideal K v coefficient is calculated acc. to IEC The nominal size and K vs coefficient are selected acc. to Table The permissible differential pressure Δp is determined and the suitable actuator selected acc. to the Tables 4a to 5b. 4. The steam converters are selected considering material, pressures and temperatures acc. to Tables 1 and 2 and also acc. to the associated pressure-temperature diagram (see T EN). 5. Accessories are selected acc. to Tables 1 and 2. 1) Only for Type 3281 Data Sheet T 8251 EN

204 Table 5 Permissible differential pressures Δp for valves with balanced, metal-seated plug with PTFE ring Without metal bellows seal Values specified in the grey shaded columns apply to standard operation, i.e. rated travel Values specified in the white columns apply to maximum pretensioned springs Values in parentheses apply to half travel Table 5a Fail-safe position "Valve CLOSED" (FA) Table 5b "Valve OPEN" (FE) to to 3.6 Bench range (bar) for actuator (cm 2 ) x to to 2.4 (1.6 to 2.4) 0.5 to to 3.0 (2.0 to 3.0) 0.6 to to 3.6 (2.4 to 3.6) 0.4 to 2.0 (0.4 to 1.2) Required supply pressure Upper spring range value bar DN Kvs Actuator cm 2 Δp when p2 = (298) (378) (218) (400) (293) (373) (213) (400) 200 1) (114) (145) (82.6) (207) (363) 200 1) (236) (298) (361) (174) (400) 2x2800 (400) (400) (400) (348) (400) 200 1) (234) (296) (359) (172) (400) 2x2800 (400) (400) (400) (344) (400) 1) Only for Type 3281 Table 6 Dimensions and weights for Type Globe Valve in standard version Valve size DN Length L PN 10 to PN 63 to cm H1 700 cm with actuator 1400 cm cm H2 PN 10 to PN 63 to Weight without actuator (appx. kg) PN 16 to PN 63 to Data Sheet T 8251 EN

205 Table 7 Dimensions and weights for Type 3286 Angle Valve in standard version Valve size DN Length L2 PN 10 to PN 63 to H1 with actuator 350 cm cm cm cm Weight without actuator (appx. kg) PN 16 to PN 63 to On request Table 8 Dimensions and weights for Type 3271 Pneumatic Actuator Actuator size cm x 2800 Diaphragm D H 1) H3 2) Thread d M 30 x 1.5 M 60 x 1.5 M 100 x 2 Thread a G 3 8 (NPT 3 8) G 3 4 (NPT 3 4) G 1 (NPT 1) Weights (kg) Without handwheel With handwheel Only with side-mounted handwheel, see T EN. 1) Actuator 350 cm 2 without lifting ring 2) Minimum clearance for actuator disassembly H3 ØD a ØD a H3 H d H H1 H1 H6 L3 H6 L3 H2 L2 L2 Type Type Dimensions H6 and L3 for spray water connection available on request. Data Sheet T 8251 EN

206 Table 9 Dimensions and weights for Type 3281 Globe Valve in standard version with insulating section Without actuator Valve size DN cm Height H4 with actuator 700 cm cm cm Weight (kg) w/o actuator for PN 16 to PN 63 to Table 10 Dimensions and weights for Type 3286 Angle Valve in standard version with insulating section Without actuator Valve size DN cm Height H4 with actuator 700 cm cm cm Weight (kg) w/o actuator for PN 16 to PN 63 to On request H4 H4 Type with insulating section Type with insulating section Please submit the following details on ordering: Steam converter Type 3281 Globe Valve or Type 3286 Angle Valve Nominal size DN... Nominal pressure PN... Body material As indicated in Table 2 Type of connection Flanges or welding ends Plug Standard or balanced Characteristic Equal percentage or linear Max. and min. flow rate of the superheated and desuperheated steam Steam temperature upstream and downstream of the valve p 1 and t 1 as well as p 2 and t 2 in kg/h or t/h t 1 t 2 Pressure and temperature of spray water upstream of the valve p 3 and t 3 Actuator Type 3271 Effective actuator area... cm 2 Fail-safe position Accessories Valve CLOSED or valve OPEN Positioner and/or limit switch Specifications subject to change without notice. 204 Data Sheet T 8251 EN

207 Series 280 Pneumatic Steam Converter Type Steam-converting Valve Type 3284 Application Final control element with globe valve for use in process engineering applications and thermal plants. Nominal size DN 100 to 400 Nominal pressure PN 16 to 160 Temperatures Up to 500 C Steam converters reduce the pressure and temperature to the set point adjusted on the pressure and temperature controller (Fig. 1). They consist of a Type 3284 Steam-converting Valve with: Type 3271 Pneumatic Actuator (Type Steam Converter). The steam-converting valve largely corresponds to a singleseate Type 3254 Globe Valve (see Data Sheet T 8060 EN) equipped with a Flow Divider St III. Valve body material Cast steel or High-temperature cast steel Low-noise valve plug Metal-sealing or Lapped-in metal Balanced for handling high differential pressures Additional plug stem guide in the lower body flange Water supply via the Flow Divider St III ensures Full utilization of the kinetic energy of the steam for mixing and splitting up the spray water Fast evaporation independent of the steam flow rate Homogenous condition of the reduced, desuperheated steam No thermal shock or erosion by the supplied spray water because it has no contact with the valve body Low-vibration and low-noise operation The steam converters are based on the modular principle and can be equipped with the following accessories: Positioners, limit switches, solenoid valves and other accessories according to IEC and NAMUR recommendation (see Information Sheet T 8350 EN). Versions Standard version with PTFE packing for temperatures up to 220 C, or with an adjustable high-temperature packing up to 350 C; nominal pressure PN 16 to 160; with Type 3271 Pneumatic Actuator (effective diaphragm area 350 to 2800 cm 2, see T EN and T EN). Type (Fig. 2) DN 100 to 400 Water Superheated steam 4 Fig. 2 Type Steam Converter 3 Additional versions Nominal pressure PN >160 to 400 On request Welding ends according to DIN EN Insulating section for temperatures up to 500 C Additional handwheel See Data Sheet T /-2 EN ANSI version NPS 4 to 16, ANSI Class 300 to 2500, details on request. 2 1 Reduced and desuperheated steam 1 Transmitter 3 Steam converter 2 Controller 4 Control valve for spray water Fig. 1 Steam pressure/temperature control with steam converter Data Sheet T 8254 EN

208 Principle of operation (Figs. 3 and 4) The process medium flows through the valve in the direction indicated by the arrow. The position of the valve plug determines the cross-sectional area of flow between the valve seat (2) and the plug (3). The spray water does not have contact with the valve body. It is piped to the Flow Divider St III (13) through the connecting pipe (5.5) and the annular chamber formed by the cage element (13.1). After having passed the throttling point between the valve seat and the plug, the steam flow reaches its maximum velocity and contacts the supplied water at the inner wall of the flow divider (13). The steam and the entrained water are split up and mixed in the close-mesh wire fabric of the flow divider. At the same time, the steam velocity is reduced, giving up heat which is transferred to the spray water across the large surface of the wire mesh coil, leading to quick evaporation. The steam-water mixture leaves the flow divider as mist with a high steam content. Evaporation is completed a short distance downstream of the steam-converting valve. Water atomization as described above is ensured over the entire load range, because the steam velocity at the throttling point is independent of flow. Water Superheated steam 5.5 p 3 t3 p 1 p 2 t t Fail-safe action Depending on how the compression springs are arranged in the actuator (see T EN and T EN), the steam converter provides two different fail-safe positions which become effective when the air supply decreases or fails. "Actuator stem extends" Whenever air supply fails, the valve closes. "Actuator stem retracts" Whenever air supply fails, the valve opens. Fig. 3 Type Pneumatic Steam Converter with flanges, standard plug and Type 3271 Actuator 5.5 Water p 3 t Superheated steam p 1 p 2 t 1 t2 2 3 Legend of Figs. 3 and 4 2 Seat 3 Plug 5.5 Connecting pipe 13 Flow Divider St III 13.1 Cage element Fig. 4 Type Pneumatic Steam Converter with flanges and balanced plug 206 Data Sheet T 8254 EN

209 Table 1 Technical data for Type 3284 Material Cast steel GS-C Nominal size DN 100 to 400 Cast steel GS-17 CrMo Nominal pressure 1) PN 16 to to 160 Type of connection Flanges All DIN versions Welding ends According to DIN 3239 Part 1 with edge form acc. to DIN 2559 Seat-plug seal Metal-sealing or lapped-in metal Characteristic Equal percentage or linear Rangeability 50 : 1 Temperature ranges in C Permissible operating pressures acc. to pressure-temperature diagrams (see Information Sheet T EN) Body without insulating section 10 to 220 Up to 350 C with high-temperature packing Body with Insulating section 10 to to 500 Bellows seal 10 to to 500 Valve plug Standard Metal sealing 200 to 500 Balanced Graphite ring 220 to 500 Leakage class acc. to DIN EN 1349 Valve plug Standard Metal-sealing IV Lapped-in metal IV-S2 DN 100 and larger: IV-S1 Metal-sealing With graphite ring: III 1) Up to PN 400 on request Table 2 Materials Cast steel GS-C25 Standard version Body and flanges 1) Seat and plug 2) Metal-sealing / Sealing ring when Balanced Graphite Guide bushings Packing Body gasket Metal Insulating section 13 CrMo 44 1) See also pressure-temperature diagrams in T EN, materials for temperatures up to 500 C: GS-17 CrMo V511 (1.7706). 2) Seats and plugs also stellited, or plug of solid Stellite Cast steel GS-17 CrMo PTFE V-ring packing with carbon, spring of , or high-temperature packing Table 3 Available K vs coefficients Versions highlighted in gray also available with balanced plug Kvs Seat mm Travel mm DN Data Sheet T 8254 EN

210 Table 4a Permissible differential pressures Δp for valves with unbalanced, metal-seated plug Without metal bellows seal; fail-safe position "Valve CLOSED" Values specified in the grey shaded columns apply to standard operation, i.e. at rated travel Values specified in the white columns apply to maximum pretensioned springs Values in parentheses apply to half travel Table 4a Fail-safe position "Valve CLOSED" (FA) Bench range (bar) for actuator (cm 2 ) to to 1.2 2x2800 (0.8 to 1.2) 0.4 to 1.2 (0.8 to 1.2) 0.8 to 2.4 (1.6 to 2.4) 0.4 to to 3.0 (2.0 to 3.0) 0.8 to 2.4 (1.6 to 2.4) 1.2 to 3.6 (2.4 to 3.6) 0.6 to to to to 3.6 (2.4 to 3.6) 1.0 to 3.0 (2.0 to 3.0) 1.1 to 1.8 (1.25 to 1.6) 1.4 to 2.3 (1.85 to 2.3) 1.1 to to to 3.3 (2.7 to 3.3) 1.4 to 2.7 (2.05 to 2.7) 1.25 to 2.35 (1.55 to 2.1) 2.35 to to 4.3 (3.05 to 3.8) (3.45 to 4.3) 1.3 to to to 3.2 (2.45 to 3.2) 1.5 to 3.0 (1.85 to 2.6) Required supply pressure DN Kvs to Upper spring range value bar Actuator cm 2 Δp when p2 = (30.7) (63) (79.2) (81.2) (97.4) (30.4) (62.8) (78.9) (81) (97.1) (18.7) (38.7) (48.8) (50) (60) (11.6) (24.5) (30.9) (31.7) (38.1) 200 to to to to (15.5) (32) (40.2) (48.4) (24.7) (30.9) (37.1) 2x2800 (33) (64) (80.2) (96.8) (49.4) (61.8) (74.2) (10.7) (22.1) (27.8) (33.5) (17.1) (21.4) (25.7) 2x2800 (21.4) (44.2) (55.6) (67) (34.2) (42.8) (51.4) (5.9) (12.3) (15.5) (18.8) (9.5) (11.9) (14.3) 2x2800 (11.8) (24.6) (31) (37.6) (19) (23.8) (28.6) x x Data Sheet T 8254 EN

211 Table 4b Permissible differential pressures Δp for valves with unbalanced, metal-seated plug Without metal bellows seal Fail-safe position "Valve OPEN" Table 4b Fail-safe position "Valve OPEN" (FE) Bench range (bar) for actuator (cm 2 ) x to 1.0 (0.2 to 0.6) Required supply pressure DN Kvs to to to to Actuator (cm 2 ) Δp when p2 = (30.7) (71) (136) (30.6) (71) (136) (216) (18.7) (43.7) (83.8) (134) (11.8) (27.8) (53.5) (85.6) (15.5) (36.1) (68.9) 2x2800 (31) (72) (138) (10.7) (25) (47.8) 2x2800 (21.4) (50) (95.6) (5.9) (13.9) (26.8) (42.8) 2x2800 (11.8) (27.8) (53.6) x Limits of application The Type 3284 Steam-converting Valve has a broad range of application. However, optimum operation can only be guaranteed when the following operational conditions are provided (with absolute pressures p abs in bar): Pressure ratio X = Δp/p Water pressure (p 3) at the connecting flange (5.5): p 3 p p 1 The water pressure upstream of the control valve (4) illustrated in Fig. 1 must be higher than p 3. The pressure must be selected carefully so that efficient control of the supplied water is ensured over the entire operating range. The steam converter can only be used when the superheated steam and the spray water contain no or only small-sized suspended matter. For further details, refer to the Information Sheet T 8250 EN. Selection and sizing of the steam converter The steam converters require particularly careful sizing. SAMSON therefore assumes the final sizing of the valves. 1. The ideal K v coefficient is calculated acc. to IEC The nominal size and K vs coefficient are selected acc. to Table The permissible differential pressure Δp is determined and the suitable actuator selected acc. to Tables 4a to 5b. 4. The steam converters are selected considering material, pressure and temperature acc. to Tables 1 and 2, and also acc. to the associated pressure-temperature diagram (see T EN) x Data Sheet T 8254 EN

212 Table 5 Permissible differential pressures Δp for valves with metal-seated plug balanced by PTFE ring Without metal bellows seal Values specified in the grey shaded columns apply to standard operation, i.e. at rated travel Values specified in the white columns apply to maximum pretensioned springs Values in parentheses apply to half travel Table 5a Fail-safe position "Valve CLOSED" Bench range (bar) with actuator (cm 2 ) x to to to to to 2.4 (1.6 to 2.4) 0.5 to to 3.0 (2.0 to 3.0) 0.6 to to 3.6 (2.4 to 3.6) 5b "Valve OPEN" 0.4 to 2.0 (0.4 to 1.2) Required supply pressure Upper spring range value bar DN Kvs to Actuator cm 2 Δp when p2 = (400) (400) (400) (400) (400) (297) (378) (218) (400) (400) (293) (373) (213) (400) (400) (236) (298) (361) (174) (400) (400) 200 to to (234) (296) (359) (172) (400) (400) 2x2800 (400) (400) (400) (344) (400) (400) (230) (292) (355) (167) (400) (400) 2x2800 (400) (400) (400) (334) (400) (400) x Table 6 Dimensions in mm for Type in standard version Valve size DN Length L PN 10 to PN 63 to H1 700 cm with actuator 1400 cm cm H2 PN 10 to PN 63 to Actuator cm x 2800 Diaphragm D H H3 1) Thread M 30 x 1.5 M 60 x 1.5 M 100 x 2 a (Type 3271 Actuator) G 3 8 (NPT 3 8) G 3 4 (NPT 3 4) G 1 (NPT 1) a2 (Type 3277 Actuator) G 3 8 (NPT 3 8) 1) Minimum clearance for actuator disassembly 210 Data Sheet T 8254 EN

213 Table 7 Weights for Type 3284 in standard version Valve size DN Valve without PN 16 to actuator (approx. kg) PN 63 to On request Actuator cm x 2800 Type 3271 (approx. kg) Without With handwheel 27 Only with side-mounted handwheel, see T EN Table 8 Dimensions and weights for Type 3284 in standard version with insulating section Without actuator Valve size DN Height H4 with actuator Weight (kg) w/o actuator for 700 cm cm cm PN 16 to PN 63 to On request H3 ØD a H H4 H1 H6 H2 Type Type with insulating section Dimensions H6 and L3 for spray water connection on request Please submit the following details on ordering Steam converter Type 3284 Globe Valve Nominal size DN... Nominal pressure PN... Body material As indicated in Table 2 Type of connection Flanges or welding ends Plug Standard or balanced Characteristic Equal percentage or linear Max. and min. flow rate of the superheated and desuperheated steam p 1 and t 1 as well as p 2 and t 2 in kg/h or t/h Steam temperature upstream and downstream of the valve Pressure and temperature of spray water upstream of the valve t 1 t 2 p 3 and t 3 Actuator Type 3271 Effective actuator area... cm 2 Fail-safe position "Valve CLOSED" or "Valve OPEN" Accessories Positioner and/or limit switch Specifications subject to change without notice. Data Sheet T 8254 EN

214

215 W&T Series Steam-converting Valve Type DUV-C3 Application Steam-converting valve for power stations and industrial plants Inlet: DN 80 to 500 NPS 3 to 20 PN 16 to 630 Class 150 to 2500 (4500) Outlet: DN 100 to 1600 NPS 4 to 64 PN 16 to 100 Class 150 to 900 Temperatures: up to 560 C up to 1040 F Type DUV-C3 Steam-converting Valve with Type 3271 Pneumatic Actuator (refer to T /-2 EN) Valve body made of Forged steel (A105) Heat-resisting forged steel , (A 182 F12) or (A 182 F22) Special features Perforated plug with controlled pressure reduction in two or more stages One or more attenuation plates providing uncontrolled pressure reduction Integrated atomizing steam cooler Welding ends Angle-style valve body Pure graphite packing Versions Standard version Angle valve body with welding ends for steam temperatures up to 560 C (1040 F) Inlet: nominal sizes DN 80 to 500 (NPS 3 to 20), nominal pressures PN 16 to 630 (Class 150 to 2500 (4500)) Outlet: nominal sizes DN 100 to 1600 (NPS 4 to 64), nominal pressures PN 16 to 100 (Class 150 to 900) Further versions On request Pressure-balanced plug Electric actuator Hydraulic actuator Temperatures >560 C (>1040 F) Fig. 1 Type DUV-C3 Steam-converting Valve with Type 3271 Pneumatic Actuator Data Sheet T 9934 EN

216 Principle of operation When the perforated plug leaves its seat, the steam inlet bores of the first controlled stage are opened, and steam is admitted into the central chamber. From there, it passes into the atomizing steam cooler through bores at the bottom of the chamber. As the perforated cylinder has only moved a short distance (<20 % of the total travel), the bores for the second stage pressure drop are not yet released. This ensures that adequate steam always flows to the atomizing steam cooler, eliminating the risk of water droplets inadvertently being injected into the system. As the perforated plug continues to lift, more steam inlet bores are released in a pattern corresponding to the desired opening characteristic. Once the perforated plug has lifted more than 20 %, the bores for the second controlled stage are opened, allowing steam to flow from the central chamber through the second stage bores, and into the throttling cylinder. This pressure reduced steam flows through the uncontrolled perforated attenuation plates for further pressure reduction, and continues downstream to the temperature sensor. When the steam comes into contact with the temperature sensor, a signal is sent to the spray water control valve, opening the valve and admitting spray water into the steam cooler. This spray water is atomized by the kinetic energy of the steam, which is continuously flowing through the cooler. The atomized water is instantly vaporized by the superheated steam. The flow from the second controlled stage passes through the perforated attenuation plates, and comes in contact with the flow from the atomizing steam cooler. Here the two flows mix, ensuring total evaporation of the spray water. This completes both the pressure and temperature reduction. The perforated attenuation plates installed after the second controlled stage, provide additional pressure drop, noise reduction, and lower outlet velocity. Fig. 2 Cutaway of the Type DUV-C3 Steam-converting Valve Figures 2 and 3 show possible versions of the Type DUV-C3 Steam-converting Valve. Fig. 3 Type DUV-C3 Steam-converting Valve 214 Data Sheet T 9934 EN

217 Table 1 Technical data Inlet Outlet Nominal size DN 80 to 500 NPS 3 to 20 DN 100 to 1600 NPS 4 to 64 Materials /A /A 182 F /A 182 F22 End connection Welding ends in all versions Min. pressure ratio 1) p2 p1 Three stages: <0.25 Four stages: <0.15 Nominal pressure PN 16 to 630 Class 150 to 2500 (4500) PN 16 to 100 Class 150 to 900 Seat-plug seal Characteristic Pressure reduction Metal sealing Leakage class IV Equal percentage or linear Perforated plug provides controlled pressure reduction in two stages Additionally, one or two attenuation plates provide uncontrolled pressure reduction Rangeability 1 : 50 1) For different pressure ratios, contact SAMSON. Table 2 Materials Standard version Inlet Outlet Nominal pressure PN 16 to 630 Class 150 to 2500 (4500) PN 16 to 100 Class 150 to 900 Body /A /A 182 F /A 182 F22 Seat and plug Guide bushing Packing Body gasket Pure graphite Camprofile (serrated) gasket Table 3 K vs and C v coefficients available K vs C v Seat Ø mm Travel mm Flow cross-section First stage Second stage cm² in² cm² in² Data Sheet T 9934 EN

218 Table 4 Dimensions for Type DUV-C3 Steam-converting Valve (in mm and inch) K vs C v Seat Ø in mm Inlet: DN E DN NPS A Outlet: DN A DN NPS B C D E Spray water Ø mm/ ½ mm/ mm/ mm mm/ mm/ mm mm mm/ ½ mm/ mm/ mm mm/ mm/ mm mm mm/ mm/ mm/ mm mm/ mm/ mm/ mm mm 1½ mm/ mm/ mm/ mm mm/ mm/ mm/ mm mm 1½ mm/ mm/ mm/ mm/ mm 350 mm/ mm/ mm/ mm mm 1½ mm/ mm/ mm mm/ mm/ mm/ mm/ mm/ mm/ mm/ mm/ mm mm 1½ mm/ mm/ mm/ mm/ mm/ mm/ mm/ mm/ mm/ mm/ mm/ mm/ mm/ mm/ mm/ mm/ mm/ mm/ mm/ mm/ mm mm mm/ mm/ mm/ mm/ mm/ mm/ Data Sheet T 9934 EN

219 K vs C v Seat Ø in mm Inlet: DN E DN NPS A Outlet: DN A DN NPS B C D E Spray water Ø mm/ mm/ mm/ mm/ mm/ mm/ mm/ mm/ mm/ mm/ mm/ mm/ mm/ mm/ mm/ mm/ mm/ mm/ mm mm mm/ mm/ mm/ mm/ mm/ mm/ mm/ mm/ mm/ mm/ mm/ mm/ mm/ mm/ mm/ mm/ mm/ mm/ mm/ mm/ mm/ mm/ mm mm 2½ mm/ mm/ mm/ mm/ mm/ mm/ mm/ mm/ mm/ mm/ mm/ mm/ mm/ mm/ mm/ mm/ mm/ mm/ mm mm 2½ mm/ mm/ mm/ mm/ mm/ mm/ mm/ mm/ mm/ mm/ mm/ mm/ mm/ mm/ mm/ mm/ mm/ mm/ mm mm 2½ mm/ mm/ mm/26 Data Sheet T 9934 EN

220 C DNE D A DNA Fig. 4 Dimension diagram of Type DUV-C3 Steam-converting Valve with Type 3271Pneumatic Actuator E B Ordering text Steam-converting Valve Type DUV-C3 Body material acc. to Table 3 End connection welding ends Inlet: nominal size DN... nominal pressure PN... Outlet: nominal size DN... nominal pressure PN... Perforated attenuation plates... pieces Perforated plug... stages standard or pressure-balanced plug Characteristic Equal percentage or linear Pneumatic actuator Type 3271 (T EN or T EN) Fail-safe action Valve CLOSED or OPEN Flow rate in kg/h or m 3 /h in standard or operating status Pressure p 1 in bar absolute pressure p abs p 2 in bar absolute pressure p abs at minimum, standard or maximum flow rate Accessories Positioner, position transmitter, limit switch Specifications subject to change without notice. 218 Data Sheet T 9934 EN

221 Type Water Bath Desuperheater for desuperheating superheated steam to saturated steam temperature General Water bath desuperheaters are used if processes have to be heated with saturated steam, but where only superheated steam is available which must be desuperheated to saturated steam temperature. This is not possible with steam converting valves or injection desuperheaters, since it is possible to desuperheat only down to approx. 5 C above saturated steam temperature with these. If the pressure of the available steam is too high or an adjustable saturated steam pressure is required, the water bath desuperheater can be designed in addition with pressure control. Processes which are heated with saturated steam frequently require only small quantities of steam, but with delivery fluctuations between 0 and 100 %. Here the water bath desuperheater is ideally suitable, since it guarantees perfect desuperheating over the entire load range. Applications in which the product has to be heated directly with saturated steam are for example: Agers and decatizing vessels in the textile industry Pasteurizers in the food industry Sterilizers in the chemical industry Steam boxes in the paper industry Applications in which the products have to be heated through heat exchanger surfaces where overheating of the product must be surely avoided are for example: Heat exchangers for pasteurizers and sterilizers in the food industry Heating systems for dry rolls in the paper industry Heating systems for reaction vessels and pipelines in the chemical industry The Type water bath desuperheater has the following features: Desuperheating superheated steam to saturated steam temperature Pressure reduction of superheated steam Control range % Operating overpressure max. 11 bar, higher pressure on request Saturated steam pressure max. 11 bar, higher pressure on request Saturated steam temperature max. 187 C Steam throughput max. 40 t/h, depending on the saturated steam pressure Pressure vessel made from H II (mat. no ) or CrNiTi (mat. no ) Pressure vessel with German Technical Inspectorate Certificate, other certificates on request Version with fastening supports Version with liquid level control Version with liquid level control and pressure control Version with liquid level control, pressure control and process temperature control Version as complete system, ready for connection assembled in a frame Construction The Type water bath desuperheater consists of a pressure vessel [1], which is protected against thermal losses with an insulation [2]. The superheated steam flows from above through a pipe [7] into the interior of a flow divider [4], which is com- Fig. 1 Construction Fig. 2 Superheated steam Cooling water 7 Saturated steam 8 Overflow pletly surrounded by cooling water. The cooling water is fed in from below through a pipe [3] into the pressure vessel [1]. The steam arising bubbles out from the flow divider [4] at the water surface and escapes as saturated steam. The saturated steam is carried out from the pressure vessel [1] through a pipe [8]. The liquid level of the cooling water is monitored with two limit switches [5] and [6]. An overflow [9] is fitted above the maximum liquid level in order to avoid overfilling of the pressure vessel [1] on failure of the liquid level control system Data Sheet B 016 EN

222 Operation Water bath desuperheater with liquid level control The superheated steam is introduced into the cooling water. In this case the superheating heat is transferred into the cooling water which is converted into saturated steam when the boiling temperature is reached. The evaporated portion is replaced by cooling water with a liquid level control system. On reaching the minimum liquid level, the condensate valve [1.4] is opened via a limit switch [1.3] and closed when the maximum liquid level is reached. On failure of the liquid level control system the cooling water is diverted through a condensate diverter [1.6]. Pressure regulation Saturated steam pressure and saturated steam temperature are associated with one another physically. In the version with pressure regulation, the saturated steam pressure is converted into a measurement signal which is conducted to a pressure controller [2.3] through a pressure transmitter [2.2]. The output signal of the pressure controller [2.3] operates the steam pressure control valve [2.5] through a positioner [2.4]. Thus the pressure of the superheated steam can be reduced and cooled to desuperheated steam temperature. Process temperature control In the version with process temperature control the measurement signal of a temperature sensor [3.1] is conducted to a temperature controller [3.2], the output signal of which operates the temperature control valve [3.4] through a positioner [3.3]. In this case the pressure drop at the temperature control valve [3.4] must be kept low so that the saturated steam temperature is as close as possible to the load temperature to be controlled. Safety equipment The operating pressure in the pressure vessel [1.1] of the water bath desuperheater is limited to the permissible value by means of a safety valve [2.6.3]. A safety pressure limiter [2.7.1] and a safety temperature limiter [2.7.2] ensure that the pressure and temperature at the saturated steam outlet do not exceed the permissible values. Whenever the pressure and temperature reach the respective limit values, the steam pressure control valve [2.5] is closed via a solenoid valve [2.7.3]. Operating diagram P P PIC TIC Superheated steam T T P STB SDB 2.2 P Saturated steam T P Overflow Process P 4 Cooling water Drain Auxiliary energy Fig Data Sheet B 016 EN

223 Versions and ordering data Versions (Fig. 3) 1. Water bath desuperheater with liquid level control 1.1 Pressure vessel made from material H II (mat. no ) CrNiTi (mat. no ) 1.2 Liquid level meter 1.3 Limit switch 1.4 Condensate valve 1.5 Strainer 1.6 Condensate diverter 1.7 In addition for the cooling water feed Non-return valve Manual shut-off valve inlet Manual shut-off valve emptying Pressure gauge 2. Pressure regulation with without 2.1 High pressure shut-off valve 2.2 Pressure transmitter 2.3 Pressure controller 2.4 Positioner 2.5 Steam pressure control valve 2.6 In addition for the steam inlet Strainer Manual shut-off valve Safety valve Pressure gauge Thermometer 2.7 In addition for the steam outlet Safety pressure limiter Safety temperature limiter Solenoid valve (in addition for or 2.7.2) Pressure gauge Thermometer Condensate diverter Operating data Superheated steam p1 min =... bar abs p1 max =... bar abs t1 min =... C t1 max =... C Saturated steam p2 min =... bar abs q m min =... kg/h p2 max =... bar abs q m max =... kg/h Cooling water Drinking water Boiler feed water Boiler feed water, desalinated... p3 min =... bar abs p3 max =... bar abs t3 min =... C t3 max =... C Instrumentation pneumatic electropneumatic electronic, with electrical servo drives Auxiliary energy Instrument air U =... V p =... bar f =... Hz 3. Process temperature control with without 3.1 Temperature sensor 3.2 Temperature controller 3.3 Positioner 3.4 Temperature control valve 4. Service unit with without 5. Control cabinet with without 6. Frame with without 7. Insulation for pressure vessel with without Data Sheet B 016 EN

224 Installation examples Heating agers in the textile industry (Fig. 4) P Statement of the problem An ager for coloured textile webs has to be heated with steam in a temperature range of 100 to 110 C. The steam may only be slightly overheated in order to avoid stains forming on the textile webs at the entry places into the ager. In addition, the steam must be dry so that no water stains can occcur. Superheated steam STB SDB PIC P Solution of the problem Superheated steam is reduced in pressure and desuperheated to saturated steam temperature in a water bath desuperheater with liquid level control and electropneumatic pressure regulation. The cooling water is fed into the pressure vessel from a separate water network. The temperature of the ager is kept constant even on load changes (e. g. changing running speeds or changing specific weight of the textile webs) with a a process temperature control. The maximum temperature of the ager is limited by the set saturated steam pressure. In order to avoid overheating of the ager in the case of the fault, the temperature control valve is designed for a slight pressure drop so that the saturated steam temperature is as close as possible to the ager temperature to be controlled. The components of the water bath desuperheater are installed in a frame ready for connection as complete system. Cooling water Overflow Drain Saturated steam Heating vessels and pipelines in the chemical industry (Fig. 5) Statement of the problem The vessel and the pipelines of a SO 3 - conditioning plant have to be heated with steam and the heating temperature must be kept within tight limits. The condensate arising on heating should be used as cooling medium. Fig. 4: Heating agers Solution of the problem Superheated steam is reduced in pressure and desuperheated to saturated steam temperature in a water bath desuperheater with liquid level control and electropneumatic pressure regulation. The hot condensate arising on heating the vessel and the pipelines is conduced into a pressureless collecting vessel and cooled down by the ambient air. Excess condensate is delivered to the condensate network through an overflow. The flash steam arising on condensate diversion is diverted over the roof. The cooled condensate is fed into the pressure vessel of the water bath desuperheater as cooling medium using cooling water pressure elevating pumps. Thus the collecting vessel has to be filled with cooling water only before the first time the plant is started up. A safety pressure limiter is installed at the steam inlet and a safety limiter at the steam outlet to protect the plant. The cooling water pressure elevating pumps are equipped with dry running protection and automatic fault switchover. The components of the water bath desuperheater are installed in a frame ready for connection as complete system. Cooling water PI TI LC SHL LI S SAL SB S SAL Superheated steam SAL M PIC SB S SAL Saturated steam TI SAHL (Subject to modification) Fig. 5: Heating vessels and pipelines 222 Data Sheet B 016 EN

225 Actuators Pneumatic, electric and electrohydraulic actuators for control valves and butterfly valves Diaphragm actuators with effective areas up to 2800 cm 2 Electric actuators with nominal thrusts up to 87 kn Electrohydraulic linear actuators with nominal thrusts up to 7.3 kn Hand-operated actuators Information Sheet T 8300 EN

226 Selection and application Actuators convert the instrument control signal supplied by an automation device (controller, control station, process control system) into a linear or rotary motion used to position the final control element - e.g., the valve plug of a control valve - in direct proportion to the control signal received. With control valves, this converted motion may be either a linear, upward or downward motion. For butterfly valves, ball valves or rotary plug valves, this may be a rotary motion up to 70 opening angle for control operation. For on-off (two-position) operation, this may be a rotary motion up to 90. The actuator together with the valve constitute the complete control valve assembly, commonly referred to as the control valve. To match system requirements, the actuators can be equipped with a wide range of transfer elements, e.g. positioners, converters, solenoid valves, position transmitters and limit switches. For details on selecting the additional equipment, see Information Sheet T 8350 EN. Application and instrumentation Pneumatic actuators are field-proven, require little maintenance, and are inexpensive devices intended for pneumatic or electropneumatic instrumentation. Accessories, such as positioners or converters, also act as servo-boosters because they convert the low-volume output signal y (0.2 to 1 bar) received from a controller into a powerful signal pressure p st up to 6 bar (90 psi). Electric and electrohydraulic actuators are primarily used in applications where compressed air is not available. A series of modules can also be added to the actuators, permitting them to be customized to specific control tasks. A Pneumatic B Electropneumatic C Electric instrumentation instrumentation instrumentation A1 B1 C1 C3 Instrumentation Instrumentation Instrumentation Electrohydraulic actuator without a positioner with an i/p converter with an AC motor with a three-point stepping Signal range bar Signal press. p st < 6 bar 230 V ~ input signal ( psi) (90 psi) p st to 1 bar 3 to 15 psi 2 4 to 20 ma y 8 4 A2 B2 C2 C4 Instrumentation Instrumentation Instrumentation Electrohydraulic actuator with a pneumatic positioner with an i/p positioner with a reversing contactor with an electric analog Signal pressure p st < 6 bar Signal pressure p st < 6 bar and three-phase AC motor control signal (90 psi) (90 psi) 380 V ~ to 1 bar 4 to 20 ma 3 to 15 psi y 4 to 20 ma Also possible with fieldbus control Legend for Figs. A1 to C4 1 Pneumatic controller 3 Electric controller or automation 5 Electric control valve 8 i/p converter 2 Electric controller or automation system with three-point output 6 Electrohydraulic control valve 9 i/p positioner system with ma output 4 Pneumatic control valve 7 Pneumatic positioner 10 Electric positioner 11 Reversing contactor 224 Information Sheet T 8300 EN

227 Pneumatic actuators Pneumatic actuators are diaphragm actuators, equipped with a rolling diaphragm and internal compression springs. They provide the following advantages: Designed for signal pressures up to 6 bar (90 psi) Low overall height Powerful actuator thrusts and fast transit times Minimum friction Various bench ranges No special tools required to change the bench range or reverse the actuator action Fail-safe action Depending on the version, actuators are equipped with two different fail-safe actions that become effective when the pressure acting on the actuator diaphragm is reduced or the air supply fails: Actuator stem extends (marked FA on the actuator) The spring force extends the actuator stem to the lower end position. Actuator stem retracts (marked FE on the actuator) The spring force retracts the actuator stem. Type 3271 Pneumatic Actuator (Figs. 1 and 2) Designed for rated travels from 7.5 to 120 mm and effective diaphragm areas of 60, 80, 120, 240, 350, 700, 1400 and 2800 cm 2. Tandem actuators with twin diaphragms have a total effective area of 2 x 2800 cm 2. Optional version equipped with handwheel (120 cm 2 effective area and larger). Top-mounted handwheel with effective diaphragm areas of 120 to 700 cm 2 ( Fig. 1); side-mounted handwheel with effective diaphragm areas of 1400 to 2800 cm 2. See Data Sheets T EN and T EN for details. Type 3277 Pneumatic Actuator (Fig. 3) Designed for integral positioner attachment. The positioner is completely protected and fastened to the yoke attached to the bottom diaphragm case. Effective diaphragm areas of 120, 240, 350 or 700 cm 2. Rated travels from 7.5 to 30 mm. Optionally with top-mounted handwheel. See Data Sheet T EN for details. Type and Type Pneumatic Actuators with Rotary Lever (Fig. 4) Pneumatic diaphragm actuators for final control elements with rotary closure members, especially designed for use with butterfly valves and shutters. Diaphragm areas of 350 or 700 cm 2. Optional handwheel. Type is designed for integral positioner attachment. See Data Sheet T 8316 EN for details. Fig. 2 Type 3271 Pneumatic Actuator on Type 241 Globe Valve Fig. 4 Type Pneumatic Actuator Fig. 1 Type 3271 Pneumatic Actuator with top-mounted handwheel on Type 241 Globe Valve Fig. 3 Type 3277 Pneumatic Actuator on Type 241 Globe Valve Fig. 5 Type 3278 Rotary Actuator with Type 3331 Butterfly Valve and attached Type 3767 Positioner Type 3278 Pneumatic Rotary Actuator (Fig. 5) Single-acting rotary actuator with spring return mechanism used with butterfly valves and other rotary valves. Nominal opening angle 70 or 90. Effective diaphragm areas of 160 or 320 cm 2. Optional handwheel. See Data Sheet T 8321 EN for details. Pfeiffer Type BR 31a Pneumatic Rotary Actuator (Fig. 6) Single- or double-acting piston actuator for use with rotary valves. Maximum opening angle 90. Optional manual override. For throttling or on-off services. See Data Sheet T 9929 EN for details. Fig. 6 Pfeiffer Type BR 31a Rotary Actuator Information Sheet T 8300 EN

228 Electrohydraulic and electric actuators Type to -23 Electrohydraulic Linear Actuators (Fig. 7) Designed for nominal thrusts up to 7.3 kn and rated travels of 15 or 30 mm. Transit times comprise 60 s or faster for connection to threepoint stepping controllers. Also with electric positioner for analog control signals from 4 (0) to 20 ma or 0 (2) to 10 V. Optional electrical or mechanical override. Versions available with fail-safe function. See Data Sheet T 8340 EN for details. Fig. 7 Type Electrohydraulic Linear Actuator with mechanical override Type SAM Electric Actuators (Fig. 8) Self-locking, linear motion actuators with reversible AC or three-phase AC motor for nominal thrusts from 2 to 25 kn and rated travels from 15 to 120 mm. Transit times 30 s and faster for connection to three-point stepping controllers. Also with electric positioner for analog control signals from 4 (0) to 20 ma or 0 to 10 V. Standard versions contain a mechanical override and two torque-dependent/three travel-dependent limit switches. See Data Sheet T 8330 EN for details. Electric actuators of other manufacturers, such as AUMA, available on request. Fig. 8 Type Electric Control Valve with Type SAM Electric Actuator Type 3374 Electric Actuator (Fig. 9) Electric actuator for industrial plants as well as heating, ventilation and air-conditioning systems. Optionally with or without fail-safe function. Additional version with digital positioner. See Data Sheet T 8331 EN for details. Type 3273 Hand-operated Actuator (Fig. 10) Designed for attachment to final control elements used as manual control valves. Especially designed for Series 240, 250 and 260 Control Valves. Rated travels of 15 and 30 mm. Nominal thrusts up to 32 kn. See Data Sheet T 8312 EN for details. Fig. 9 Type 3374 Electric Actuator Specifications subject to change without notice. Fig. 10 Type 3273 Hand-operated Actuator on Type 3241 Globe Valve 226 Information Sheet T 8300 EN

229 Pneumatic Actuators up to 700 cm² Type 3271 and Type 3277 for integral positioner attachment Application Linear actuator for attachment to final control elements, particularly suitable for Series 240, 250, 280 Control Valves and Type 3510 Micro-flow Valves Diaphragm area 60 to 700 cm² Rated travel 7.5 to 30 mm The Types 3271 and 3277 Pneumatic Actuators are diaphragm actuators equipped with a rolling diaphragm and internal springs. Special features Low overall height Powerful thrust at high response speed Low friction Various bench ranges by varying the number of springs or their compression No special tools required to change the bench range and to reverse the actuator action (also in version with handwheel) Designed for supply pressures up to 6 bar Continuous operation at temperatures from 35 to +90 C Direct attachment of accessories on additional yoke for Type 3277 Actuator with concealed travel pick-off (Fig. 2) Fig. 1 Type 3271 Fig. 2 Type 3277 Versions Type 3271 Diaphragm areas 80, 240, 350, 700 cm² (Fig. 1), optional stainless steel version (1.4301) Type 3277 Diaphragm area 240, 350, or 700 cm² for direct attachment of accessories (Fig. 2), optional stainless steel version (1.4301) Type Diaphragm area 60 cm², die-cast aluminum body, particularly for Type 3510 Micro-flow Valve (Fig. 3 and Data Sheet T 8091 EN) Type Diaphragm area 120 cm², die-cast aluminum body (Fig. 4), optionally with additional handwheel (Fig. 11a) Type Diaphragm area 120 cm², die-cast aluminum body for direct attachment of accessories (Fig. 9), optionally with additional handwheel (Figs. 5 and 11b) Types 3271 or 3277 Additional handwheel for pneumatic actuators with diaphragm areas of 240, 350, or 700 cm² (Fig. 6 and Data Sheet T 8312 EN) Type 3271 Mechanical travel stop (sectional drawing 12), min. or max. travel mechanically adjustable in versions with 240, 350, or 700 cm² Type 3271/7 Fire-Lock version (Fig. 13) fail-safe action in case of fire, diaphragm areas of 240, 350, 700 cm 2 Further versions For other process media (e.g. water or oxygen) Details available on request Fig. 3 Type Fig. 5 Type with additional handwheel Fig. 4 Type Fig. 6 Type 3271 with additional handwheel For high temperatures up to 120 C On request For low temperatures down to 40 C On request Data Sheet T EN

230 Principle of operation The signal pressure p st generates a force F=p st A on the diaphragm area A (2). This force is balanced by the actuator springs (4). Taking into account the rated travel, the number of springs and their compression determine the bench range. The travel H is proportional to the signal pressure p st. The operating direction of the actuator stem (7) depends on the arrangement of the springs and the signal pressure connection (1). The stem connector (8) connects the actuator stem (7) with the plug stem (10) of the valve. The adjustable mechanical travel stop (Fig. 12) is suitable for actuators made of sheet steel with effective diaphragm areas of 240, 350, or 700 cm². Using the limit stop, the actuator travel can be limited by up to 50 % in both directions (actuator stem extends or retracts ) and permanently adjusted. A special version with one-sided travel stop for actuators with an effective diaphragm area of 120 cm² is available Actuators are available with the following fail-safe actions: Actuator stem extends (FA) The springs cause the actuator stem to move to the lower end position (sectional drawings, right) when the diaphragm is relieved of pressure or when the supply air fails. Actuator stem retracts (FE) The springs cause the actuator stem to retract (sectional drawings, left) when the diaphragm is relieved of pressure or when the supply air fails. Fig. 9 Type for direct attachment of accessories Fig. 7 Type 3271 (right: with additional springs) 1 3 Fig. 10 Type 3271 with additional handwheel Legend 1 Signal pressure connection 2 Diaphragm 3 Vent 4 Springs 5 Diaphragm cases 6 Annular nut 7 Actuator stem 8 Stem connector 9 Coupling nut 10 Plug stem 11 Yoke 12 Actuator stem to handwheel 14 Cap 15 Nut 16 Spindle 17 Plain bearing 18 Lock nut 23 Handwheel Fig. 8 Type 3277 for direct attachment of accessories 228 Data Sheet T EN

231 Fig. 12 Type 3271 with adjustable travel stop Figs. 11a, 11b Type and Type , fail-safe action stem extends, both with additional handwheel Fig. 13 Fire-Lock version, in fail-safe position (right) Table 1a Technical data for Type 3271 Pneumatic Actuator Version Type 3271 Type 3271 Stainless steel Type 3277 Type 3277 Stainless steel Type for micro valve Type Type Diaphragm area cm² Max. supply pressure 6 bar See restrictions in on/off service on page 232 Permissible temperatures in continuous operation 35 to 90 C made of standard material NBR 40 to 120 C made of special material EPDM, for air free of oil and grease and actuator versions with 240, 350, and 700 cm² Up to 80 C in Fire-Lock version (for 240, 350, and 700 cm²) 35 to 80 C 35 to 90 C Materials Rolling diaphragm NBR (nitrile rubber) with fabric insert NBR with fabric insert EPDM with fabric insert Actuator stem / Actuator stem sealing NBR NBR NBR EPDM Diaphragm cases Sheet steel, Sheet steel, Stainless steel Stainless steel Die-cast aluminum, powder-varnish powder-varnish powder-varnish coated coated coated Table 1b Technical data for additional handwheel Version for actuator Type Type Type 3271 Type 3277 Diaphragm area 240 cm², 350 cm² 120 cm² 700 cm² (only for initial spring value 2.1 bar) Materials Body Die-cast aluminum, powder-varnish coated St 37-2, powder-varnish coated Spindle Stainless steel Handwheel Aluminum, powder-varnish coated Aluminum Data Sheet T EN

232 Table 2 Bench ranges for pneumatic actuators up to 700 cm² Effective diaphragm area [cm²] Rated travel [mm] Travel volume at rated travel [dm³] Dead volume [dm³] 1) 2) Max. travel [mm] Bench range [bar] (signal pressure range at rated travel) Additionally possible spring compression [%] Operating range with spring compression [bar] Number of springs Spring force at 0 mm travel [kn] 1) Spring force at rated travel [kn] Thrust [kn] at rated travel and a supply pressure [bar] of ) ) Version for Type 3510 Micro-flow Valve ) ) (17) 15 (17) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) 4) ) 4) ) Based on lower bench range value, taking zero travel (to unseat the plug) into account 2) Zero travel as in Table 3 depending on fail-safe action 3) Pretensioned springs 4) Version not available with additional handwheel 230 Data Sheet T EN

233 ØD ØD a H1 H1 H H a H6 H4 14 H5 ØD2 Ød Fig. 14 Type Ød M14x max. 58 at 7.5 mm travel Fig. 14a Types / with 7.5 mm travel for Type 3510 Micro-flow Valve H6 H4 ØD2 Ød Fig. 15 Type with additional handwheel H7 ØD a H7 ØD a1 H H H6 H4 ØD2 Ød a H5 H6 H4 a2 ØD2 Ød Fig. 16 Type 3271 (700 cm² version with lifting ring) Fig. 17 Type 3277 (700 cm² version with lifting ring) ØD1 ØD1 a H2 H1 a1 H2 H1 H H H4 H6 a H5 a2 55 ØD ØD2 Ød H4 H6 ØD ØD2 Ød Fig. 18 Type 3271 with additional handwheel Fig. 19 Type 3277 with additional handwheel Data Sheet T EN

234 Table 3 Dimensions and weights Actuator Type Version Diaphragm area cm² Height H H H2 max H4 rated FA H4 max FA H4 max FE H H H H Diameter Ø D Ø D Ø D Ø d (thread) a (optional) G 1 8 G ¼ G 1 8 G ¼ G 3 8 ¼ NPT 1 8 NPT ¼ NPT 3 / 8 NPT G 1 8 G ¼ G 3 8 a2 G 3 8 Weight in kg Without handwheel With handwheel Throttling or on/off service In throttling service, the pneumatic actuators can be used for supply pressures up to max. 6 bar. In on/off service, the supply pressure must be reduced. For fail-safe action Actuator stem retracts (FE), the permissible supply pressure must not exceed the upper bench range value by more than 3 bar. Actuators to be used with reduced supply pressures are labeled accordingly. H8 H H4 H6 ØD a a ØD2 Ød Example Fig. 20 Type 3271 with adjustable travel stop Bench range Fail-safe action Max. supply pressure bar 4 bar bar Actuator stem retracts 5 bar bar 6 bar For fail-safe action Actuator stem extends (FA) and travel stop, the supply pressure must not exceed the upper bench range value by more than 1.5 bar. Ordering text Actuator Optional Diaphragm area Travel Bench range Fail-safe action Signal pressure connection Rolling diaphragm Type 3271 or Type 3277 for direct attachment of accessories Handwheel Travel stop Fire-Lock version... cm²... mm... bar Actuator stem extends (FA) or Actuator stem retracts (FE) G... /... NPT NBR/EPDM Specifications subject to change without notice. 232 Data Sheet T EN

235 Pneumatic Actuators 1400, 2800, and 2 x 2800 cm² Type 3271 Hand-operated Actuator Type 3273 Application Linear actuator for attachment to final control elements, particularly suitable for Series 240, 250 and 280 Control Valves Diaphragm area 1400 and 2800 cm² Travel Up to 160 mm The Type 3271 Pneumatic Actuators are diaphragm actuators equipped with a rolling diaphragm and internal springs. Special features Low overall height Low friction Various bench ranges by varying the number of springs or their compression No special tools required to change the bench range and to reverse the actuator action (also for tandem actuator and version with handwheel) Continuous operation at temperatures from 35 to +90 C Type 3273 Hand-operated Actuator for travels up to 80 mm Versions Type 3271 Pneumatic Actuator (Figs. 1 and 2), effective diaphragm area of 1400 cm², versions with 60 mm travel ( ) or 120 mm travel ( ) and effective diaphragm area of 2800 cm² Type 3271 Pneumatic Tandem Actuator (Fig. 3), effective diaphragm area of 2 x 2800 cm² Type 3271 Pneumatic Actuator with Type 3273 Hand-operated Actuator, for travels up to 80 mm using side-mounted handwheel (Fig. 13), effective diaphragm area of 1400 or 2800 cm² Type 3271 Pneumatic Actuator with Handwheel, using side-mounted handwheel (Fig. 14) for travels up to 160 mm, effective diaphragm areas of 1400 cm² with 120 mm travel, 2800 or 2 x 2800 cm² Type 3271 Actuator with Travel Stop (sectional drawing 7), minimum or maximum travel mechanically adjustable for 1400 cm² actuators with 60 mm travel and 2800 cm² actuators as well as 2 x 2800 cm² tandem actuators Fig. 1 Type 3271 ( ) with Type 3251 Control Valve Fig. 2 Type 3271 ( ) Further versions For other process media (e.g. water) For high temperatures up to 120 C or low temperatures down to 40 C On request Type 3273 Hand-operated Actuator without pneumatic actuator, operated using side-mounted handwheel for travels up to 80 mm On request Fig. 3 Type 3271 Tandem Actuator with 2 x 2800 cm 2 Data Sheet T EN

236 Principle of operation The signal pressure p st generates a force F=p st A on the diaphragm area A (2). This force is balanced by the actuator springs (4). Taking into account the rated travel, the number of springs and their compression determine the bench range. The travel H is proportional to the signal pressure p st. The operating direction of the actuator stem (7) depends on the arrangement of the springs. The stem connector (8) connects the actuator stem (7) with the plug stem (10) of the valve. Fig. 12 shows the side-mounted Type 3273 Hand-operated Actuator for actuators with effective diaphragm areas of 1400 and 2800 cm² and a maximum travel of up to 80 mm. The handwheel (23) is fixed to the worm-geared shaft (20) and moves the actuator stem over the worm-geared wheel (21) and the threaded bushing (22). A side-mounted handwheel as illustrated in Fig. 14 is available for valves with 120 mm travel. The adjustable mechanical travel stop (Fig. 7) is suitable for actuator version as well as 2800 cm² and tandem actuators. The actuator travel can be limited by up to 50 % in both directions (actuator stem extends or retracts ) and permanently adjusted. The tandem actuator (Fig. 6) contains two coupled diaphragms; they produce a positioning force that is twice as high as the force of a single-acting actuator. Actuators are available with the following fail-safe actions: Actuator stem extends (FA) The springs cause the actuator stem to move to the lower end position (sectional drawings, right) when the diaphragm is relieved of pressure or when the supply air fails. Actuator stem retracts (FE) The springs cause the actuator stem to retract (sectional drawings, left) when the diaphragm is relieved of pressure or when the supply air fails. Legend 1 Signal pressure connection 2 Diaphragm 3 Vent 4 Springs 5 Diaphragm cases 6 Annular nut 7 Actuator stem 8 Stem connector 9 Coupling nut 10 Plug stem 14 Cap 15 Nut 16 Spindle 17 Plain bearing 18 Lock nut 20 Worm-geared shaft 21 Worm-geared wheel 22 Threaded bushing 23 Handwheel Fig. 5 Sectional drawing of actuator version Fig. 6 Tandem actuator with 2 x 2800 cm² Fig. 4 Sectional drawing of Type 3271 Actuator (right-hand section of diaphragm with additional springs) Fig. 7 Type 3271 Actuator with adjustable travel stop 234 Data Sheet T EN

237 Throttling or on/off service In throttling service, the Type 3271 Pneumatic Actuators can be used for supply pressures up to max. 6 bar. In on/off service, the supply pressure must be reduced. For fail-safe action Actuator stem retracts (FE), the permissible supply pressure must not exceed the upper bench range value by more than 3 bar. Actuators to be used with reduced supply pressures are labeled accordingly. Example Bench range Fail-safe action Max. supply pressure bar 4 bar bar Actuator stem retracts 5 bar bar 6 bar For fail-safe action Actuator stem extends (FA) and travel stop, the supply pressure must not exceed the upper bench range value by more than 1.5 bar. Fig. 8 Type 3273 Hand-operated Actuator with side-mounted handwheel for max. 80 mm travel, up to 80 kn 9 10 Table 1a Technical data for Type 3271 Pneumatic Actuator Version cm² x 2800 Maximum supply pressure 6 bar 1) 6 bar 1) Permissible temperatures in continuous operation Materials Rolling diaphragm Standard material NBR 35 to 90 C Special material EPDM (for air free of oil and grease) 35 to 120 C NBR (nitrile rubber) Butyl with fabric insert EPDM with fabric insert Standard material NBR 35 to 90 C NBR with fabric insert Standard material NBR 35 to 90 C Actuator stem Actuator stem sealing NBR (nitrile rubber) NBR EPDM NBR Diaphragm cases Sheet steel, EN-JS1030 (GGG-40) powder-varnish coated 1) Observe restrictions as specified above Table 1b Technical data for Type 3273 Hand-operated Actuator Version 3273 (Fig. 8, 13) 3273 (Fig. 14) Max. travel range 80 mm 160 mm Permissible force 80 kn 210 kn Permissible temperature 100 C 100 C Materials Body EN-JS1030 (GGG-40) EN-JS1030 (GGG-40) Spindle and threaded nut /G-CuSn12Pb EN-GJS (GGG-50)/ Handwheel Aluminum EN-JL1040 (GG-25) Table 1c Available versions Version cm² 2 x 2800 cm² Travel stop, on both sides Type 3273 Hand-operated (max. 3 bar) Actuator, max. 80 mm travel Side-mounted Type 3271 Hand-operated Actuator, max. 120 mm travel Data Sheet T EN

238 Table 2 Bench ranges for 1400 and 2800 cm² Pneumatic Actuators All pressures in bar (gauge) Values highlighted in gray apply to standard operation, i.e. operation at rated travel. The maximum travel can be achieved by increasing the signal pressure. Pretensioned springs cannot be used with fail-safe action Actuator stem retracts for Series 240, 250, and 280 Control Valves. Effective diaphragm area [cm²] Rated travel [mm] Travel volume at rated travel [dm³] Dead volume [dm³] Max. travel [mm] 1) Bench range [bar] (signal pressure range at rated travel) Additionally possible spring compression [%] Operating range with spring compression [bar] Number of springs Spring force at 0 mm travel [kn] 2) Spring force at rated travel [kn] 2) Thrust [kn] 2) at rated travel and a supply pressure [bar] of ) ) x ) ) Based on lower bench range value, not taking zero travel (to unseat the plug) into account (see Table 3a) 2) Specified forces refer to the bench range 3) Springs are already pretensioned 4) The maximum compression at 50 % rated travel is 50 % 236 Data Sheet T EN

239 Table 3 Dimensions and weights Table 3a Versions without handwheel Actuator cm² x 2800 Height H H4 Rated FA H4 max FA H4 max FE H H H Diameter Ø D ØD Ø d (thread) 60 x x x x 2 a (optional) G ¾ G ¾ G 1 ¾ NPT ¾ NPT 1 NPT Weight in kg Without handwheel a H7 H8 a H H a H6 H4 a H6 H4 ØD ØD2 Ød ØD ØD2 Ød Fig. 11 Version with mechanical travel stop Fig. 9 Type 3271 Actuator, version a H7 a a H7 H a a H a a H6 H4 a H6 Ød ØD ØD2 H4 ØD ØD2 Ød Fig. 10 Version with mechanical travel stop Fig. 12 Type 3271 as tandem actuator Data Sheet T EN

240 Table 3b Type 3273 Hand-operated Actuator with side-mounted handwheel Travel 80 mm Control valve DN Seat bore mm Travel mm Actuator cm² H3 mm H5 mm H9 mm Weight with actuator kg Weight w/o actuator kg H H H Ø 315 H5 Fig and 2800 cm² version for max. 80 mm travel, up to 80 kn Table 3c Pneumatic actuator and hand-operated actuator with side-mounted handwheel Travel up to 160 mm Actuator cm² x 2800 H10 mm H11 mm Weight w/o actuator kg H Ø500 Ordering text Actuator Type 3271 Handwheel Travel stop Tandem actuator Diaphragm area... cm 2 Travel... mm Bench range... bar Fail-safe action Actuator stem extends/retracts Signal pressure connection G... /... NPT Rolling diaphragm NBR/EPDM H11 Fig and 2800 cm² version for travel > 60 to 120 mm Specifications subject to change without notice. 238 Data Sheet T EN

241 Hand-operated Actuator Type 3273 Application Hand-operated actuator for attachment to valves, especially for Series 240, 250 and 260 Control Valves. Rated travels of 15 and 30 mm. Nominal thrusts up to 32 kn The Type 3273 Hand-operated Actuator is a spindle actuator equipped with a non-rising handwheel. Special features Low overall height Simple connection to the control valve Manual forces specified in DIN 3230, Part 2 Locking mechanism securing the valve stem position against accidental adjustment Replaceable with a pneumatic or electric actuator Versions Type Handwheel diameter of 180 mm and a maximum nominal thrust of 18 kn Type Handwheel diameter of 250 mm and a maximum nominal thrust of 32 kn Actuators for valves with travels > 30 mm and/or required nominal thrusts > 30 kn upon request Combination options: Series 240 Valves, nominal sizes DN 15 to DN 150 (max. travel 30 mm), see Table 3a. Series 250 Valves, nominal sizes DN 15 to 100 (DN 100 to 200 with maximum travel of 30 mm), see Table 3b. Series 260 Valves, DN 80 to 150, see Table 3c. Fig. 1 Type 3273 Hand-operated Actuator attached to Type 3241 Valve Principle of operation The hand-operated actuator is connected to the yoke using the supplied nut (5). The coupling element (6) connects the threaded spindle (1) to the plug stem of the valve. The locking mechanism (4) locks the handwheel (3) and protects the valve stem position against accidental adjustment. Adjustment of the valve is only possible after releasing the locking mechanism (4). Ordering text Type or Hand-operated Actuator For Type... Control Valve DN... PN... Seat bore...mm, Δp...bar Fig. 2 Type 3273 Actuator, sectional view 1 Threaded spindle 2 Threaded nut 3 Handwheel Locking mechanism 5 Nut 6 Coupling element Data Sheet T 8312 EN

242 Table 1 Technical data Type Rated travel mm 15/30 Maximum travel mm 23/38 Maximum thrust kn Req. manual force N Max. temperature C 100 Spindle force versus manual force diagram Spindle force s Handwheel 250 mm Handwheel 180 mm Table 2 Materials Spindle and threaded nut Body Handwheel Stainless steel or Sheet steel St 37-2, powder coated Aluminum Table 3 Hand-operated actuator and valve allocation Table 3a Series 240 Δp in bar Valve seat in mm Actuator 12 On request Table 3b Series 250 Δp in bar Valve seat in mm Actuator 12 On request Dimensions in mm and weights ØD1 Max. manual force acc. to DIN 3230 Manual force H3 (valve closed) Rated travel H4 D1 D2 d H1 H Weight appr. kg Type H1 15 mm 30 mm M30x M30x Table 3c Series 260 Valve seat in mm Δp = 6 bar Actuator Ød ØD2 H4 H3 Specifications subject to change without notice. 240 Data Sheet T 8312 EN

243 Electric Actuators Linear Actuator Type SAM Application Electric actuators designed for control valves used in process engineering applications. They are especially suitable for valves of Series 240, 250 and 280. Nominal thrusts 2 kn to 25 kn Rated travels 15 to 120 mm These electric linear actuators contain reversible AC or threephase AC motors. The rotary motion of the motor is transferred to the actuator stem via a gear unit and the corresponding transfer elements. Versions are available with 230 V AC or 400 V three-phase AC motor for connection to three-point stepping controllers. Transit times range from 18 to 144 seconds. The standard versions include a mechanical handwheel. The following limit switches and signalizing components are included in the standard hardware: Two torque-dependent switches Three travel-dependent switches Optional electrical equipment: Brake motors (required for positioners) One or two potentiometers 100, 200 or 1000 Ω One electronic position transmitter with an output signal from 4(0) to 20 ma One positioner with input signals from 4(0) to 20 ma or 0 to 10 V Fig. 1 Type SAM Electric Actuator attached to Type 3241 Valve Versions Standard version with surface-cooled squirrel-cage motor for 230 V AC or 400 V three-phase alternating current. Equipped with two torque-dependent limit switches and three limit contacts. Motor with temperature monitor (optional for Type SAM -01 to -23). Type SAM -01 and SAM -1x Electric actuator with 30 mm rated travel and nominal thrusts from 2 kn (SAM -01 and SAM -10) to 6 kn (SAM -13). Type SAM -2x Electric actuator with 30 mm rated travel and nominal thrusts from 6 kn (SAM -20) to 15 kn (SAM -23). Type SAM -3x Electric actuator with 60 mm rated travel and nominal thrusts from 6 kn (SAM -30) to 15 kn (SAM -33). Type SAM -4x Electric actuator with 60 mm rated travel and nominal thrusts from 15 kn (SAM -40) to 25 kn (SAM -42). Type SAM -5x Electric actuator with 120 mm rated travel and nominal thrusts from 15 kn (SAM -50) to 25 kn (SAM -52). All actuators are available with the optional electrical equipment described above. For further technical details, see overleaf. Fig. 2 Type SAM Electric Actuator attached to Type 3284 Steam-converting Valve Data Sheet T 8330 EN

244 Principle of operation The actuator motor converts the output pulses of the three-point stepping controller into steps of travel. The length of these steps and the direction of rotation depend on the quantity and the sign of the control deviation. The rotary motion of the motor is transferred to the gear wheel via the gearing; the gear wheel is shrunk on a bushing with female thread. The top section of the actuator stem which is provided with the matching male thread engages the female thread. Due to the rotary motion of the gear wheel and bushing, the actuator stem screws into the female thread and performs a lifting, linear motion. The actuators can be adjusted manually after disengagement of the motor. All versions are equipped with two torque-dependent and three travel-dependent limit switches which stop the motor when the predetermined limits are reached. These electrical components are housed below the sealed cover where they are separated from the gearing and protected from moisture and dust. They can be easily accessed after lifting off the cover. The torque-dependent switches (S1 and S2 in Fig. 4) switch off the motor when the adjusted force is reached, e.g., when the valve plug rests against the seat or when the linear motion is obstructed in any way. The three floating travel-dependent switches (S3 to S5) issue a limit signal when the adjusted limit values are exceeded. Usually, one switch (S3) is used to limit the travel in the opening direction of the control valve. Whereas the other two switches (S4 and S5) indicate intermediate or end positions. The electric actuators can optionally be equipped with two potentiometers and/or an electric position transmitter with an output signal from 4 (0) to 20 ma. They are used for analog remote transmission of the valve position. It is also possible to install a positioner with input signals 4 (0) to 20 ma or 0 to 10 V when AC brake motors for 230 V, 50 Hz are used. The installation and start-up for three-phase AC brake motors involve considerably more work because additional external reversing contactors are required. Fig. 3 Type SAM Electric Actuator Table 1 Technical data SA Type M Nominal thrust kn Rated travel Standard Optional Speed of response mm/min ) Actuators with positioner require brake motors Connecting thread M 30 x 1.5 M 60 x 1.5 M 100 x 1.5 Degree of protection IP 65 Perm. ambient temperature 20 to +60 C Table 2 Electrical connection data Type SAM Speed of response mm/min Motor and 230 V/50 Hz power consumption 400 V/50 Hz [A] Version Synchronous motor Asynchronous motor 1) Temperature monitoring Only on request, not required Bimetallic release 242 Data Sheet T 8330 EN

245 Table 3 Electrical equipment Standard version 2 torque-dependent switches 3 travel-dependent switches Motor coil with temperature monitor (see Table 2) Options 1 or 2 potentiometers 100, 200 or 1000 Ω 1 position transmitter with output 4(0) to 20 ma 1 positioner with input 4(0) to 20 ma or 0 to 10 V (only with brake or synchronous motor) 1 heating resistor with temperature monitor Electrical connection The electric actuators can be connected in three ways: 1) via internal terminal blocks (standard version), 2) via 32-pin terminal blocks in a terminal box or 3) via a compact connector. A 10-pin plug insert (silver-plated sockets and pins) is used to connect the motor; a 24-pin unit containing either silver or gold-plated contacts is used to connect the limit switches and signalizing equipment. When a plug connector is used, only one potentiometer (R1) can be provided in case a fourth travel-dependent switch (S6) is desired. The travel-dependent switch S3 must be adjusted in such a way that the travel of the final control element is limited in the opening direction by switching off the motor. SAM -01 to -33 SAM -20 to -52 SAM -20 to -33 SAM -40 to -52 Klemmenanschluß Terminal connection Klemmenanschluß Terminal connection Steckeranschluß Plug connection Steckeranschluß Plug connection bis up 380 to 380 V V Steckeranschluß Plug connection bis up 500 to 500 V V DE Torque-dependent switch ES Electronic position transmitter (not for SAM 1.) a with four-wire/three-wire connection b with two-wire connection HZ Heating resistor with temperature monitor POT Potentiometer TW WE Temperature monitor Travel-dependent switch S 3 for travel limitation S 4 to S 6 for indication of intermediate positions The wiring diagram in the cover of the linear actuator is binding! Fig. 4 Connection diagrams Data Sheet T 8330 EN

246 Dimensions in mm and weights Type SAM -01 to -13 1) SAM -20 to -23 SAM -30 to -33 SAM -40 to -42 SAM -50 to -52 Rated travel H H4 max H ø D ø D ø d (thread) M 30x1.5 M 30x1.5 M 60x1.5 M 60x1.5 M 100x2 Approx. weight in kg ) Without positioner and position transmitter ES, otherwise the same as for SAM -20. Ordering text Electric Actuator Type SAM -... AC motor 230 V, 50 Hz AC brake motor 230 V, 50 Hz Three-phase AC motor 400 V, 50 Hz 3-phase AC brake motor 400 V, 50 Hz Attached to Control Valve Type... Valve travel 15/ 30/ 60/ 120 mm Options: Potentiometers 1 or 2 100, 200 or 1000 Ω 1 electric position transmitter Output 1 positioner Input 4 to 20 ma 4 to 20 ma 0 to 10 V Specifications subject to change without notice. 244 Data Sheet T 8330 EN

247 Electrohydraulic Actuators Type to -23 Application Actuators for positioning control valves. The electrohydraulic actuators receive three-point stepping or continuous-action output signals from electric controllers. Nominal thrust up to 7300 N. Rated travels 15 and 30 mm The actuators are available with different thrusts. Special features Compact design including electric, or optionally mechanical override. Safe functioning due to force-dependent disconnection of the motor when reaching final positions, or when overload occurs. Installation of positioner, potentiometers, and electric or inductive limit switches in the terminal box. Optionally, fail-safe action for version with electric override. Fig. 1 Type to -14 Electrohydraulic Actuator with electric override; optionally with fail-safe position: Operating direction Versions with electric override (Fig. 1) Electric override activated using two push buttons on the terminal box Type Electrohydraulic Actuator with nominal thrust F in of 2100 N in operating direction "In", and nominal thrust F out of 1800 N in operating direction "Out" Type F in of 500 N and F out of 3000 N Type F in and F out of 4300 N Type F in of 500 N and F out of 7300 N "Out" "In" Versions with mechanical override (Fig. 2) Mechanical override adjusted with an Allen key (width across flats/sw 24) at the additional gearing housing Type F in of 2100 N and F out of 1800 N Type F in of 500 N and F out of 3000 N Type F in and F out of 4300 N, respectively Type F in of 500 N and F out of 7300 N Fig. 2 Type to -18 Electrohydraulic Actuator with mechanical override Versions with fail-safe action and electric override, operating direction of the spring return mechanism according to Fig. 1 Type F in of 2100 N and F out of 1800 N operating direction of fail-safe position: "Out" Type F in of 1800 N and F out of 2100 N operating direction of fail-safe position: "In" Type F in of 500 N and F out of 3000 N operating direction of fail-safe position: "Out" Typetested versions Type and Type Actuators with fail-safe position (operating direction "Out") have been typetested together with various SAMSON valves by German TÜV according to DIN Register number available on request. Other certifications CSA for version 110 V/60 Hz NE MA 3 Data Sheet T 8340 EN

248 Principle of operation (Fig. 3) The pressure-tight actuator housing (1) also serves as oil reservoir and incorporates the cylinder housing (2), cylinder (5.1) and piston, motor (6.1), pump (6.2) and solenoid pilot valves (6.4). The required electric lines are oil-tight and pressure-tight and led from the terminal box (3) to the actuator housing. The oil pump (6.2) driven by the motor (6.1) feeds compressed oil to the corresponding cylinder chamber via the check-valve (6.3) and pilot valve (6.4). Disconnected from current, the solenoid valves are closed. They open, when the controller issues a signal. Depending on the version, the actuators are equipped with or without one or two compression springs (5.10, 5.11). These springs are used to reset the actuator, and they are part of the fail-safe position. The motor is controlled by a relay in its electronics section and is directly connected to the power supply. Therefore, the contacts of the controller are subjected to a load of maximum two solenoid valves, and the electronics section of the motor is subjected to only minimum load. When reaching final positions, or external forces cause the nominal force of the actuator to be exceeded, the force-dependent switches (4.3) or (4.4) deactivate the motor. CAUTION: Do not open housing cover (1.1)! The hydraulic equipment need not be maintained; oil change is not necessary Versions with fail-safe action have a spring return mechanism and an additional safety solenoid valve which opens when power supply is interrupted, thus reducing the pressure on the cylinder chamber. In this process, electric override is not possible. Manual override The actuators possess an electric or optionally a mechanical override as standard. Versions with fail-safe position are supplied with electric override only. Electric override There are two push buttons on the terminal box (3). Any travel position can be reached independent of the control signal. After the push button is released, the actuator reacts again according to the controller signal. The control signal can be interrupted by opening the isolator terminal (81 in Figs. 4 to 6). Mechanical override The release button on the top side of the actuator housing must be activated. An Allen key (SW 24) can be used for adjustment. As soon as the release button is deactivated, the actuator reacts again according to the controller signal. 1 Actuator housing and oil reservoir 1.1 Housing cover 2 Cylinder housing 3 Electric terminal box 3.1 Cover 4.3 Limit switch (extending) 4.4 Limit switch (retracting) 5.1 Cylinder 5.2 Piston 5.10 Compression spring 5.11 Compression spring 6.1 Motor 6.2 Oil pump 6.3 Check-valve 6.4 Pilot valve Fig. 3 Functional diagram of Type 3274 Actuator Additional electrical equipment The entire electrical equipment can be accessed in the terminal box (3). Table 2 shows the maximum amount of equipment. The housing cover (1.1) is secured by special screws and must not be opened! Electric positioner The positioner compares the controller signal to the signal issued by a potentiometer. The potentiometer signal is proportional to the travel. The output variable produced by the positioner is a three-point stepping control signal. Zero and span for normal and split-range operation are adjustable within broad limits. The operating direction (increasing/increasing or increasing/decreasing) can be chosen. Via an external make contact, the final position "In" or "Out" can be reached. This does not affect the safety function. The positioner has an additional output for valve position feedback. Electric position transmitter Output signal 0(2) to 10 V or 0(4) to 20 ma with potentiometer 0 to 1000 Ω for versions with three-point stepping signal. Potentiometer Actuators can be equipped with one or two potentiometers. Versions with positioner require a potentiometer for valve position feedback to the positioner. Electric limit switch Actuators are equipped with maximum three overridable electric or inductive limit switches on request. The limit switches are activated via infinitely adjustable cam disks. The transistor relays necessary for operation are not included in the delivery. Heating resistor Heating the hydraulic oil increases the lower temperature range. The heating resistor is not protected by the internal fuse. We recommend that an external fuse be used in accordance with the power consumption data indicated on the nameplate. Please also note the instructions for mounting positions in the Mounting and Operating Instructions EB 8340 EN. 246 Data Sheet T 8340 EN

249 Table 1 Technical data Actuator Type Version with manual override Electric - Mechanical - Electric - Fail-safe action With Without Operating direction "Out" "In" "Out" Rated travel 15 or 30 mm Nominal actuating time Speed of response for fail-safe action [mm/s] Thrust (N) at travel Electrical connection Power consumption 15 mm Stem: 30 mm Stem: 60 s for 15 mm; 120 s for 30 mm (depending on temperature and required thrust 1/2 actuating time on request) Standard Optional "In" "Out" "In" "Out" V, 110 V, 24 V; 50 or 60 Hz (±10 % resp.) 90 to 200 VA (maximum in version with 1/2 actuating time and heating) Permissible ambient temperature 10 C to +60 C Wider range (with heating resistor): 35 C to +60 C Permissible storage temperature 25 C to +70 C Degree of protection IP 65 Control operation Duty cycling S4 according to VDE 0530/IEC 34 with 50% on-time Electronics section of motor Radio interference level according to DIN VDE 0875 Mounting Central attachment M 30 x 1.5 Special version for Type 3214 Valve, DN 150 to 250 Weight approx. kg Additional electrical equipment Electric positioner Potentiometer (additional ranges on request) Power supply 230 V, 110 V, 24 V; 50 or 60 Hz (±10 % resp.) Control signal 4 to 20 ma, 0 to 20 ma (Ri = 50 Ω) 0 to 10 V, 2 to 10 V (Ri = 10 kω) Zero shift 0 to 100 % Change of span 30 to 100 % Output (feedback) 4(0) to 20 ma, R 200 Ω 0(2) to10 V, R 2 kω 0 to 1000 Ω; 0 to 200 Ω; 0 to 100 Ω; 0 to 275 Ω; 0 to 138 Ω (when rated travel is 80 % of final value); permissible load 0.5 W Electric limit switch Maximum three separately adjustable limit switches (see Table 2) Permissible load 250 V~, 5 A Inductive limit switch Proximity switch SJ 2-N Control circuit Values according to downstream transistor relay (not included in delivery) Heating resistor, approx. 45 W With thermostat, "on" at approx. 10 C, "off" at approx. 0 C Table 2 Additional electrical equipment Additional equipment Max. equipment combination (arranged by columns) Electric positioner Electric positioner Potentiometer Ω 1) 1000 Ω 1) 1000 Ω 1) 1000 Ω 1) Potentiometer 2 Electric limit switch 1 Electric limit switch 2 Electric limit switch 3 Inductive limit switch 1 Inductive limit switch 2 1) Required for position transmission to the positioner Data Sheet T 8340 EN

250 Table 3 Materials Housing and housing cover Cylinder Piston Piston stem Actuator stem Die-cast aluminum, plastic-coated Hydraulic cylinder tube Steel-NBR combination C45, chromium-plated Electrical connection (Figs. 4 and 5) Figs. 4 and 5 schematically illustrate the different means of connection, depending on how the respective version is equipped. The electric limit switches are provided with screwed connections. They are connected directly, not via the terminal block. Especially for 24 V actuators, lines of sufficient cross-section must be laid in order to guarantee that the permissible voltage tolerances of ±10 % are kept. The heating resistor is connected without additional terminals to L and N in the circuit. Hydraulic oil Special HLP, silicone-free Electrical connections Heating resistor M F e F a Type ,-14,-17,-18,-22 Type ,-21,-23 In Out "e" "a" e a a e N L al el a43 e Controller PE N L Safety interlock circuit, only with Type x Fig. 4 Circuit diagram for actuators without positioner Heating resistor M F e F a Type , -14, -17, -18,-22 Type , -21,-23 Priority position In "e" Out "a" a 1 e 4 2 PE N L Fig. 5 Circuit diagram for actuators with positioner N L al el a43 e green brown white Safety interlock circuit, only with Type x - + (0)4 to 20 ma - + (0)4 to 20 ma (0)2 to 10V (0)2 to 10V Input Control signal Output Jumper essential for 0(2) to 10 V 248 Data Sheet T 8340 EN

251 Electrical connections Heating resistor M F e F a Type , -14, -17, -18, -22 Type to -18, -21, -23 In "e" Out "a" a 1 e 4 2 N L al el a43 e (0)4 to 20 ma - + Jumper essential for 0(2) to 10 V PE N L Safety interlock circuit, only with Type x Controller Fig. 6 Circuit diagram for actuators with position transmitter Dimensions in mm. 75 for 15mm travel 90 for 30mm travel.. 75 for 15mm travel 90 for 30mm travel. Type Actuator with electric override Type Actuator with mechanical override Ordering text Type Electrohydraulic Actuator Rated travel 15/30 mm Fail-safe action (only available with electric override) Operating direction "In" or "Out" Electrical connection 230/110/24 V; 50/60 Hz Version for Type 3214 Valves, DN 150 to 250, if needed. Additional electrical equipment (see Table 2) Positioner Input signal 0(2) to 10 V / 0(4) to 20 ma Position transmitter 0(2) to 10 V / 0(4) to 20 ma Potentiometer 0 to 1000 Ω 0 to... Ω Limit switch electric/inductive Heating resistor for wider temperature range Specifications subject to change without notice. Data Sheet T 8340 EN

252

253 TROVIS-VIEW Configuration and Operator Interface Software 251

254

255 TROVIS-VIEW Software TROVIS 6661 Application Uniform configuration and operation of various smart SAMSON devices TROVIS-VIEW is a standard operator interface, allowing the user to configure and parameterize various SAMSON instruments using a device-specific database module. Data is transferred between the TROVIS-VIEW software and the SAMSON device either directly (e.g. using a connecting cable or infrared adapter; also see Table 1) or indirectly using a memory pen or memory module. A direct connection enables both online and offline operation. This means that data can be changed in the device immediately, or they can be saved on the PC first and later downloaded to the device on site. The device-specific modules contain a database providing the characteristic properties of each device type, such as parameters, data points, user levels, etc. The various user levels can be protected with passwords. The available modules are being extended constantly. Data Sheet T 6661 EN

256 Learning to operate TROVIS-VIEW is easy, as it uses the look and feel of Windows Explorer. It includes features such as: Tree structure List view Select Context-sensitive menus by clicking the right mouse button Open and save Hardware requirements A PC with the following minimum requirements is needed: Pentium II processor or equivalent (300 MHz or faster), 500 MHz recommended RS-232 serial interface or USB/RS-232 adapter (USB Converter 3 for TROVIS 5500 Series) and, depending on the SAMSON device used, the suitable hardware as specified in Table 1 Min. 96 MB RAM, 192 MB RAM recommended Min. 150 MB of available hard disk space. Additionally, 10 to 15 MB of available hard disk space per SAMSON module SVGA graphics card (min. 800 x 600) CD-ROM drive Software requirements Operating system: Windows 2000 (min. SP2), Windows XP, Windows Vista Microsoft.NET Framework Version 2.0 or higher (included on installation CD-ROM) Internet browser: MS Internet Explorer Version 6 or higher Scope of delivery The TROVIS-VIEW Configuration and Operator Interface and the device-specific modules are delivered on a CD-ROM together with the associated online documentation. Software updates can be downloaded from the Support & Downloads section of our website at Accessories (Figs. 1 to 3) Hardware package (memory pen, modular adapter, connecting cable) Order no Serial interface adapter Order no Memory pen Order no Memory pen 64 Order no Memory module Order no Connecting cable Order no FSK modem RS-232 EEx (ia) Order no RS-232 (not explosion-protected) Order no PCMCIA (not explosion-protected) Order no USB (not explosion-protected) Order no Infrared adapter Order no Holding fixture for infrared adapter Order no Isolated USB interface adapter Order no USB/RS-232 adapter Order no USB 1.1 serial adapter Order no USB Converter3 Order no USB dongle for EXPERT+ diagnostics Order no Ordering text TROVIS-VIEW TROVIS 5431 Heating Controller TROVIS 5432 Heating Controller TROVIS 5433 Heating Controller TROVIS 5575 Heating Controller TROVIS 5576 Heating Controller TROVIS 5579 Heating Controller TROVIS 6493 Compact Controller TROVIS 6495 Industrial Controller Type Positioner Type Positioner Type Positioner Type Positioner Type Positioner Type Positioner Type 3780 Positioner Type 3785 Positioner Type 3787 Positioner Digital positioner with Type 3374 Actuator Digital positioner with Type 5824/ Type 5825 Actuator Digital positioner with Type 5857 Actuator Type 5724/5725 Controller with Electric Actuator Type 5757 Controller with Electric Actuator Type Controller with Electric Actuator Media USB Fig. 1 Accessories USB Converter 3 ( ) RS-232 USB/RS-232 adapter ( / ) Memory pen ( ) Memory pen 64 ( ) 254 Data Sheet T 6661 EN

DN PN C NPS ¼ Class F DN 15A A JIS 10K/20K C

DN PN C NPS ¼ Class F DN 15A A JIS 10K/20K C Series 240 250 280 Pfeiffer W&T Pneumatic and Electric Control Valves Information Sheet Part 1 DN 10... 500 PN 10... 400 200... 500 C NPS ¼... 16 Class 125... 2500 325... 930 F DN 15A... 250A JIS 10K/20K

More information

DN PN C 1 / Class F DN 15A A JIS 10K/20K C

DN PN C 1 / Class F DN 15A A JIS 10K/20K C Series 240 250 280 Pneumatic and Electric Control Valves Information Sheet DN 15... 500 PN 10... 400 200... 500 C 1 /2... 16 Class 125... 2500 325... 930 F DN 15A... 250A JIS 10K/20K 200... 500 C Associated

More information

N O S M Catalog Products Products

N O S M Catalog Products Products Catalog Products Products Catalog 2011 Overview Control Valves Actuators Positioners Software Valve Accessories Converters Electronic Process Controllers Media Series Pressure Regulators for Cryogenics

More information

Products. Products CATALOG

Products. Products CATALOG CATALOG CATALOG CATALOG Products SAMSON AKTIENGESELLSCHAFT Weismüllerstraße 3 60314 Frankfurt am Main, Germany Phone: +49 69 4009-0 Fax: +49 69 4009-1507 E-mail: samson@samson.de Internet: www.samson.de

More information

Series 240 Pneumatic Control Valve Type and Type Globe Valve Type 3241

Series 240 Pneumatic Control Valve Type and Type Globe Valve Type 3241 Series 240 Pneumatic Control Valve Type 3241-1 and Type 3241-7 Globe Valve Type 3241 Application Control valve for process engineering and industrial applications Nominal size DN 15 to 300 Nominal pressure

More information

Series W&T Pneumatic Control Valve Type RVG Globe valve and angle valve

Series W&T Pneumatic Control Valve Type RVG Globe valve and angle valve Series W&T Pneumatic Control Valve Type RVG Globe valve and angle valve Application Control valve for feedwater and steam applications in power plant engineering and the petrochemical industry Nominal

More information

Series 240 Pneumatic Control Valve Type and Type Globe Valve Type 3241

Series 240 Pneumatic Control Valve Type and Type Globe Valve Type 3241 Series 240 Pneumatic Control Valve Type 3241-1 and Type 3241-7 Globe Valve Type 3241 Application Control valve for process engineering and industrial applications Nominal size 15 to 300 Nominal pressure

More information

Series 240 Type and Type Pneumatic Control Valves Type 3244 Three-way Valve

Series 240 Type and Type Pneumatic Control Valves Type 3244 Three-way Valve Series 240 Type 3244-1 and Type 3244-7 Pneumatic Control Valves Type 3244 Three-way Valve DIN and ANSI versions Application Mixing or diverting valve for process engineering and industrial applications

More information

Series 240 Type and Type Pneumatic Control Valves Type 3347 Hygienic Angle Valve

Series 240 Type and Type Pneumatic Control Valves Type 3347 Hygienic Angle Valve Series 240 Type 3347-1 and Type 3347-7 Pneumatic Control Valves Type 3347 Hygienic Angle Valve Application Control valve for hygienic applications in the food and pharmaceutical industries Valve size DN

More information

Typetested for liquid fuels and liquefied petroleum gas (LPG) in the liquid phase (see Data Sheet T 8022 EN) Version according to ANSI standards

Typetested for liquid fuels and liquefied petroleum gas (LPG) in the liquid phase (see Data Sheet T 8022 EN) Version according to ANSI standards Series 240 Pneumatic Control and Quick-acting Shut-off Valves for gases Type 3241-1-Gas and Type 3241-7-Gas DIN-DVGW typetested acc. DIN EN 161 (1996-08) Application Control valves for control equipment

More information

Series 240 Electric Control Valve Type 3241/3274 Globe Valve Type 3241 Electric Control Valve Type 3244/3274 Three-way Valve Type 3244

Series 240 Electric Control Valve Type 3241/3274 Globe Valve Type 3241 Electric Control Valve Type 3244/3274 Three-way Valve Type 3244 Series 240 Electric Control Valve Type 3241/3274 Globe Valve Type 3241 Electric Control Valve Type 3244/3274 Three-way Valve Type 3244 Application Versatile control valves with globe or three-way valve

More information

Type 1a Globe Control Valve

Type 1a Globe Control Valve PTFE-lined Type 1a Globe Control Valve Application: PTFE-lined control valve for corrosive media, particularly for severe requirements in chemical applications: Valve sizes DN 25 to 150 or NPS 1 to 6 Pressure

More information

Series 240 Type Gas and Type Gas Automatic Shut-off Valves for Gases (valve class D)

Series 240 Type Gas and Type Gas Automatic Shut-off Valves for Gases (valve class D) Series 240 Type 3241-1-Gas and Type 3241-7-Gas Automatic Shut-off Valves for Gases (valve class D) DIN-DVGW typetested acc. to DIN EN 161 (2013-04) Application Control valve for control systems subject

More information

Self-operated Pressure Regulators Type Universal Pressure Reducing Valve

Self-operated Pressure Regulators Type Universal Pressure Reducing Valve Self-operated Pressure Regulators Type 41-23 Universal Pressure Reducing Valve ANSI version Application Pressure regulators for set points from 0.75 to 400 psi (0.05 to 28 bar) Valves in NPS ½ to 4 (DN

More information

T 8053 EN Type and Type Pneumatic Control Valves Type 3252 High-pressure Valve

T 8053 EN Type and Type Pneumatic Control Valves Type 3252 High-pressure Valve T 8053 EN Type 3252-1 and Type 3252-7 Pneumatic Control Valves Type 3252 High-pressure Valve Application Control valve especially designed for controlling low flow rates in process engineering Valve sizes

More information

Series 240 Type 3351 Pneumatic On/off Valve

Series 240 Type 3351 Pneumatic On/off Valve Series 240 Type 3351 Pneumatic On/off Valve Application Shut-off valve with tight shut-off for liquids, gases and vapors according to DIN or ANSI standards Valve size DN 15 to 100 NPS ½ to 4 Pressure rating

More information

Series 240 Pneumatic On-off Valve Type 3351

Series 240 Pneumatic On-off Valve Type 3351 Series 240 Pneumatic On-off Valve Type 3351 Application Control valve with a tight shutoff of liquids, gases and steam in accordance with DIN or ANSI standards Nominal sizes DN 15 to 100 NPS ½ to 4 Nominal

More information

Series 240 Pneumatic Control Valves Type and Type Three-way Valve Type 3244

Series 240 Pneumatic Control Valves Type and Type Three-way Valve Type 3244 Series 240 Pneumatic Control Valves Type 3244-1 and Type 3244-7 Three-way Valve Type 3244 DIN and ANSI versions Applications Mixing or flow-diverting valves for use in process engineering and industrial

More information

Series 240 Types PSA, -7 PSA, -9 PSA Pneumatic Control Valves Type 3241 PSA Globe Valve

Series 240 Types PSA, -7 PSA, -9 PSA Pneumatic Control Valves Type 3241 PSA Globe Valve Series 240 Types 3241-1 PSA, -7 PSA, -9 PSA Pneumatic Control Valves Type 3241 PSA Globe Valve ANSI version Application Control valves for PSA plants (Pressure Swing Adsorption) s NPS ½ to 6 Pressure rating

More information

Series 240 Type and Type Pneumatic Control Valves Type 3248 Cryogenic Valve

Series 240 Type and Type Pneumatic Control Valves Type 3248 Cryogenic Valve Series 240 Type 3248-1 and Type 3248-7 Pneumatic Control Valves Type 3248 Cryogenic Valve ANSI version Application Globe or angle valve for cryogenic applications Easy to service due to top-entry design

More information

Series 240 Type and Type Pneumatic Control Valves Type 3248 Cryogenic Valve

Series 240 Type and Type Pneumatic Control Valves Type 3248 Cryogenic Valve Series 240 Type 3248-1 and Type 3248-7 Pneumatic Control Valves Type 3248 Cryogenic Valve ANSI version Application Globe or angle valve for cryogenic applications Easy to service due to top-entry design

More information

Data Sheet T EN

Data Sheet T EN Data Sheet T 8015-1 EN Series 240 Types 3241 1 PSA, -7 PSA, -9 PSA Pneumatic Control Valves Type 3241 PSA Globe Valve Application Control valves for PSA plants (Pressure Swing Adsorption) Valve sizes DN

More information

T EN Type 3347/3379 Pneumatic Control Valve Type 3347 Hygienic Angle Valve

T EN Type 3347/3379 Pneumatic Control Valve Type 3347 Hygienic Angle Valve T 8097-3 EN Type 3347/3379 Pneumatic Control Valve Type 3347 Hygienic Angle Valve Application Control valve for hygienic applications in the food and pharmaceutical industries Valve size DN 6 to NPS ¼

More information

Series 240 Pneumatic Control Valve Type DWA, -7 DWA, -9 DWA Globe Valve Type 3241 DWA

Series 240 Pneumatic Control Valve Type DWA, -7 DWA, -9 DWA Globe Valve Type 3241 DWA Series 240 Pneumatic Control Valve Type 3241-1 DWA, -7 DWA, -9 DWA Globe Valve Type 3241 DWA ANSI version Application Control valve for PSA plants (Pressure Swing Adsorption) (German: DWA) NPS ½ to 6 Pressure

More information

Series 240 and 250 Valves with perforated plug

Series 240 and 250 Valves with perforated plug Series 240 and 250 Valves with perforated plug DIN and ANSI versions Application Optimized trim for critical conditions in applications DN 25 to 500 NPS 1 to 20 Nominal pressure PN 16 to 400 Class 150

More information

Self-operated Pressure Regulators Type Universal Excess Pressure Valve

Self-operated Pressure Regulators Type Universal Excess Pressure Valve Self-operated Pressure Regulators Type 41-73 Universal Excess Pressure Valve ANSI version Application Pressure regulator for set points from 0.75 to 400 psi (0.05 to 28 bar) Valves in NPS ½ to 4 (DN 15

More information

Self-operated Pressure Regulators Universal Pressure Reducing Valve Type 41-23

Self-operated Pressure Regulators Universal Pressure Reducing Valve Type 41-23 Self-operated Pressure Regulators Universal Pressure Reducing Valve Type 41-23 ANSI version Application Pressure regulators for set points from 0.075 to 400 psi (5 mbar to 28 bar) Valves in NPS ½ to 4

More information

Type and Type Pneumatic Control Valves Type 3510 Micro-flow Valve

Type and Type Pneumatic Control Valves Type 3510 Micro-flow Valve Type 3510-1 and Type 3510-7 Pneumatic Control Valves Type 3510 Micro-flow Valve ANSI version Application Control valve especially designed for controlling low flow rates in pilot plants and technical research

More information

Maxifluss Rotary Plug Valves VETEC Types 72.3/R and 72.4/R

Maxifluss Rotary Plug Valves VETEC Types 72.3/R and 72.4/R Maxifluss Rotary Plug Valves VETE Types 72.3/R and 72.4/R Application Double-eccentric control valve for process engineering and industrial applications Nominal sizes DN 25 to 400 NPS 1 to 1 Nominal pressures

More information

Self-operated Pressure Regulators Type Universal Excess Pressure Valve

Self-operated Pressure Regulators Type Universal Excess Pressure Valve Self-operated Pressure Regulators Type 41-73 Universal Excess Pressure Valve Application Pressure regulators for set points from 0.05 to 8 bar Valve nominal sizes DN 15 to 100 Nominal pressure PN 16 to

More information

Maxifluss Rotary Plug Valves VETEC Types 73.3/M and 73.7/M

Maxifluss Rotary Plug Valves VETEC Types 73.3/M and 73.7/M Maxifluss Rotary Plug Valves VETEC Types 7./M and 7.7/M Application Double-eccentric control valve for process engineering, industrial applications, and refineries Nominal sizes DN 25 to 400 1 to 16 Nominal

More information

Mounting and Operating Instructions EB 8135/8136 EN. Series V2001 Valves Type 3535 Three-way Valve for Heat Transfer Oil

Mounting and Operating Instructions EB 8135/8136 EN. Series V2001 Valves Type 3535 Three-way Valve for Heat Transfer Oil Series V2001 Valves Type 3535 Three-way Valve for Heat Transfer Oil Type 3535 Three-way Valve with bellows seal and rod-type yoke (partial view) Mounting and Operating Instructions EB 8135/8136 EN Edition

More information

Pneumatic Control Valve Type and Type Micro-flow Valve Type 3510

Pneumatic Control Valve Type and Type Micro-flow Valve Type 3510 Pneumatic Control Valve Type 3510-1 and Type 3510-7 Micro-flow Valve Type 3510 ANSI version Application Control valve designed for controlling low flow rates in pilot plants and technical research facilities.

More information

T EN Type 3349 Aseptic Angle Valve With USP-VI diaphragm

T EN Type 3349 Aseptic Angle Valve With USP-VI diaphragm T 8048-2 EN Type 3349 Aseptic Angle Valve With USP-VI diaphragm Application Control valve for aseptic applications in the food and pharmaceutical industries according to DIN or ANSI standards with USP-VI

More information

ANSI version. The valve closes when the differential pressure rises

ANSI version. The valve closes when the differential pressure rises Self-operated Regulators Series 42 Differential Pressure Regulator with Type 2424/Type 2428 Actuator and Type 2422 Valve Type 42-24 A Type 42-24 B Type 42-28 A Type 42-28 B ANSI version Application For

More information

Mounting and Operating Instructions EB 5894 EN. Electric control valves with jet pump. Flanged version of valve with jet pump

Mounting and Operating Instructions EB 5894 EN. Electric control valves with jet pump. Flanged version of valve with jet pump Electric control valves with jet pump Type 3267/5824, Type 3267/5825, Type 3267/3374, Type 3267/3274 Pneumatic control valves with jet pump Type 3267-1, Type 3267-7 Flanged version of valve with jet pump

More information

Series 240 Type 3349/3379 Pneumatic Control Valve Type 3349 Aseptic Angle Valve

Series 240 Type 3349/3379 Pneumatic Control Valve Type 3349 Aseptic Angle Valve Series 240 Type 3349/3379 Pneumatic Control Valve Type 3349 Aseptic Angle Valve With USP-VI diaphragm Application Control valve for aseptic applications in the food and pharmaceutical industries DIN or

More information

Maxifluss Rotary Plug Valve. VETEC Type 72.1/R, Type 72.3/R and Type 72.4/R

Maxifluss Rotary Plug Valve. VETEC Type 72.1/R, Type 72.3/R and Type 72.4/R Maxifluss Rotary Plug Valve VETEC Type 72.1/R, Type 72.3/R and Type 72.4/R Application Double eccentric control valve for process engineering and plants with industrial requirements Nominal size DN 25

More information

Pneumatic Shut-off Butterfly Valve Type 3335/BR 31a

Pneumatic Shut-off Butterfly Valve Type 3335/BR 31a Pneumatic Shut-off Butterfly Valve Type 3335/BR 31a Application Tight-closing butterfly valve for process engineering and plants with industrial requirements DN 50 to DN 300 2 to 12 Nominal pressure PN

More information

Product Range. Products for all industrial applications

Product Range. Products for all industrial applications Product Range Products for all industrial applications CONTROL VALVES BUTTERFLY VALVES Series Description Symbol Version Page Series Description Symbol Version Page 1a Globe Valve PTFE 4 10a Double Eccentric

More information

General Stem-Guided Control Valves

General Stem-Guided Control Valves Control and Shut-Off Valves Variety of Trim Designs in Different Materials Electric and Pneumatic Actuators as Standard General Stem-Guided Control Valves Sizes ½" - 12" (15mm - 300mm) ANSI Class 150-900

More information

General Stem-Guided Control Valves

General Stem-Guided Control Valves Control and Shut-Off Valves Variety of Trim Designs in Different Materials Electric and Pneumatic Actuators as Standard General Stem-Guided Control Valves Sizes ½" - 12" (15mm - 300mm) ANSI Class 150-900

More information

Series 250 Pneumatic Control Valve Type and Type High Pressure Valve Type 3252

Series 250 Pneumatic Control Valve Type and Type High Pressure Valve Type 3252 Series 250 Pneumatic Control Valve Type 3252-1 and Type 3252-7 High Pressure Valve Type 3252 Application Control valve used control small flow rates in process engineering Nominal size G 1 2 1 NPT 1 2

More information

Mounting and Operating Instructions EB 5868/5869 EN

Mounting and Operating Instructions EB 5868/5869 EN Electric Control Valves Types 3213/5857, 3213/5824, Types 3214/5824, 3214/3374, 3214/3274 with safety function: Types 3213/5825, 3214/5825, 3214/3374, 3214/3274 Pneumatic Control Valves Types 3213/2780-1,

More information

Control valves with pneumatic actuators up to 350 C PN

Control valves with pneumatic actuators up to 350 C PN 300 540 1080 2 Features Suitable in building and process engineering for various mediums 0...+200 C Suitable with stuffing box extension or stem seal with stainless steel bellow to 10...+350 C and for

More information

Self-operated Temperature Regulators Type 1u Temperature Regulator

Self-operated Temperature Regulators Type 1u Temperature Regulator Self-operated Temperature Regulators Type 1u Temperature Regulator ANSI version Application Temperature regulators for cooling installations Control thermostats for set points 1) from 15 to 480 F ( 10

More information

CONTROL VALVE STANDARD SPECIFICATION

CONTROL VALVE STANDARD SPECIFICATION CONTROL VALVE STANDARD SPECIFICATION QUICK CHANGE TYPE 2-WAY GLOBE VALVE YAD-122Q1 Series http://www.proval.co.kr PROVAL Co., Ltd. [B-1] TOP GUIDE SINGLE SEATED TYPE GENERAL The design of Quick Change

More information

Maxifluss Rotary Globe Valves VETEC Type 82.7

Maxifluss Rotary Globe Valves VETEC Type 82.7 Maxifluss Rotary Globe Valves VETEC Type 82.7 ANSI version Application Double-eccentric valve for process engineering and industrial applications Valve size NPS 1 to NPS 10 Pressure rating Class 150 and

More information

Mounting and Operating Instructions EB 8111/8112 EN. Valve Series V2001 Globe Valve Type 3321

Mounting and Operating Instructions EB 8111/8112 EN. Valve Series V2001 Globe Valve Type 3321 Valve Series V2001 Globe Valve Type 3321 Fig. 1 Type 3321 Valve with mounted rod-type yoke for pneumatic or electric actuators (partial view) Mounting and Operating Instructions EB 8111/8112 EN Edition

More information

Fisher CAV4 Control Valve

Fisher CAV4 Control Valve CAV Valve Product Bulletin Fisher CAV Control Valve The Fisher CAV control valve with Cavitrol IV trim is designed specifically for liquid applications, such as boiler feedwater recirculation, where pressure

More information

Fisher CAV4 Control Valve

Fisher CAV4 Control Valve Product Bulletin D10197X012 Fisher CAV Control Valve CAV Valve The Fisher CAV control valve (figure 1) with Cavitrol IV trim is designed specifically for liquid applications, such as boiler feedwater recirculation,

More information

Series 240 Pneumatic Control Valve Type and Type Three-way Valve Type 3244

Series 240 Pneumatic Control Valve Type and Type Three-way Valve Type 3244 Series 240 Pneumatic Control Valve Type 3244-1 Type 3244-7 Three-way Valve Type 3244 with long insulating section circulation inhibitor ANSI version Application Mixing or flow-diverting valve for cryogenic

More information

Components for the Food Processing and Pharmaceutical Industries

Components for the Food Processing and Pharmaceutical Industries CATALOG Components for the Food Processing and Pharmaceutical Industries SMART IN FLOW CONTROL. Components for the Food Processing and Pharmaceutical Industries Catalog 2018 Overview Overview Application

More information

Self-operated Temperature Regulators Type 1u Temperature Regulator

Self-operated Temperature Regulators Type 1u Temperature Regulator Self-operated Temperature Regulators Type 1u Temperature Regulator Version according to ANSI Application Temperature regulators for cooling plants Control thermostats for set points 1) from 15 to 480 F

More information

Maxifluss Rotary Plug Valve - VETEC Type 82.7

Maxifluss Rotary Plug Valve - VETEC Type 82.7 Valve Size NPS 1 to 12 ANSI Pressure Class CL 150 and 300 Temperature Range of Medium -320 F to +1022 F (-196 C to +550 C) Valve Body Material Cast carbon steel Low temperature carbon steel Cast stainless

More information

BIOVENT. Hygienic Valve

BIOVENT. Hygienic Valve BIOVENT BIOVENT Committed to perfection in every detail Powerful valve actuator BIOVENT control valves are usually combined with pneumatic multi-spring ARCAPAQ actuator type 813. Not only is it cost effective,

More information

CE43 1" (DN25) to 4" (DN100) Carbon Steel Cage Design, Two Port Control Valves

CE43 1 (DN25) to 4 (DN100) Carbon Steel Cage Design, Two Port Control Valves Globe 13 CE43 1" (DN25) to 4" (DN) Carbon Steel Cage Design, Two Port Description The CE43 series is a range of carbon steel two port, cage trim, control valves conforming to ANSI B16.34, ASME VIII standards

More information

Series 42 Self-operated Regulators. Type RS Check Valve (backflow protection)

Series 42 Self-operated Regulators. Type RS Check Valve (backflow protection) Series 42 Self-operated Regulators Type 42-10 RS Check Valve (backflow protection) Application Designed to protect nitrogen and compressed air networks against backflow from directly connected systems.

More information

Typetested versions With Type 3213 Globe Valve, unbalanced. With Type 3214 Globe Valve, balanced

Typetested versions With Type 3213 Globe Valve, unbalanced. With Type 3214 Globe Valve, balanced Electric Control Valves/Controller with Electric Actuator with safety function, typetested Types 3213/5725, 3214/5725 Single-seated Globe Valve Type 3213, unbalanced Single-seated Globe Valve Type 3214,

More information

Mounting and Operating Instructions EB 8048 EN. Type and Type Pneumatic Control Valves Type 3249 Aseptic Angle Valve

Mounting and Operating Instructions EB 8048 EN. Type and Type Pneumatic Control Valves Type 3249 Aseptic Angle Valve Type 3249-1 and Type 3249-7 Pneumatic Control Valves Type 3249 Aseptic Angle Valve Ball body version Special version with packing Type 3249-7 Control Valve with Type 3277 Actuator and integrated positioner

More information

AEGIS RSS Series. Fully Lined Bellows Sealed Control Valves. RSS Series

AEGIS RSS Series. Fully Lined Bellows Sealed Control Valves. RSS Series Fully Lined Bellows Sealed Control Valves Corrosion-resistant PFA lining ISO/DIN and ANSI/ISA face-to-face Heavy-duty Paraflon bellows Special designs for chlorine and high-purity media ASSOCIATE CHLORINE

More information

Triple Eccentric Control and Shut-off Butterfly Valve Series 14t

Triple Eccentric Control and Shut-off Butterfly Valve Series 14t Application: Triple Eccentric Control and Shut-off Butterfly Valve Series 14t Triple eccentric butterfly valve providing excellent shut-off in all industrial applications: Nominal size DN 80 to DN 400

More information

Series 110 Globe Control Valves

Series 110 Globe Control Valves Series Control Valves Series Globe Control Valves This type of control valve with it s globe body shape, uses the variable area generated within the control valve trim to control fluid flow. Designed in

More information

Valve Series V2001 Globe Valve Type 3321 with Pneumatic or Electric Actuator

Valve Series V2001 Globe Valve Type 3321 with Pneumatic or Electric Actuator Valve Series V2001 Globe Valve Type 3321 with Pneumatic or Electric Actuator Application Control valves designed for mechanical and plant engineering. Suitable for liquids, gases and steam Nominal size

More information

BR 10a Control and Shut-off Butterfly valve

BR 10a Control and Shut-off Butterfly valve M-PTFE lined double-eccentric BR 10a Control and Shut-off Butterfly valve Application: Tight-closing, double-eccentric butterfl y control valve with M-PTFE lining for process engineering and plants with

More information

Series V2001 Valves Type 3531 Globe Valve for Heat Transfer Oil with pneumatic or electric actuator

Series V2001 Valves Type 3531 Globe Valve for Heat Transfer Oil with pneumatic or electric actuator Series V2001 Valves Type 3531 Globe Valve for Heat Transfer Oil with pneumatic or electric actuator ANSI version Application Control valves for heat transfer applications using organic media according

More information

Mounting and Operating Instructions EB 8039 EN. Type 3351 Pneumatic On/off Valve. Type 3351 Pneumatic On/off Valve. Type 3351 Pneumatic On/off Valve

Mounting and Operating Instructions EB 8039 EN. Type 3351 Pneumatic On/off Valve. Type 3351 Pneumatic On/off Valve. Type 3351 Pneumatic On/off Valve Type 3351 Pneumatic On/off Valve Type 3351 Pneumatic On/off Valve Type 3351 Pneumatic On/off Valve Version with handwheel Mounting and Operating Instructions EB 8039 EN Edition May 2016 Definition of signal

More information

Every component precisely matched

Every component precisely matched Series 9 Every component precisely matched Powerful valve actuator Most commonly used is the pneumatic multi-spring actuator series MA as shown here. It is robust, ex-proof, features low actuating times,

More information

Series 3331 Pneumatic Control Butterfly Valve Type 3331/BR 31a

Series 3331 Pneumatic Control Butterfly Valve Type 3331/BR 31a Series 3331 Pneumatic Control Butterfly Valve Type 3331/BR 31a Application Control butterfly valve for use in process engineering and industrial applications to meet high demands Suitable for liquids,

More information

Every component precisely matched

Every component precisely matched Series 8B Every component precisely matched Powerful valve actuator Most commonly used is the pneumatic multi-spring actuator series MA as shown here. It is robust, ex-proof, features low actuating times,

More information

Mounting and Operating Instructions EB 8097 EN. Type and Type Pneumatic Control Valves

Mounting and Operating Instructions EB 8097 EN. Type and Type Pneumatic Control Valves Type 3347-1 and Type 3347-7 Pneumatic Control Valves Type 3347-7, cast body with welding ends Type 3347-7, bar stock body with threaded connections Mounting and Operating Instructions EB 8097 EN Edition

More information

Fisher CAV4 Control Valve

Fisher CAV4 Control Valve Fisher CAV4 Control Valve CAV4 (globe) CAV4 (NPS 2) CAV4 (angle) CAV4 (NPS 2 through 6) CAV4 Series Valves The Fisher CAV4 control valve with Cavitrol IV trim is designed specifically for liquid applications,

More information

SAMSON Double Eccentric Rotary Plug Valve SMART IN FLOW CONTROL

SAMSON Double Eccentric Rotary Plug Valve SMART IN FLOW CONTROL SAMSON 82.7 Double Eccentric Rotary Plug Valve SMART IN FLOW CONTROL FEATURES AND BENEFITS Positioners and Accessories SAMSON accessories designed for direct attachment NAMUR dimensions for easy attachment

More information

Mounting and Operating Instructions EB 8111/8112 EN. Series V2001 Valves Type 3321 Globe Valve

Mounting and Operating Instructions EB 8111/8112 EN. Series V2001 Valves Type 3321 Globe Valve Series V2001 Valves Type 3321 Globe Valve Type 3321 Globe Valve with rod-type yoke and Type 3372 Electropneumatic Actuator (350 cm²) Mounting and Operating Instructions EB 8111/8112 EN Edition June 2013

More information

78200/18200 Series LINCOLNLOG Valves Anti-cavitation High Pressure Control Valves

78200/18200 Series LINCOLNLOG Valves Anti-cavitation High Pressure Control Valves LINCOLNLOG Valves Anti-cavitation High Pressure Control Valves Featuring High Resistance Multiple Stage LINCOLNLOG Trim Angle Configuration 78200 Globe Configuration 18200 Specification Data CP6020 10/97

More information

Honeywell EN REV. 2 09/2014 Page 1 of 10 Specification

Honeywell EN REV. 2 09/2014 Page 1 of 10 Specification Series 9110 Single/Double Seated Globe Valves for ANSI 150-600 DIN/BS 4504 PN10-PN40 Honeywell 70-16-10-05 EN REV. 2 09/2014 Page 1 of 10 Specification Series 9110 Single/Double Seated Globe Valves for

More information

Globe Valve Type Fig. 1 Type 3241 Globe Valve. Mounting and Operating Instructions EB EN

Globe Valve Type Fig. 1 Type 3241 Globe Valve. Mounting and Operating Instructions EB EN Globe Valve Type 3241 Fig. 1 Type 3241 Globe Valve Mounting and Operating Instructions EB 8015-1 EN Edition July 2012 Contents Contents Page 1 Design and principle of operation.................... 4 2

More information

Pneumatic Butterfly Valve Type 3335 / AT

Pneumatic Butterfly Valve Type 3335 / AT Pneumatic Butterfly Valve Type 3335 / AT Application Tight closing butterfly valve for process engineering and plants with industrial requirements DN 50 to DN 300 2 to 12 Nominal pressure PN 10 and PN

More information

DBOY Series Pneumatic Control Valve

DBOY Series Pneumatic Control Valve Applications Process control systems for food, pulp and paper, chemical, petrochemical & other industries HVAC systems Feed water and fuel system controls in boiler rooms Packaged systems (OEM) such as

More information

Jordan Control Valve Series

Jordan Control Valve Series Jordan Control Valve Series Control Valves A control valve is used to manipulate flowing fluids like, gas, water, steam or process solutions. It compensates for changes in flow or pressure and regulates

More information

Pneumatic Butterfly Valve Pfeiffer Type BR 14b/AT

Pneumatic Butterfly Valve Pfeiffer Type BR 14b/AT Pneumatic Butterfly Valve Pfeiffer Type BR 14b/AT Application Tight closing, double eccentric butterfly valve for process engineering and plants with industrial requirements Nominal size DN 80 to DN 400

More information

Series 14b - Type HD

Series 14b - Type HD High-Performance Control and Shut-off Butterfly Valve Series 14b - Type HD Application: Tight-closing, double-eccentric butterfl y valve especially for high requirements in the chemical industry, for example

More information

CV3000 Series Pressure Balanced Cage type Control Valve

CV3000 Series Pressure Balanced Cage type Control Valve No. SS2-8113-1100 CV3000 Series Pressure Balanced Cage type Control Valve OVERVIEW Model HCB Pressure Balanced Cage Type Control Valves are designed for heavy duty services. The compact valve body, having

More information

Mounting and Operating Instructions EB 5863 EN. Electric Control Valves. Pneumatic Control Valve

Mounting and Operating Instructions EB 5863 EN. Electric Control Valves. Pneumatic Control Valve Electric Control Valves Types 3226/5857, 3226/5824, 3226/5825, 3226/5757-7, 3226/5724-8, 3226/5725-7, 3226/5725-8 Pneumatic Control Valve Type 3226/2780 Type 3226/5857 Type 3226/5757-7 Type 3226/2780-2,

More information

EDELSTAHL. Kämmer Series Aseptic and Sanitary Valves

EDELSTAHL. Kämmer Series Aseptic and Sanitary Valves EDELSTAHL Aseptic and Sanitary Valves 1 51917.p65 1 4/16/0, :29 PM The Kämmer 191000 Series product line provides control valve solutions for sanitary and aseptic process systems. These valves meet the

More information

Application Pressure reducing valves for the food and pharmaceutical industries

Application Pressure reducing valves for the food and pharmaceutical industries Series 2371 Pressure Regulators Pressure Reducing Valves for the food and pharmaceutical industries Type 2371-10 Pneumatic set point adjustment Type 2371-11 Manual set point adjustment Application Pressure

More information

Series V2001 Valves Clean Tech Type 3321CT Globe Valve with pneumatic actuator

Series V2001 Valves Clean Tech Type 3321CT Globe Valve with pneumatic actuator Series V2001 Valves Clean Tech Type 3321CT Globe Valve with pneumatic actuator DIN version Application Compact control valve for the process industry Valve size DN 15 to 50 Pressure rating PN 16 to 40

More information

Mounting and Operating Instructions EB 8097 EN. Pneumatic Control Valves Type and Type

Mounting and Operating Instructions EB 8097 EN. Pneumatic Control Valves Type and Type Pneumatic Control Valves Type 3347-1 and Type 3347-7 Hollow-mold cast body with welding ends Full-mold cast body with threaded connections Fig. 1 Type 3347-7 Control Valve with Type 3277 Actuator and integral

More information

Diaphragm Valve, Metal

Diaphragm Valve, Metal Diaphragm Valve, Metal Construction The GEMÜ pneumatically operated 2/2-way diaphragm valve has a low maintenance actuator. Normally Closed, Normally Open and Double Acting control functions are available.

More information

Self-operated Temperature Regulators Temperature Regulator Type 1u

Self-operated Temperature Regulators Temperature Regulator Type 1u Self-operated Temperature Regulators Temperature Regulator Type u Application Temperature regulators for cooling installations Control thermostats for set points from 0 to 250 C G ½ to G or DN 5 to DN

More information

SPIRA-TROL 1/2" to 4" ANSI Two-port LEA, LFA and LLA Control Valves

SPIRA-TROL 1/2 to 4 ANSI Two-port LEA, LFA and LLA Control Valves 1/2" to 4" ANSI Two-port LEA, LFA and LLA Description SPIRA-TROL is a range of two-port single seat globe valves with cage retained seats conforming to ASME/ANSI standards. These valves are available in

More information

D1 Series Top Guided Single Seated Control Valves

D1 Series Top Guided Single Seated Control Valves D1 Series Top Guided Single Seated Control Valves Model D1S Overview Model D1S globe control valves are with bolted bonnet and top guided contoured trims. The design facilitates easy access to internal

More information

Pressure reducing valves

Pressure reducing valves Pressure reducing valves Pilot Operated 25 Series The Spirax Sarco 25-Series regulators are a versatile family of self-acting pressure regulators with control pilots and interchangeable main valves for

More information

Series V2001 Valves Type 3531 Globe Valve for Heat Transfer Oil with pneumatic or electric actuator

Series V2001 Valves Type 3531 Globe Valve for Heat Transfer Oil with pneumatic or electric actuator Series V2001 Valves Type 3531 Globe Valve for Heat Transfer Oil with pneumatic or electric actuator DIN version Application Control valves for heat transfer applications using organic media according to

More information

Fisherr easy -et Cryogenic Sliding -Stem Control Valves

Fisherr easy -et Cryogenic Sliding -Stem Control Valves Product Bulletin D102189X012 easy--e Cryogenic Valves Fisherr easy -et Cryogenic Sliding -Stem Control Valves Fisher easy--e cryogenic valves are globe--style, single--port, valves featuring stainless

More information

Series 2003 / Three-way control valve. Features. Wörth am Main

Series 2003 / Three-way control valve. Features. Wörth am Main Series 2003 / 2013 Three-way control valve SPECIFICATION The Series 2003 / 2013 comprises a range of skirt guided Three-way mixing (2003) and diverting valves (2013). Available in a variety of sizes, they

More information

SPIRA-TROL 1/2" to 4" ANSI Two-port KEA, KFA and KLA Control Valves

SPIRA-TROL 1/2 to 4 ANSI Two-port KEA, KFA and KLA Control Valves 1/2" to 4" ANSI Two-port KEA, KFA and KLA Description SPIRA-TROL is a range of two-port single seat globe valves with cage retained seats conforming to ASME/ANSI standards. These valves are available in

More information

KLINGER BALLOSTAR KHE 2-piece ball valves DN (1/2" 8")

KLINGER BALLOSTAR KHE 2-piece ball valves DN (1/2 8) KLINGER BALLOSTAR KHE 2-piece ball valves DN 15 0 (1/2" 8") www.klinger.kfc.at MF 01 KLINGER FLUID CONTROL Today for tomorrow As a subsidiary of the KLINGER Group, KLINGER Fluid Control has been developing,

More information

Type Pneumatic Control Valve Type 3525 Globe Valve

Type Pneumatic Control Valve Type 3525 Globe Valve Type 355-1 Pneumatic Control Valve Type 355 Globe Valve Application Dump valve designed for use in high-pressure on/off applications in upstream oil and gas production. Valve size NPS 1 to 3 Pressure rating

More information

In combination with an actuator, e.g. a SAMSON Type 3271 or Type 3277 Pneumatic Actuator

In combination with an actuator, e.g. a SAMSON Type 3271 or Type 3277 Pneumatic Actuator Type 3510 Micro-flow Valve In combination with an actuator, e.g. a SAMSON Type 3271 or Type 3277 Pneumatic Actuator DIN version Translation of original instructions Type 3510-1 (left) and Type 3510-7 (right)

More information